Krome PDF

Operation Guide
E 3
ThankyouforpurchasingtheKorgKROMEMusicWorkstation.Tohelpyougetthemostoutofyournew
instrument,pleasereadthismanualcarefully.
About this manual

The manuals and how to use them
TheKROMEcomeswiththefollowingmanuals.
VideoManual(approximately60minutes)
QuickStartGuide(printedandPDF)
OperationGuide(PDF)
ParameterGuide(PDF)
VoiceNameList(PDF)
Allofthesemanualsareontheincludedaccessorydisc.
References to the KROME

TheKROMEisavailablein88key,73key,and61key
models.Themanualsrefertoallmodelswithout
distinctionastheKROME.Thefrontpanelandrear
panelillustrationsinthemanualshowthe61keymodel,
buttheyapplyidenticallytotheothermodels.
AprintedcopyisincludedonlyfortheQuickStart
Guide.
Abbreviations for the manuals: QS, OG, PG,

VNL
Video Manual
Inthedocumentation,referencestothemanualsare
abbreviatedasfollows.
Thisvideoillustratesthemainfunctionalityofthe
KROME.
QS:QuickStartGuide
Quick Start Guide
PG:ParameterGuide
ThisprovidesasimpleexplanationoftheKROMEs
functions.Tobegin,pleasewatchtheVideoManualand
readtheQuickStartGuide.
VNL:TheVoiceNameList
Operation Guide
Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer
thequestion,HowdoIdothis?
OG:OperationGuide
Symbols
, Note, Tips
Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,aMIDI
relatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.
Example screen displays
Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe
KROME,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode,
howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,andsoon.
Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects,the
Arpeggiator,DrumTrack,andDrumKits.
Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensof
thismanualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmay
notnecessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheDisplay
ofyourinstrument.
Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideaswellas
supplementalinformationsuchasalistofspecifications.
MIDI-related explanations
Parameter Guide
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber.
TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion,
Whatdoesthisdo?
InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare
brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.
Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide
includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe
KROME.
What is REMs
Voice Name List

TheVoiceNameListlistsallofthesoundsandsetups
thatareintheKROMEwhenitisshippedfromthe
factory,includingPrograms,Combinations,
Multisamples,Drumsamples,DrumKits,Arpeggio
Patterns,DrumTrackPatterns,TemplateSongs,and
EffectPresets.
PDF versions
TheKROMEPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasy
navigationandsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDF
contentsinformation,whichgenerallyappearsonthe
sideofthewindowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujump
quicklytoaspecificsection.Allcrossreferencesare
hyperlinks,sothatclickingonthemautomaticallytakes
youtothesourceofthereference.
ii
Conventions in this manual
*?
(ResonantstructureandElectroniccircuit
ModelingSystem)isKorgsproprietarytechnologyfor
digitallyrecreatingthenumerousfactorsthatproduce
andinfluenceasound,rangingfromthesound
productionmechanismsofacousticinstrumentsand
electric/electronicmusicalinstruments,totheresonances
ofaninstrumentbodyorspeakercabinet,thesoundfield
inwhichtheinstrumentisplayed,thepropagationroute
ofthesound,theelectricalandacousticresponseofmics
andspeakers,andthechangesproducedbyvacuum
tubesandtransistors.
* Allproductnamesandcompanynamesarethe
trademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespective
owners.
Table of Contents
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Introduction to the KROME . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Front and rear panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Objects in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About the KROMEs modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Turning the power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting the AC adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Turning the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Turning the power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Audio connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Connecting a damper pedal, foot switch, or
foot pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Connecting the KROME to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Connecting MIDI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Playing and editing Programs . . . . . . . .21

Playing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selecting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Program information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Using Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Performing with the arpeggiator or drum track . . .26
Easy Program editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adjusting the EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Adjusting the volume balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Using realtime controls to edit the sound or
effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Using Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Comparing the unedited sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Saving your edits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Detailed Editing with Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Before you start editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
An overview of the edit pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Basic oscillator settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Creating time-varying changes (LFO and EG). . . . . .35
Diverse modulation settings
(AMS and AMS mixer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Controlling Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Using the Amp section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Making controller assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Arpeggiator settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Drum Track settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Automatically importing a Program
into Sequence mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playing and editing Combinations . . . .43

Playing combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Selecting Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using controllers to modify the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Performing with the arpeggiator or drum track . . . 45
Easy Combination editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Changing the program of each timbre. . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adjusting the mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Simple editing using the knobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Saving a Combination youve edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Detailed Editing with Combinations . . . . . . . . . . 47
A suggested approach for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Restoring edited settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
MIDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Altering Programs to fit within a Combination . . . . 51
Arpeggiator settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Drum Track settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Automatically importing a Combination
into Sequencer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Creating songs (Sequencer mode) . . . .53

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
About the KROMEs Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Sequencer mode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Transport control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Playing Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Preparations for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Recording MIDI in real time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Step recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recording multiple tracks from an external
sequencer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Recording System Exclusive events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Recording patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Other way to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Song editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
MIDI tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Track view edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Piano Roll Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
iii
Table of Contents
Creating an RPPR pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Creating RPPR data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
RPPR playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Realtime-recording an RPPR performance . . . . . . . .72
Adjusting Global KROME setings . . . . 109

How Global mode is structured. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Saving your song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Global settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Basic setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Pedal and other controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Creating user scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Setting Category Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Using Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Loading & saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
An overview of the KROMEs effects . . . . . . . . . . 77

Effect I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Effects in each mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Routing effect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Program Effects settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Using effects in Combinations and Songs . . . . . . . . .81
Saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Saving data on the KROME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Writing to internal memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Editing names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Saving to SD card (MediaSave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Using the KROME as a data filer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO . . . . . . . 82

Dynamic modulation (Dmod). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Common FX LFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Loading data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Data that can be loaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Loading data from SD card (MediaLoad). . . . . . . .120
Arpeggiator function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Media utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Formatting media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Setting the current time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Creating and playing a Cue List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Creating a cue list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Converting a cue list to a song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Using the arpeggiator while you play . . . . . . . . 85

Using the arpeggiator in Program mode . . . . . . . . . .85
Using the arpeggiator in Combination mode. . . . . .88
Arpeggiator settings in Combination and
Sequencer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Linking the arpeggiator to programs or
combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Creating a user arpeggio pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Regarding arpeggiator synchronization. . . . . . . . . . .96
Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Performing with the Drum Track function . . . . 97
Using the Drum Track function in Program
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Using the Drum Track function in Combination
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Drum Track function settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Drum Track function settings in Program
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Drum Track function settings in Combination
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Drum Track function settings in Sequencer
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Synchronizing the Drum Track function. . . . . . . . . 102
Creating a Drum Track pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Restoring the factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Loading the preloaded data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Programs and Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Arpeggiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Drum Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Damper pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Connections with a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Error and confirmation messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Operating requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Using Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Drum Kit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Before you start editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Editing a Drum Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
iv
Introduction to the KROME

Front and rear panels
Front panel
3
15
4 56
11
10
12
13
14
* The diagram shown is for KROME-61
1. Volume
VOLUME knob
ThisknobadjuststhevolumeoftheAUDIOOUTPUT
L/MONO,Routputs,aswellasthevolumeofthe
headphonejack.(Seepage 15)
2. SW1, 2 and Joystick
(Fordetails,pleaseseeUsingrealtimecontrolstoedit
thesoundoreffectsonpage 28.)
4. Arpeggiator
ARP button
Thisbuttonturnsthearpeggiatoron/off.Thebutton
willbelitifthearpeggiatorison.(Seepage 85)
SW1 and SW2
5. DRUM TRACK
Thesebuttonsareusedtocontroltheprogramsor
effectparameters,ortoturnthejoysticklockfunction
on/off.(Seepage 24)
DRUM TRACK button
Joystick
Thisbuttonalsoindicatestheoperatingstateofthe
drumtrack.(Unlit:off,Blinking:waitingfortrigger,
Lit:on.Seepage 97.)
Youcancontrolsynthesisparametersoreffect
parametersbymovingthejoystickup/down/left/right.
(Seepage 24)
3. REALTIME CONTROLS
Theserealtimecontrollersconsistoffourknobsand
onebutton.Youcanusethemtodothefollowing
things.
Controlthesoundandeffectsofprogramsand
combinations
Controlthearpeggiator
SELECT button, knobs 14

UsetheSELECTbuttontoselectthefunctions
controlledbyknobs14.Byusingknobs14youcan
controlthesound,effects,andarpeggiator.
ThisbuttonturnstheDrumTrackfunctiononoroff.
6. Effect buttons
MASTER FX button
TOTAL FX button
Thesebuttonsturnthemastereffectandtotaleffecton/
off.Whenthebuttonison(LEDlit),theeffectsettings
oftheprogram,combination,orsongwillbeenabled.
Whenthebuttonisoff(LEDunlit),thecorresponding
effectwillbeoff.
Theon/offstatusofthesebuttonsisrememberedeven
whenyouswitchprograms,combinations,orsongs.
(Seepage 110)
(Fordetails,pleaseseeRealtimecontrolknobson
page 25.)
7. Display
12. Save (Write)
Display
WRITE button
TheTouchViewdisplayfeaturessimpletouchcontrol
andselectionofnumerousfeaturesandparameters.
(Seepage 4)
Usethisbuttontosaveprograms,combinations,global
settings,drumkits,orarpeggiopatternstointernal
memory(seepage 9).
8. Mode
Youllalsousethisbuttontosavesongstomedia(see
page 75).
COMBI, PROG, SEQ, GLOBAL, MEDIA buttons

KROMEhasfivedifferentmodes,eachoneis
optimizedforaspecificsetoffunctions.
Pressoneofthesebuttonstoenterthecorresponding
mode.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeSelectingmodeson
page 9.
9. PROG/COMBI BANK
A, B, C, D, E, F buttons
ThesebuttonsselectprogrambanksAFand
combinationbanksAD(seepage 21,andpage 44).
Youcanalsousethesebuttonstoselectthebankof
timbreprogramsinacombination,orthebankoftrack
programsinasong(seepage 46,andpage 57).
IfyouwanttoselectaGMbank,usethenumerickeys
(seepage 22)ortheBank/ProgramSelectmenu(see
page 22).
10. VALUE controllers

Usethesecontrollerstoedittheparameterthats
selectedinthedisplay.
INC and DEC buttons

VALUE dial
09, , ., and ENTER buttons
Together,thesecontrolsspecifyandconfirmthevalue
oftheselectedparameter.(Seepage 10)
COMPARE button
Comparesyourcurrenteditedsoundtothesound
beforeitwasedited.
Formoredetails,pleaseseeComparefunctionon
page 11.
Whenyoupressthisbuttonintheappropriatemodeor
page,aWritedialogboxwillappear.Pressthebutton
onceagaintosavethedata.
13. Sequencer
Thebuttonsinthissectionareusedforoperationsin
Sequencermode,suchasrecordingandplayback(see
page 54).TheREC()buttonisalsousedtosavea
programorcombination,orwhenusingtheAutoSong
Setupfunction(seepage 59).
PAUSE ( ) button
REW ( ) button
FF ( ) button
LOCATE ( ) button
REC ( ) button
START/STOP (
) button
14. TEMPO controls

TEMPO knob
Thisknobadjuststhetempoofthearpeggiator,drum
track,orinternalsequencer.
TEMPO LED
ThisLEDwillblinkatquarternoteintervalsofthe
currenttempo.
TAP button
Bypressing(ortapping)thisbuttononthebeat,you
canenterthetempousedbythearpeggiator,drum
track,orinternalsequencer(seepage 25).
15. Headphone
Headphone jack
Connectyourheadphoneshere.
11. PAGE SELECT, EXIT
ThisjackwilloutputthesamesignalastheAUDIO
OUTPUTL/MONOandRjacks.
PAGE button
TheheadphonevolumeiscontrolledbytheVOLUME
knob.
Whenyoupressthisbutton,alistofthepageswithin
theselectedmodewillappearinthedisplay.Pressthe
buttonofthedesiredpage.(Seepage 9)
EXIT button
Pressthisbuttontoreturntothemainpageofthe
currentmode.(Seepage 9)
Front and rear panels Rear panel
Rear panel
1. Power supply
3. PEDALS
BesuretoseeTurningthepowerononpage 15and
followthecorrectproceduredescribedthere.
Youcanconnectadamperpedal,footswitch,andfoot
pedaltothesejacks.Thisgivesyouabroaderrangeof
functionsandeffectstocontrol.(Seepage 18)
Note: TheKROMEhasanautopowerofffunctionthat
automaticallyturnsoffthepowerwhenthekeyboard
orfrontpanelbuttonshavenotbeenusedforacertain
lengthoftime.Withthefactorysettings,thisissetto4
hours(seeAutopowerofffunctiononpage 16).
Power switch
Thisswitchturnsthepoweron/off.(Seepage 15)
AC adapter connector
TheincludedACadapterisconnectedhere.
(See page 15)
Connectionsmustbemadewiththepowerturned
off.Pleasebeawarethatcarelessoperationmay
damageyourspeakersystemorcause
malfunctions.
Cable hook
UsethistosecurethecableoftheincludedACadapter.
AfterconnectingtheACadapter,loopthecable
aroundthehooklocatedontheKROMEsrearpanelso
thatthecablewontgetpulledoutinadvertently.Leave
enoughslackontheplugendsothatyoucan
disconnectitifyouwantto.(Seepage 15)
Becarefulnottobendthebaseoftheplugany
morethannecessary.
2. AUDIO OUTPUTS
AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO & R jack
Thesearethestereoaudiooutputs.UsetheVOLUME
knobtoadjustthevolume.(Seepage 17)
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack
DAMPER jack
4. MIDI
MIDIletsyouconnecttheKROMEtoacomputeror
otherMIDIdevices,forsendingandreceivingnotes,
controllergestures,soundsettings,andsoon.(See
page 20)
MIDI IN connector
MIDI OUT connector
5. SD
SD card slot
YoucaninsertanSDcardhere,anduseittosave/load
KROMEprograms,combinations,orsongdata.(See
page 118)
6. USB
USB connector
(for connecting to computer)
Youcanconnectyourcomputertothisconnector.
UsingasingleUSBcable,yourKROMEcansendand
receiveMIDIinformationdirectlytoandfroma
computer,withoutrequiringaMIDIinterface.(See
page 20)
Note: TheUSBconnectoroftheKROMEisonlyableto
transmitandreceiveMIDIdata.
c: Tab
Objects in the display
Mostpagesaredividedintotwoormoretabs.
TheKROMEusesKorgsTouchViewgraphicaluser
interface.
Bypressingordraggingobjectsshowninthedisplay,
youcanselectprogramsorcombinations,oredit
parametervalues.Herewellexplainthenamesand
functionsoftheseobjects.
a: Mode button
g: Check boxes
b: Current page
l: Stopwatch button
k: Menu command button
j: Popup
button (2)
i: Popup
button (1)
d: Parameters
Theparametersforvarioussettingsareshowninthe
display.
e: Edit cell
Whenyoutouchaparameterinthedisplay,the
parameterorparametervaluewillusuallybe
highlighted(displayedinreversehighlighting).Thisis
calledtheeditcell,andthehighlighteditemwillbe
availableforediting.
UseavaluecontrollersuchastheVALUEdial(see
page 2)toeditthevalue.
e: Edit cell
f: Sliders and knobs
d: Parameters
c: Tab
h: Toggle buttons
Alternatively,youcaneditthevaluebypressingthe
editcellandusingyourfingertodraginthedirection
ofthetrianglesthatappear.(Theshadingofthe
triangleswillchangeinthreelevels;thisfunctionwill
becomeavailablewhenthedarkestshadingis
reached.)
a: Mode button
Thisindicatesthemodethatscurrentlyselected.
Whenyoupressthisbutton,theModemenuwill
appear.Inthemodemenu,pressthenameofthemode
thatyouwanttomove.Ifyouselectthecurrently
selectedmode,thePageSelectmenuforthatmodewill
appear.Eveninanothermode,pressingtherightside
ofthenamewilldisplaythePageSelectmenuforeach
mode.
Toclosethemenu,presstheClosebuttonortheEXIT
button.
IfyouaccessthismenufromGlobalorMediamode,it
willincludeanitemnamedReturn.Ifyoupress
Return,youwillreturntothemodewhereyouwere
beforeselectingGlobalorMediamode.
Inaddition,youcandisplaytheeditpadbypressing
twiceinsuccessionontheeditcell,orbyholdingit
downforatimeandthenreleasingit(seepage 6).
f: Sliders and knobs

Toeditthevalueofanobjectshapedlikeaslideror
knob,pressittomovetheeditcell.Fordetailsonhow
toeditthevalue,pleaseseee:Editcell,above.
Theparameterwillbeactiveifitischecked,and
inactiveifitisunchecked.
Mode menu
When selected in Program,
Combination, or
Sequencer mode
When selected in Global or

Media mode
g: Check boxes
Thepresenceorabsenceofacheckmarkintheseboxes
willenable/disableparametersorfunctions.Puttinga
checkmarkintheboxwillenabletheitem,and
clearingthecheckmarkwilldisableit.
h: Toggle buttons
Thistypeofbuttonwillchangeitsfunctionorswitch
on/offeachtimeitispressed.
b: Current page
Thisindicatesthecurrentpagewithintheselected
mode.
Beginningontheleft,thisareashowsthemodebutton,
pagenumber:name,andtabname.
Mode button
Page number and name
Tab name
Play/Rec/Mutebutton(Sequencermode)
SoloOn/Offbutton(Sequencermode)
On/OffbuttonforEffect
Front and rear panels Objects in the display
i: Popup button (1)
* Dialog box
Whenthisbuttonispressed,apopupmenuwill
appear,showingtheparametervaluesthatare
availableforselection.
Whenyouselectamenucommand,youllseeascreen
containingthesettingsneededtoexecutethe
command.Thisiscalledadialogbox.Thedialogbox
thatappearswilldependonthemenucommandthat
youselect.Somecommands,suchasExclusiveSolo,
donotdisplayadialogbox.
Toentertheparametervalue,pressthedesiredvaluein
thepopupmenu.
* Popup menu
Text edit button
Pin
Pin
Thisswitchesthepopupmenu
displaybetweenlockedand
unlocked.
Whenlocked,thepinwillbeshown
closed,andthepopupmenuwill
remaindisplayedevenafteryou
pressaparametervalue.When
unlocked,thepinwillbeshown
opened,andthepopupmenuwill
closeimmediatelywhenyoupressa
parametervalue.
Cancel button
OK button
j: Popup button (2)
* Text edit button
Whenyoupressthisbutton,atabbedmenuwill
appear.
Whenyoupressthisbutton,thetexteditdialogbox
appearsforchangingthenamesofPrograms,
Combinations,Songs,etc.Fordetails,pleasesee
Editingnamesonpage 117.
Tocloseatabbedmenu,presstheOKbuttonorCancel
button.
Scroll bar
Text
Cursor
Character Set Selects

the type of character.
Usethiswhenyouneedtoseeparametervaluesthat
extendbeyondwhatcanbeshowninthedisplayat
onetime.
Character
buttons
Press here to scroll to left or right.
Press here and slide to left or

right to scroll to the desired
location.
Shift button
Switches
between
uppercase and
lowercase
characters.
Press here to scroll to the

corresponding location.
Cursor buttons
Move the cursor
to left or right.
k: Menu command button

* Menu
Whenthisbuttonispressed,alistofmenucommands
willappear.
Themenucommandsthatappearwilldiffer
dependingontheselectedpage.
Youcanalsoselectuptotenmenucommandsby
holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressinga
numerickey09.Themenuwillclosewhenyoupress
thedisplayinalocationotherthanthemenu,orwhen
youpresstheEXITbutton.
Space button
Insert a space at
the cursor location.
Delete button
Deletes the
character to the
left of the cursor.
Clear button
Delete all characters
of the text.
Cancel button, OK button

If you are satisfied with the text
that you input, press the OK
button. If you wish to discard
your input and exit the text edit
box, press the Cancel button.
* OK and Cancel buttons

Afterperformingotheroperationsinthedialogbox,
youcanexecutethecommandbypressingtheOK
button.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancel
button.(Theoperationwilloccurwhenyoupressand
releasethebutton.)Thedialogboxwillclose.
TheEXITbuttoncorrespondstotheCancelbutton,
Donebutton,andExitbutton.
Menu command button
* Done, Copy, and Insert buttons
Menu button
Therearebuttonswhichperformfunctionwhenthey
arepressedandreleased,suchasDone,Copy,and
Insert(similartotheOKandCancelbuttonsexplained
under*Dialogbox,above).
l: Stopwatch button
Whenyoupressthebuttonontheupperrightofthe
display,thetimeelapsedsincepoweronwillbe
displayed.YoucanusetheSTART/STOPbuttonand
RESETbuttontomeasureelapsedtime.Thisis
convenientwhenyouwanttocheckthetimeduringa
liveperformanceorrehearsal,ortodeterminethe
approximateplaybacktimeofasong.
Valueslider/Wheelpad
START/STOP:Startsorstopsthestopwatch
Whenyouholddownaneditcell,slider,orknobfora
whileandthenreleaseit,thewheel/valuesliderwill
appear.
RESET:Returnsthetimeto000:00:00
Tochangethevalue,dragthewheel/sliderpad.
SLIDER
m: Radio buttons
Pressaradiobuttontoselectonevaluefromtwoor
morechoices.
WHEEL
m: Radio buttons
* Edit pad
Numericalinputpad/calculator
Note: Ifyoudontwanttheeditpadtoappear,clearthe
EnableEditPadcheckboxinthemenufoundin
GlobalP0:BasicSetupSystemPreferences(see
page 111).
Ifyoupressaneditcell,slider,orknobtwiceinquick
succession,apadforinputtingnumbersorusinga
calculatorwillappear.Thevariousbuttonshavethe
followingfunctions.
* EG, Velocity Split
OPERATIONDIRECT/CALCULATE:Switches
betweennumericalinputpadandcalculator.
YoucanchangethevaluesofaEGorvelocitysplit
objectbydragginginthedisplay.
CE(clearentry):Clearsthecurrentlyinputnumber.
Ent:Entersthenumberfromthepadintothe
parameter,andclosesthepad.
RECALL:Copiestheparametervalueintothepad.
Close:Closesthepad.
Numericalinputpad
Calculator
Note: Someparameterscannotusethecalculator
function.
Bankandnumberselectpad
IfyoupresstwiceinsuccessiononProgramSelect,
CombinationSelect,orTimbreSelect,thebankand
numberselectpadwillappear.
Bankandnumberselectpad
* Realtime control popup

WhenyouuseaREALTIMECONTROLSknob,a
popupwillindicatethefunctionthatsbeingcontrolled
anditsvalue.Acertainlengthoftimeafteryoustop
usingtheknob,thispopupwillcloseautomatically.If
youpressthepopupwhileitsdisplayed,itwillstay
visible,allowingyoutoenterthevalueusingavalue
controllersuchasthenumerickeys.
Note: Ifyoudontwanttherealtimecontrolpopupto
appear,cleartheREALTIMECONTROLPopUp
checkboxinthemenulocatedinGlobalP0:Basic
SetupSystemPreferences.
BANK:Selectstheprogramorcombinationbank.
Forotherfunctions,seeNumericalinputpad.
Basic Information About the KROMEs modes
Basic Information
About the KROMEs modes
TheKROMEhasnumerousfunctionsthatletyouplay
andeditprogramsorcombinations,recordandplay
backsequencedata,andmanagemedia.These
functionsaregroupedintomodes.TheKROMEhas
fivemodes.
Program mode
ProgramsarethebasicsoundsofKROME.
InProgrammode,youcan:
SelectandplayPrograms.
Useonearpeggiatorinyourperformance.
PlaybackDrumTrackpatternswhileyouperform
usingaProgram.
EditPrograms
YoucanusetherealtimecontrolsandtheTone
Adjustfunctiontoeasilyedittheprogram.
Youcanadjusttheparametersandsettingsofthe
oscillators,filters,amps,EGs,LFOs,effects,arpeggi
ator,drumtrack,etc.
Youcanuseuptofiveinserteffects,twomaster
effects,andonetotaleffect.
Plus,youcancreatedrumprogramsusingdrum
kits(ascreatedinGlobalmode).
Combination mode
Sequencer mode
Sequencermodeletsyourecord,playback,andedit
MIDItracks.Youcan:
UsethesixteentrackMIDIsequencertorecordand
playbacksongs.
RecordasingleMIDItrackatatime,orrecordas
manyasallsixteentrackssimultaneously.Youcan
alsorecordexclusivemessages.
Usemultipletrackstorecordandplayback
performancesgeneratedbytwoarpeggiators.
Useoneormoretrackstoplaybackthepatternsin
thedrumtrack.
Editsongs.
UsetheKROMEasa16partmultitimbralsound
module.
GM/GM2playbackisalsosupported.
UsetheToneAdjustfunctiontoeasilyeditthe
programofeachtrack.
Useuptofiveinserteffects,twomastereffects,and
onetotaleffect.
Recordpatternsandassignthemtoindividual
keys,usingRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/
Recording).
CreateaCueListthatwillplaybackmultiplesongs
intheorderthatyouspecify.
CreateuserDrumTrackpatterns.
Global mode
Combinationsaresetsofupto16programsthatcanbe
playedsimultaneously,lettingyoucreatesoundsthat
aremorecomplexthanasingleProgram.In
Combinationmode,youcan:
Globalmodeletsyouadjustoverallsettingsforthe
entireKROME,andeditdrumkits,arpeggiopatterns.
InGlobalmode,youcan:
SelectandplayCombinations.
AdjustsettingsthataffecttheentireKROME,such
asmastertuneandglobalMIDIchannel.
Usemultipletimbrestoplayarpeggiopatterns
generatedbytwoarpeggiators.
Createuserscales.
Useoneormoretimbrestoplaybackthepatterns
inthedrumtrack.
Createdrumkitsusingdrumsamples.
UsetheKROMEasa16trackmultitimbraltone
generator.
Renameprogram,andcombinationcategories.
EditCombinations
Createuserarpeggiopatterns.
Setthefunctionoftheassignablepedalsand
assignablebuttons.
Youcanusethetoneadjustfunctiontoeasilyedit
theprogramofeachtimbre.
TransmitMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps.
YoucanassignProgramstoeachofthe16Timbres,
eachwithseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboard
andvelocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,arpeg
giator,drumtrack.
Media mode
Plus,youcanuseuptofiveinserteffects,twomas
tereffects,andonetotaleffect.
YoucansaveorloaddatausinganSDcard.InMedia
mode,youcan:
SaveandloadPrograms,Combinations,Songs,and
Globalsetupdata.
FormatSDcard,copyandrenamefiles,etc.
Performfileoperationssuchascopyingdatatoor
frommedia.
ExportandimportsequencestoandfromSMF
(StandardMIDIFiles).
UsetheDataFilerfunctiontosaveorloadMIDI
SystemExclusivedata.
RelationaldiagramoftheKROMEsmodes
PROGRAM
Insert / Master / Total Effect
OSC 1
Multisample 1
Drum Kit
Multisample 5
Multisample 2
Multisample 6
Multisample 3
Multisample 7
Multisample 4
Multisample 8
PITCH1
MFX 1
MFX 2
FILTER1
Multisample 5
Multisample 2
Multisample 6
Multisample 3
Multisample 7
Multisample 4
Multisample 8
FILTER2
TFX
IFX 5
Arpeggiator
AMP1/
DRIVER1
OSC 2
Multisample 1
Drum Kit
PITCH2
IFX 1
DrumTrack
DRUMS PROGRAM
AMP2/
DRIVER2
COMBINATION
GLOBAL MODE
DRUM KIT
Key Assign
Drumsample 1
Drumsample 5
Drumsample 2
Drumsample 6
Drumsample 3
Drumsample 7
Drumsample 4
Drumsample 8
TIMBRE 1
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 9
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 2
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 10
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 3
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 11
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 4
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 12
PROGRAM

IFX 1
MFX 1
MFX 2
TFX
IFX 5
TIMBRE 5
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 13
PROGRAM
Arpeggiator
TIMBRE 6
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 14
PROGRAM
Arpeggiator
TIMBRE 7
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 15
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 8
PROGRAM
TIMBRE 16
PROGRAM
ARPEGGIO PATTERN
ARPEGGIO
PA TTERN
Drum Track
Preset Pattern: P0 - 4
User Pattern
SEQUENCER
MIDI TRACK 1...16
PROGRAM
TRACK 9
PROGRAM
TRACK 2
PROGRAM
TRACK 10
PROGRAM
TRACK 3
PROGRAM
IFX 1
TFX
PROGRAM
TRACK 11
PROGRAM
TRACK 12
TRACK 5
PROGRAM
TRACK 13
PROGRAM
Arpeggiator
PCG / SNG
TRACK 6
PROGRAM
TRACK 14
PROGRAM
Arpeggiator
PCG
TRACK 7
PROGRAM
TRACK 15
PROGRAM
TRACK 8
PROGRAM
TRACK 16
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
IFX 5
Drum Track
DRUM KIT
Preset Drum Track Pattern
User Drum Track Pattern
MFX 1
MFX 2
TRACK 4
MEDIA MODE
PCG
TRACK 1
Basic Information Basic operations
Basic operations
AfteryouveturnedontheKROME,hereshowto
performbasicoperations,suchasselectingmodesand
pages.
Selecting modes
InordertouseaparticularfunctionontheKROME,
youmustfirstselecttheappropriatemode.
Pressoneofthefrontpanelmodebuttonstoenter
thecorrespondingmode.
COMBIbutton:
PROGbutton:
SEQbutton:
GLOBALbutton:
MEDIAbutton:
Combinationmode
Programmode
Sequencermode
Globalmode
Mediamode
Alternatively,youcanpresstheModebutton
locatedintheupperleftofthedisplay,andselect
thedesiredmodefromamenu(seepage 4).
2. Pressthebuttonforthepagethatyouwantto
view.
P0:Playisthepageyoullnormallyusewhen
performingontheKROME.(Thesameistruein
Programmode.)Editingisdoneinotherpages.
Asanexamplehere,tryselectingP4Zone/Delay.The
P4:Zone/DelayKeyZT0108pagewillappear.
Forasummaryofeachmode,pleaseseeAboutthe
KROMEsmodesonpage 7.
Note: Theselectedmodeisshownintheupperleftof
thedisplay,andalsoindicatedbythelitstatusofoneof
theabovemodebuttons.
Note: BypressingtheGLOBALorMEDIAbutton
twice,youcanselectthepreviouslyselectedmode
(Combination,Program,orSequencer).
Selecting page group and tabs

Eachmodehasalargenumberofparameters,which
aregroupedintopages.Thesepagesarefurther
subdividedbytabs;withuptotwelvetabsperpage.
Makesurethatthedesiredmodeisselected.
ForthisexplanationwelluseCombinationmodeas
anexample.
Selecting a page group

Moving by selecting a page group
ThePageSelectscreenshowsalistofthepagegroups
withineachmode.Selectthedesiredpagegroupfrom
thislist.
1. PressthePAGEbutton.
Alternatively,youcanaccessthemodemenuandpress
themodebutton,andthenpresstherightsideofthe
menu(seepage 4).
Thepageselectmenuwillappear.
Thepagewhereyouwereimmediatelybeforepressing
thePAGEbuttonisshowninadarkercolorforyour
reference.
Note: Thepagethatappearswillbeshowingthetab
thatyoumostrecentlyselected.
Using the PAGE button plus the numeric keys 09

to access different pages
HolddownthePAGEbuttonandusethenumeric
keys09tospecifythepagenumberthatyouwant
toview.
Thespecifiedpagenumberwillappear.Thepage
thatappearswillbeshowingthetabthatyoumost
recentlyselected.
Note: InpagesconsistingofmultiplepagessuchasP5
1,P52,P81,andP82,thefirstpage(P51,orP81)
willbeselected.
Using the EXIT button to move between pages

Ifyoureinapageotherthanpage0(e.g.,ProgP0:
Play)ofeachmode,pressingthisbuttonwilltakeyou
topage0.
Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof
thecurrentmode:
Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon
themainP0:Playpage(Play/RECpagein
Sequencermode).
PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0:
Playpage(suchasthemainProgramPlaypage).If
youhadpreviouslyselectedaparameteronthis
page,thatparameterwillbeselected.
Pressitathirdtimetoselectthemainparameteron
theP0:Playpage,suchastheProgramnamein
Programmode.
Whenadialogboxisopen,thisbuttoncancelsthe
settingsmadeinthedialogboxandclosesthedialog
box,justlikepressingtheCancelbutton.
Ifapopupmenuormenuisopen,pressingEXITcloses
themenu.
Selecting pages
Youcanaccesstabbedpagesbypressingthetabs
showninthebottomlineofthedisplay.
ThisexampleshowstheProgramT0108page
throughMixerT0108pageofCombiP0:Play.
Functions that use the ENTER button in conjunction with another button
ENTERhasafewspecialfunctionswhenitispressed
incombinationwithotherbuttons.
ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonwhileyoupressa
numerickey(09),youcanselectuptotenmenu
commandsfromwithinthecurrentpage.
Whileadialogboxisdisplayed,theENTERbutton
correspondstotheOKbutton.(TheEXITbutton
correspondstotheCancelbutton.)
InSequencermode,youcanholddowntheENTER
buttonandpresstheLOCATE( )buttontousethe
menucommandSetLocation.
Other
Specifying a program bank or combination bank
PROG BANK A, B, C, D, E, F/
COMBI BANK A, B, C, D buttons
Usethesebuttonstochangebankswhenselecting
ProgramsorCombinations.TheLEDsinthebuttons
lightuptoshowthecurrentbank.
Selecting a parameter and editing the

value
1. Presstheparameterthatyouwanttoedit.
2. Ifyouselectaneditcell,thedisplaywillbe
highlighted.Editthevalue.
Thewaythatthevaluewillchangedependsonthe
typeofparameterorobject.(SeeObjectsinthe
displayonpage 4.)
Thevalueintheeditcellcanbeeditedbyusingthe
valuecontrollers(VALUEdial,INC/DECbuttons,
numerickeys09,button,(.)button,ENTERbut
ton,etc.).
3. Youcanuseknobs14toeditparametersthatare
assignedtothecontrolsurface.
Note: YoucanusetheCOMPAREbuttontocomparethe
soundyoureeditingwiththeoriginaluneditedsound.
INC/DEC buttons
Usethesewhenyouwishtomakesmallchangesinthe
value.
VALUE dial
Usethisdialtoedittheselectedparametersvalue.
Thiscontrolisconvenientwhenyouwanttoscroll
throughaverylonglistofselections.
Numeric keys 09, ENTER button, button,

(.) button
Thesebuttonsareconvenientwhenyouknowthe
exactvaluethatyouwanttoenter.Usethe09,,and
decimal(.)buttonstoenterthevalue,andthenpress
theENTERbuttontoconfirmtheentry.
Thebuttoninvertsthesign(+/)oftheparameter
value;thedecimal(.)buttoninsertsadecimal,for
enteringfractionalvalues.
10
Note: WhenselectingProgramSelect(seepage 21),

youcanselectaGMbankbyholdingdownthe0
buttonandpressingthe(.),19,orbuttons.
InProgrammode,thesebuttonsselecttheProgram
bank.
InCombinationmode,thesebuttonshavetwo
functions:
WhenyoureselectingCombinations,theychoose
theCombinationbank.
WhenyoureassigningaProgramtoatimbre
withintheCombination,theyselecttheProgram
bank.
InSequencermode,whenatracksProgramnameis
selected,thesebuttonschangetheProgrambank.
Using the keyboard to enter a note number or

velocity value
Byplayingakeywhilepressingaparameterthat
specifiesanotenumber(suchasG4orC#2)ora
velocityvalue,youcandirectlyenterthatnotenumber
orvelocityvalue.(Thisisnotavailableinmenu
commanddialogboxes.)
Tempo input
TEMPO knob, TAP button
YoucansetthetempobyturningtheTEMPOknobor
byrepeatedlypressingtheTAPbutton.
COMPARE button
Youcanusethisbuttontoreturnthesettingsofan
editedprogram,combination,orsongtotheiroriginal
state.Refertothefollowingsection.
Compare function
Program, Combination mode
Selecting and executing menu

commands
Usethiswhenyouwishtocomparetheeditsyouhave
madetoaprogramorcombinationssoundwiththe
uneditedoriginal(i.e.,thesoundthatiswritteninto
memory).
Wheneditingaprogramorcombination,pressthis
button.TheLEDwilllightup,andthelastwritten
settingsforthatprogramorcombinationnumberwill
berecalled.WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREbutton
onceagain,theLEDwillgodarkandyouwillreturnto
thesettingsthatyouwereediting.
1. Wheneditingaprogramorcombination,press
thisbutton.
TheLEDwilllightup,andthelastwrittensettingsfor
thatprogramnumberorcombinationnumberwillbe
recalled.
2. PresstheCOMPAREbuttononceagain.
Note: TheLEDwillgodarkandyouwillreturntothe
settingsthatyouwereediting.
Ifyoueditthesettingsthatarerecalledbypressingthe
COMPAREbutton(i.e.,thesettingsthatarewritten
intomemory),theLEDwillgodark,anditwillnotbe
possibletoreturntothepreviouseditsbypressingthe
COMPAREbuttonagain.
Sequencer mode
InSequencermode,youcanusetheCOMPAREbutton
tomakebeforeandaftercomparisonsimmediately
afterusingrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingto
recordasong,orafterperforminganeditonatrack.
Forexample,thiscanbeusedeffectivelywhen
realtimerecordingaMIDItrackforasong.
1. RealtimerecordaMIDItrack.(Take1)
2. Onceagain,realtimerecordonthesametrack.
(Take2)
3. PresstheCOMPAREbutton.TheLEDwilllight
up,andtake1willberecalled.
4. PresstheCOMPAREbuttononceagain.TheLED
willgodark,andtake2willberecalled.
5. Ifatstep3youonceagainrealtimerecordonthe
sametrack(take3),theComparefunctionwill
nowbereferencingtake1.
6. Ifatstep4youonceagainrealtimerecordonthe
sametrack(take3),theComparefunctionwillbe
referencingtake2.
Inthisway,theComparefunctionletsyourecallthe
previousrecordingorthepreviousstateofevent
editing.
Menu command button
Menu button
Theutilityfunctionsprovidecommandsthatare
specifictoeachpage,suchasWrite(save)orCopy.The
availableutilityfunctionswilldependontheselected
page.
Forexample,theutilityfunctionsinProgrammodelet
youwrite(save)thesettings,orletyouperform
convenienteditingoperationssuchascopyingsettings
betweenoscillatorsoreffects,oraSyncfunctionthat
letsyouedittwoEGstogether.
1. Ontheupperrightsideofthedisplay,pressthev
button.
Themenucommandwillappear.
2. Selectamenucommandbytouchingitwithyour
finger.
Adialogboxfortheselectedmenucommandwill
appear.
Checktypecommandswillnotdisplayadialogbox;
theirstatuswillbeswitched,andthelistwillclose.
ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressinga
numerickey09youcanaccessthedialogboxforthe
firsttenutilityfunctionswithoutgoingthroughthe
menu.
Ifyouwanttoclosethelistwithoutselectinga
command,pressthedisplaysomewhereotherthan
thelist,orpresstheEXITbutton.
3. Foraparameterinadialogbox,selectitby
pressingitwithyourfinger,andusetheVALUE
controllers(e.g.,VALUEdialorINC/DECbuttons)
toenteritsvalue.
Whenselectingaprogramorcombinationnumberina
dialogbox,youcanalsousetheBANKbuttontoenter
thebankasanalternativetousingtheVALUE
controllers.
4. Toexecute,presstheOKbuttonortheENTER
button.
Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancelorthe
EXITbutton.
Thedialogboxwillclose.
Note: IfyoucontinueeditingwhentheCOMPARE
buttonislit,thebuttonwillgodark.Thisnowbecomes
themusicaldatathatwillbeselectedwhenthe
COMPAREbuttonisdark.
Global mode
TheComparefunctionthatbringsbackthesettings
priortoeditingisnotavailableinGlobalmode.
11
Writing/saving
Shortcuts
Afterediting,youshouldwriteorsaveyourchangesas
necessary.
Selecting a GM bank program
Forexampleifyouveeditedaprogram,yourchanges
willbelostifyouselectanotherprogramorturnoff
thepower.Thesameappliestoacombination.
SettingsyoueditinGlobalmodeandsongswillbe
rememberedaslongasthepowerison,butyour
changeswillbelostwhenyouturnoffthepower,
unlessyouwritethesechangesintomemory.
YoucanwriteorsavebypressingtheWRITE
buttontwice.
FormoredetailsontheWriteoperations,seethe
followingpages.
BankGM:Holddownthe0numerickeyandpress
.
Banksg(1)g(9):Holddownthe0numerickeyand
press19.
Bankg(d):Holddownthenumerickey0andpress
(.).
Moving between pages within a mode

ByholdingdownthePAGEbuttonandpressinga
numerickey09youcanjumptothe
correspondingpage.
Programs p.30
Combinations p.47
Effectpresets PG p.67
Globalsettings(pages04) p.116
Drumkits p.116
Userarpeggiopattern p.116
UserDrumTrackpatterns p.103
Preset/userDrumTrackpatternsaresavedin
internalmemoryevenwhenthepoweristurned
off.PatternsthatyoucreateinSequencermodecan
beconvertedintouserDrumTrackpatternsand
savedininternalmemory.
Usertemplatesongs PG p.164
Preset/usertemplatesongsaresavedininternal
memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Track
settingsandeffectsettingsofasongyoucreatecan
besavedininternalmemorybyusingthemenu
commandSaveTemplateSong.
Fordetailsonwritingtointernalmemory p.115
Refertothefollowingpagesformoreinformation
aboutsaving.
Savingasong p.75
Savingtomedia(MediaSave) p.118
Note: OntheKROME,theactionofwritingtointernal
memoryiscalledWrite,andtheactionofsavingto
anSDcarddeviceiscalledSave.
Assigning a name (renaming)

Youcaneditthenameofaneditedprogram,
combination,song,drumkit,orarpeggiopattern.
Youcanalsochangethenamesoftheprogramand
combinationcategories.
Fordetails,pleaseseeEditingnamesonpage 117.
Access the menu commands in each page (up

to ten items)
ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressinga
numerickey09.
Input note number values or velocity values

Whileholdingdowntheeditcellinthedisplay,
pressanoteonthekeyboard.
Alternatively,selecttheeditcellinthedisplay,and
thenholddowntheENTERbuttonandpressanote
onthekeyboard.
Note: YoucanalsouseaMIDInoteonmessageinstead
ofthekeyboard.
Note: Whileadialogboxisdisplayed,theENTER
buttonwillperformthesamefunctionastheOK
button.Thismeansthatyoucantusethismethodto
enteranotenumberorvelocityvalueinadialogbox
thatcontainsanOKbutton.
Specifying the location in a song

InSequencermode,setsthecurrentlocationasthe
Location(equivalenttotheSetLocationmenu
command)
HolddowntheENTERbuttonandpressthe
LOCATE( )button.
ENTER button
Whileadialogboxisdisplayed,thisbutton
performsthesamefunctionastheOKbutton.
EXIT button
Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof
thecurrentmode:
1. Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon
themainP0page.
2. PresstheEXITbutton.Youwillmovetothe
previouslyselectedparameteroftheP0toppage
(Prog:Main,Combi/Seq:ProgramT0108).
3. PresstheEXITbutton.Youwillmovetothe
followingparameteroftheP0toppage.
Prog:ProgramSelect
Combi:CombinationSelect
Seq:SongSelect
12
InanypageofProgramorCombinationmode,
pressingEXITamaximumoftwotimeswill
immediatelyallowyoutousethenumerickeysor
INC/DECbuttonstoselectprogramsorcombinations.
InSequencermode,pressingEXITamaximumofthree
timeswillallowyoutoselectasong.
EXIT button (in dialog boxes)

Whenadialogboxisdisplayed,thishasthesame
functionastheCancel,Done,orExitbutton.
Initialize the KROME

Withthepoweroff,pressthepowerswitchwhile
holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandnumerickey
[0].
(Whiledataisbeingloaded,thedisplaywill
indicateNowwritingintointernalMemory.)
Theresultwillbethesameaswhenyouve
executedLoadPreload/DemoDataAll.
(Seepage 125)
13
14
Setup
Turning the power on/off
Connecting the AC adapter
1. MakesurethattheKROMEispoweredoff.
2. ConnecttheDCplugoftheincludedACadapter
tothepowersupplyjackontheKROMEsrear
panel.
YoumustuseonlytheincludedACadapter.Using
anyotherACadaptermightcausemalfunctions.
3. ConnectthepowercordtotheACadapter.
4. PlugthepowercordintoanACoutlet.
BesuretouseanACoutletofthecorrectvoltage
foryouradapter.
5. UsetheKROMEscablehooktofastenthecableso
thattheDCplugdoesnotbecomeaccidentally
disconnected.
ACadapterconnections
Iftheautopowerofffunctionisenabled,thetime
untilautopoweroffturnsoffthepowerwillbe
shownwhenthesystemstartsup.Ifthisdialog
boxdoesnotappear,theautopowerofffunctionis
disabled;thepowerwillnotturnoffautomatically
(seeAutopowerofffunctiononpage 16).
4: Cable hook
1: Power
supply jack
Power switch
When fastening the

cable to the cable
hook, take care not
to bend this portion
any more than
necessary.
AC adapter
2: Plug into AC outlet.
3: Power cord for AC adapter
Turning the power on
3. Turnonthepoweroftheexternalequipmentthats
connectedtotheKROMEsAUDIOOUTPUTL/
MONOandRjacks,suchaspoweredmonitor
speakers.
4. UsetheKROMEsVOLUMEknobandthevolume
controlsofyourexternalequipmenttoadjustthe
volumetoasuitablelevel.
Note: Thepagethatappearswhenyouturnonthe
powerwilldependonthePowerOnModesetting(see
page 110).
1. TurntheKROMEsVOLUMEknoballthewayto
theleftsothatthevolumeisdown.
Ifexternalequipmentsuchaspoweredmonitor
speakersareconnected,lowertheirvolumeaswell,
andthenturnofftheirpower.
2. PressthepowerswitchontheKROMEsrear
paneltoturnthepoweron.
Thedisplaywillshowthemodelnameandsoftware
version.(Theillustrationshowsthescreenthatwill
appearwiththefactorysettings.Thismaychange
withoutnotice.)
Turning the power off

Whenyouturnoffthepower,unsaveddatawillbe
lost.Besuretosaveanyimportantdatasuchas
editedsoundsorglobalsettings(seepage 12).
IftheKROMEsautopowerofffunctionis
enabled,itspowerwillautomaticallyturnoffif
therehasbeennouserinputforacertainlengthof
time.Unsaveddatawillbelostevenifthepoweris
turnedoffbytheautopowerofffunction.
1. TurntheKROMEsVOLUMEknoballthewayto
theleftsothatthevolumeislowered.
2. Ifexternalequipmentsuchaspoweredmonitor
speakersareconnected,lowertheirvolumeand
thenturnofftheirpower.
15
Setup
3. PressthepowerswitchontheKROMEsrear
paneltoturnthepoweroff.
TheKROMEsinternaldatamaybedamagedifthe
poweristurnedoffwhiledataisbeingwritteninto
internalmemory,suchasduringaSaveoperation.
Neverturnoffthepowerwhileprocessingisbeing
performed.
Thefollowingmessageisdisplayedwhiledatais
beingwrittenintointernalmemory.
Nowwritingintointernalmemory
Ifwritingtointernalmemorycouldnotbe
completedsuccessfully,theKROMEwill
automaticallyrepairtheinternalmemoryby
initializingitthenexttimeyouturnonthepower.
Thisisnotamalfunction.Ifthisoccurs,the
followingmessagewillappearinthedisplay;
presstheOKbutton.
Theinternalmemoryhasbeencorrupted,likely
duetoaninterruptionofpowerwhilethesystem
waswriting/savingdata.Thishasbeenrepaired
andtheaffectedBankhasbeeninitialized.
Asmallamountofelectricalpowerisusedeven
whenthepowerisoff(STANDBY).Ifyouwontbe
usingtheKROMEforanextendedperiod,turnoff
thepowerandunplugthepowercordfromthe
ACoutlet.
Auto power-off function
1. Whilethismessageisdisplayed,presstheChange
Settingbuttoninthedialogbox.
Thefollowingdialogboxwillappear.
2. Pressthepopupbuttontoselectthelengthoftime
afterwhichthepowerwillturnoff.Ifyoudont
wantthepowertoturnoffautomatically,choose
theDisabledsetting.
Changing the setting during operation

1. PresstheGLOBALbutton.(Alternatively,press
themodebuttonandchooseGLOBAL.)
2. PresstheEXITbuttontoaccessP0:BasicSetup.
3. PresstheSystemPref.tabtoaccesstheSystem
Preferencespage.
4. InAutoPowerOff,specifytheamountoftime
whenyouwantthepowertoturnoff.Ifyoudont
wanttheautopowerofffunctiontoautomatically
turnoffthepower,choosetheDisabledsetting.
TheKROMEsupportsanautopowerofffunctionthat
automaticallyturnsoffthepowerwhenthekeyboard
orfrontpanelbuttons(*)havenotbeenusedfora
certainlengthoftime.
*UsageoftheVOLUMEknobisnotincluded.
Note: Withthefactorysettings,thetimeuntil
automaticpoweroffwillbeapproximatelyfourhours.
Whenthepowerturnsoff,thesettingsyouhad
beeneditingwillbelost.Makesurethatyousave
importantsettingsbeforethisoccurs.
Changing the auto power-off setting
Auto power-off warning message
Ifyouwanttochangethesettingsothatthepower
doesnotturnoffautomatically,proceedasfollowsto
disabletheautopowerofffunction.
Whenthespecifiedlengthoftimehaselapsedwithout
anyuserinputontheKROME,amessagewillappear,
warningyouthattheautopowerofffunctionisabout
toturnoffthepower.
Making the change in the dialog box immediately

after start-up
Iftheautopowerofffunctionisenabledsothatthe
powerwillturnoffautomatically,thedialogboxwill
appearimmediatelyafterstartup,indicatingthetime
untilautomaticpoweroffwilloccur.
Ifyouwanttocontinueusingthesystem,pressthe
keyboard,abutton,orthedisplay.TheAutopoweroff
functionwillbereset.Ifthesamespecifiedlengthof
timeelapseswithnouserinput,thesamemessagewill
appearagain.
16
Connections Turning the power off
Connections
Connectionsmustbemadewiththepowerturned
off.Pleasebeawarethatcarelessusagemay
damageyourspeakersystemorcause
malfunctions.
Connections to computers
Pedal connections etc.
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH
Computer
DAMPER
USB
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
AUDIO OUTPUT
R L/MONO
MIDI IN
AC adapter power
supply connector
Connections to MIDI equipment
INPUT
Power cable
(Included)
MIDI cable
to an AC outlet
MIDI keyboard
Connecting the AC adapter

Powered
monitors, etc.
Analog audio output
17
Setup
Audio connections
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainbuiltinspeakers.In
ordertohearthesoundofyourperformance,youll
needtoconnectaudioequipmentsuchaspowered
monitors,amixer,astereosetorheadphones.
Connecting a damper pedal,

foot switch, or foot pedal
Ifyouconnectanoptionaldamperpedal,footswitch,
orfootpedaltotheKROME,youllbeabletocontrol
theKROMEusingyourfeet.
Connecting audio equipment

TheKROMEsaudiooutputisdesignedto
produceasignallevelthatishigherthanconsumer
audioequipmentsuchasCDplayers.Forthis
reason,performingathighavolumemaydamage
yourspeakersorequipment.Pleaseusecaution
whenadjustingthevolume.
1. Minimizethevolumeofallconnectedequipment,
andturnoffthepower.
2. ConnecttheKROMEsOUTPUTL/MONOandR
jackstotheinputjacksofyourpoweredmonitor
speakersormixer.
Note: IfyouconnectonlytheL/MONOjack,theLand
Rsoundwillbemixedformonauraloutput.Inorderto
takefulladvantageoftheKROMEscapabilities,we
recommendthatyoulisteninstereo.
Ifyoureplayingbackthroughyourstereoaudio
systemoracassetteradiothathasexternalinput
connectors,connecttheKROMEtothejacksthatare
markedLINEIN,AUXIN,orexternalinput.(You
mightneedtoobtaintheappropriateadapterplugor
conversioncable.)
Powered monitor speakers
INPUT
L/MONO
Connecting a damper pedal

Whenyoupressthedamperpedal,thenotesyouve
pressedwillbesustainedsothattheywillcontinue
evenafteryoutakeyourhandsoffthekeyboard.This
isalsocalledasustainpedal;ithasthesamefunction
asthedamperpedalofanacousticpiano.
IftheoptionalKorgDS1Hdamperisconnected,youll
beabletotakeadvantageofthehalfdampereffect,
wherethedepththatyoupressthepedalwillvarythe
damperamount.Ifanyothertypeofpedalis
connected,itwillfunctionasadamperswitch.
InCombinationorSequencermode,youcanalsoselect
settingssothatthedamperwillapplytosomesounds
butnottoothersounds.
1. ConnectaKorgDS1Hdamperpedaltothe
ASSIGNABLEPEDAL/SW1/DAMPERjack.
2. Dependingonwhichassignablejackyouhave
connectedthepedalto,setthecontrollertype
(Type)toDamper,andsetthePolarityas
appropriate(seepage 202oftheParameterGuide).
PHONES
Headphones
Connecting headphones
Usingheadphonesathighvolumeforanextended
timemaycausehearingdamage.Pleaseavoid
excessivelyhighvolumelevels.
1. Connectthestereominiplugofyourheadphones
totheKROMEsHeadphonejack.
2. UsetheVOLUMEknobtoadjusttheheadphone
volume.
TheKROMEsHeadphonejackwilloutputthesame
signalastheOUTPUTL/MONOandRjacks.
TheoutputfromtheOUTPUTjackisnotturnedoff
evenifheadphonesareconnectedtotheHeadphone
jack.
Note: Thehalfdampersensitivityisadjustedtoa
standardvaluewhentheKROMEisshippedfromthe
factory.Ifthehalfdamperpedalyoureusingdoesnot
respondappropriately,pleaseadjustthesensitivity
(seepage 217oftheParameterGuide).
Connecting a foot switch

Thisletsyouuseasimplefootswitch,suchastheKorg
PS1orPS3,asanassignablecontroller.Thefoot
switchcanperformawidevarietyoffunctions,such
as:
Anassignablesourceformodulatingsoundsand
effects
Portamentoon/off
Programselectupordown
Sequencerstart/stoporpunchin/out
TapTempo
18
Connections Connecting a damper pedal, foot switch, or foot pedal
SwitchtheDrumTrackon/off
Arpeggiatoron/off
4. SettheFootSwitchPolaritytomatchthe
polarityofthepedalyouveconnected.
UsevariousKROMEcontrols(realtimecontrol
knobs,joystick,SW1/SW2,etc.)
IfyouveconnectedtheoptionalPS1orPS3pedal,
choose()KORGStandard.
Thisbuttonwillalwaysfunctioninthesameway
regardlessoftheProgram,Combination,orSong
youveselected.Youcanassignthefunctioninthe
Globalmode.
Now,thefootswitchwillstepthroughthePrograms,
onebyone.
Using a foot switch to select Programs
6. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgP0:Play,and
pressthefootswitchtochangetheProgram.
Youcanselectprogramsbyusingafootswitch
connectedtotheASSIGNABLESWITCHjack.By
assigningtheappropriatefunction,youcanincrement
ordecrementtheprogramnumberinstepsofone.
ThisletsyouchangeProgramswithoutusingyour
handsgreatforquickProgramchangesinlive
performancesituations.
Therearetwowaysofdoingthis:byassigningthefoot
switchtoProgramUp/Down,ortoValueInc/Dec.Each
oftheseissuitedtoaparticularapplication,as
describedbelow.
ProgUp/Down:WhenperforminginthenormalP0
screen
VALUEInc/Dec:Whenperformingwhilealistsuch
astheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuisopen
Assigning the foot switch to Program Up/Down
5. Ifyouwanttopreservethissettingevenwhenthe
poweristurnedoff,besuretoWritethedata.(See
page 116)
Note: ThissettingappliestoselectingCombinations,aswell.
Note: WiththeProgramUp/Downmethod,youwont
beabletoselectprogramswhiletheBank/Program
SelectorCategory/ProgramSelectmenusareopen.
UsetheAssigningthefootswitchtoValueInc/Dec
methoddescribedbelow.
Assigning the foot switch to Value Inc/Dec

ThisletsyouusetheAssignableFootSwitchtoduplicate
thefunctionsofthefrontpanelINCorDECbuttons.
Thismethodisconvenientifyouwanttoopenthe
Bank/ProgramSelectmenuortheCategory/Program
Selectmenuandswitchprogramswhileviewingthe
programorcombinationmenu.
1. Followsteps12underAssigningthefootswitch
toProgramUp/Down,above.
AssigningthefootswitchtoProgramUporProgram
DownletsyoudirectlycontrolProgramchangesfrom
thefootswitch.Formostsituations,thisisthemore
straightforwardmethod.
2. Atthetopofthepage,settheFootSwitchAssign
parametertoValueInc(orValueDec).
Tosetthisup:
Note: Thefootswitchwillworklikethisfortheentire
KROMEnotjustwhentheBank/Programselectmenu
orCategory/ProgramSelectmenuisopen.
1. Connectafootswitchtotherearpanel
ASSIGNABLESWITCHinput.
3. Now,thefootswitchwillactjustlikeyoure
pressingthefrontpanelINCorDECbuttons.
UseanoptionalPS1pedalswitch.
2. AccesstheGlobalP2:ControllersFoot
Controllerspage.
Connecting a foot pedal

IfyouconnectanoptionalEXP2footcontrolleror
XVP10expression/volumepedaltotheASSIGNABLE
PEDALjack,youcanuseittoapplymodulationto
soundsoreffects,ortoadjusttheoverallvolume.
Thispedalwillalwaysfunctioninthesameway
regardlessoftheProgram,Combination,orSong
youveselected.Youcanassignthefunctioninthe
Globalmode.
LiketheAssignableFootSwitch,describedabove,the
FootPedalcanbeusedformanydifferentfunctions,
including:
MasterVolume
Proceedasfollows.
ChannelVolume,Pan,orExpression
PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode.
Assignablesoundmodulation,asseveraldifferent
AMSorDmodsources
PressthePAGEbuttontoaccesstheGLOBALPage
Select.PressP2Controllers,thenpresstheFoot
Controltabinthedisplay.
3. SetFootSwitchAssigntoeitherProgramUpor
ProgramDown.
IfyouchooseProgramUp,thenextprogramnumber
upwillbeselectedeachtimeyoupressthefootswitch.
IfyouchooseProgramDown,thenextprogram
numberdownwillbeselectedeachtimeyoupressthe
footswitch.
EffectsSendlevelcontrol
UsevariousKROMEcontrols(realtimecontrol
knobs,Joystick,SW1/SW2,etc.)
1. ConnectanoptionalXVP10orEXP2tothe
ASSIGNABLEPEDALjacks.
2. Afterturningthepoweron,useGlobalP2:
ControllersFootControllerspageFootPedal
Assigntoassignthefunctioncontrolledbythe
footpedal.(Seepage 111,andpages202,350ofthe
ParameterGuide)
19
Setup
Connecting the KROME to

a computer
USB connection
TheKROMEprovidesbothMIDIandUSBconnectors
asstandardequipment.ByconnectingtheKROMEto
yourcomputerviaUSB,youcanuseitasacontroller
andMIDIsoundmoduleforyourDAWsoftwarewith
singlecableconvenience;andwithouttheneedfora
MIDIinterface.
Controlling an external MIDI tone

generator from KROME
IfyouwanttousetheKROMEskeyboard,chord
triggerswitchesandothercontrollers,sequencer,and
arpeggiatortoplayorcontrolanexternalMIDIsound
module,useaMIDIcabletoconnecttheKROMEs
MIDIOUTconnectortotheMIDIINconnectorofyour
externalMIDIsoundmodule.
MIDI OUT
Byusingthededicatededitor,youcaneditsomeofthe
parametersoftheKROMEfromyourcomputeras
thoughitwereasoftwareplugin.
Note: TheUSBconnectoroftheKROMEisonlyableto
transmitandreceiveMIDIdata.
BeforeyouconnecttheKROMEtoyourcomputer
viaUSB,youmustinstalltheKORGUSBMIDI
driveronyourcomputer.
Connecting via the MIDI connectors

YoucanconnecttheKROMEtoyourcomputervia
MIDIbyusingacommerciallyavailableMIDI
interface.
MIDI IN
KROME
MIDI keyboard
Controlling KROMEs tone generator

from an external MIDI device
WhenyouwishtoplayorcontroltheKROMEstone
generatorfromanexternalMIDIkeyboardor
sequenceretc.,useaMIDIcabletoconnecttheMIDI
OUTconnectoroftheexternalMIDIdevicetothe
MIDIINconnectorofKROME.
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
Note: FormoreaboutMIDIinterfaces,refertothe
ownersmanualoftheMIDIinterfaceyoureusing.
SomeUSBMIDIinterfacesmaybeunableto
transmitorreceivetheKROMEsMIDIexclusive
messages.
Connecting MIDI devices

ByconnectingtheKROMEsMIDIconnectorstoan
externalMIDIdeviceyoucantransfersoundsettings
andperformancedatasuchasnotemessagesbetween
yourexternalMIDIdeviceandtheKROME.
KROME
Controlling two or more external MIDI

tone generators from KROME
YoucanalsouseaMIDIpatchbaytocontrolmultiple
MIDIdevices.
KROME
About MIDI
MIDIstandsforMusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface,
andisaworldwidestandardforexchangingvarious
typesofmusicaldatabetweenelectronicmusical
instrumentsandcomputers.WhenMIDIcablesare
usedtoconnecttwoormoreMIDIdevices,
performancedatacanbeexchangedbetweenthe
devices,eveniftheyweremadebydifferent
manufacturers.
20
MIDI keyboard
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI
patch bay
MIDI IN
MIDI tone generator
MIDI keyboard
Playing and editing Programs

About the KROMEs Programs
ProgramsarethebasicsoundsoftheKROME.
Youcanplaythembythemselves,layerthemtogether
inCombinations,orplayadifferentProgramoneach
ofthe16MIDItracks,eitherfromtheinternal
sequencerorfromexternalcomputerbased
sequencers.
Thissectionofthemanualtakesaquicklookatplaying
Programs,includingtoursofthefrontpanel
controllersandbasiceditingtechniques.
Playing Programs
Thisisshowninthetoplineofthedisplay.
Selecting Programs
Mode button
ThereareseveraldifferentwaystoselectPrograms.
Eachoneisconvenientinadifferentway:
Page number and name
Tab name
Bank
number
UsingProgramSelectandtheVALUE
controllers:
Program Select
(Program number and name)
UsingtheBank/ProgramSelectmenu:
Program Select popup button
Category Select popup button

(Category number and name)
UsingtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenu:
Ifadifferentpageisshown,presstheEXITbuttona
fewtimestoreturntotheProgP0:PlayMainpage.
Find
Usingafootswitch:page 19
MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect
Programsremotely,fromeitheraMIDIsequencer
oranexternalMIDIcontroller
Fordetails,pleaseseebelow.
3. MakesurethatProgramSelectisselected.
Ifitsnotselected,pressProgramSelectinthe
displayorpresstheEXITbuttontohighlightthe
indication.
4. Selecttheprogramyouwanttoplay.
Selecting a program using Program

Select and the VALUE controllers
Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselectaprogram.
UsetheINCorDECbuttons.
TurntheVALUEdial.
1. PressthePROGbutton.(TheLEDwilllightup.)
(Refertotheillustrationbelowforthebuttons.)
Usenumerickeys09toentertheprogramnumber,
andpresstheENTERbutton.
Alternatively,youcanusethemodebutton(see
Selectingmodesonpage 9).
5. PressoneofthePROGBANKAFbuttonsto
selectabank.
TheKROMEwillenterProgrammode.
WhenyouselectadifferentBank,thebuttonsLEDwill
lightup,andtheselectedbankwillappearontheleft
sideofthedisplay.
2. AccesstheProgP0:PlayMainpage.
2: PROG P0: Play
1: Mode name
(button)
3: Program Select
4: INC/DEC buttons
Velocity meter
4: Numeric keypads
ENTER button
1: ROG buttons
5: BANK AF buttons
4: VALUE dial
21
Forexample,toselectbankB,pressthePROGBANKB
button.TheBbuttonwilllightup,andthenameBank
Bwillappearontheleftsideofthedisplay.
ToselectaGMbank,youllusethenumerickeys.
GM:Holddown0andpress.
g(1)g(9):Holddown0andpressthedesirednum
ber19.Forbanksthatdonothavevariation
sounds,thebasicGMsoundswillberecalled.(An
*willbeappendedtothebeginningofthepro
gramname.)
Selecting by Bank/Program Select

menu
YoucanselectProgramsfromamenuorganizedby
Programbank.
1. PresstheProgramSelectpopupbutton.
TheBank/ProgramSelectmenuappears.
Bank/ProgramSelectmenu
g(d):Holddown0andpress(.).
Auditioning the sound

Playthekeyboardtoauditiontheprogramyouve
selected.
Thevelocitymetershowsthenoteonvelocity.
Thisshowsthevelocityvalueofnoteoneventsfor
theglobalMIDIchannel,suchasthekeyboard,
MIDIIN,andarpeggiator.(Ifmultiplenoteon
eventsarereceivedsimultaneously,thehighest
velocityvalueisshown.)
Sincethisshowsthenoteonvelocityvalues,itwill
notbeaffectedbythesettingsofthevolumeknob
orbychangesintheaudiosignallevel.
Overview: Program Banks

Asprogrambanks,theKROMEprovidesthesixbanks
AFandtheGMbanks(GMg(d)).Withthefactory
settings,theKROMEhas640preloadprogramsin
banksAE.BankFcontainsonlyinitializedprograms.
Programsyouvecreatedshouldbestoredinthisbank.
WiththeexceptionoftheGMg(d)banks,youarefree
tosavebyoverwritingtheseprogrammemoryareas.
YoucanalsosavetheseprogramsonanSDcard.
Programsareorganizedintosixbanksasshowninthe
followingtable.
Programbankcontents
Bank
Prog. No.
Explanation
AE
000127
Factory
Programs.
With the factory settings,

these banks contain a wide
variety of preloaded
programs that use the
internal multisamples,
effects, and arpeggiator.
000127
Initialized
Programs.
Use these to create a

program from scratch.
These banks contain 256

GM programs and nine GM
g(1)
GM2 variation drum programs that are
001128
compatible with the GM2
g(9)
programs.
sound map. The programs
of these banks are readonly.
Bank GM contains the GM
programs. GM lets you
select 128 programs
GM2 drum
g(d)
001128
numbered from 001128,
programs.
and g(1)g(d) lets you
select nine drum
programs.
You cant write (save) data
to these banks.
GM
22
001128
GM2 main
programs.
Inthisillustration,BankAisselected.Themenu
displaystheProgramscontainedinthatbank.
2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto
selectbanks.
3. Pressoneoftheprogramnamesinthecenterarea
toselectaprogram.
Theselectedprogramwillbehighlighted,andthe
programwillchange.
Alternatively,youcanusetheINC/DECbuttonsto
switchprograms.
Playthekeyboardorpressthechordtriggerbuttonsto
heartheprogramyouselected.
4. IfyouselectedBankGM,theVariationbuttonis
shown.
ByrepeatedlypressingthisVariationbutton,youcan
successivelystepthroughthebanks,allowingyouto
recallaGM2soundset(seeToselectaGMbankon
page 22).
5. WhenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedProgram,
presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.
IfinsteadyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselection
youmadeherewillbediscarded,andyouwillreturn
totheprogramthathadbeenselectedbeforeyou
openedthemenu.
Playing Programs Selecting Programs
Find
Hereshowtosearchforaprogrambyaportionofits
name.
1. AccesstheBank/ProgramSelectmenuorthe
Category/ProgramSelectmenu,etc.
Selecting by Category/Program Select

menu
YoucanselectProgramsfromwithinacategory,such
askeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.
2. Pressatabtoselectthebankorcategorythatyou
wanttosearch.
Whenshippedfromthefactory,thepreloaded
Programsareorganizedinto16categories,eachwith
severalsubcategories.
Note: Theprogramsincludedintheselectedtabwillbe
thesubjectofthesearch.
1. PresstheCategorySelectpopupbutton.
3. Onthelowerleftside,presstheFindbuttonto
accessthedialogbox.
Category/ProgramSelectmenu
TheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuappears.
4. PresstheTbuttontoaccessthetextdialogbox.
Enterthealphanumericcharactersthatyouwantto
find,andpresstheOKbutton.Forexampleifyouwant
tofindprogramsthattakeeffectiveadvantageofSW1
orSW2,entersw.
5. IfyouselecttheIgnoreCasecheckbox,
uppercaseandlowercasecharacterswillnotbe
distinguishedinthesearch.
6. PresstheFindbuttontobeginsearching.
Intheillustrationabove,theKeyboardcategoryis
selected.Themenuinthecentercolumnareashows
theProgramswhichbelongtothatcategory.
2. Pressthetabstotheleftandrightofthedisplayto
selectadifferentcategory.
Thenameoftheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedin
fullinthetoprighthandcorner.
SearchresultsareshowninFound.
3. Pressoneoftheprogramnamesinthecenterarea
toselectaprogram.
Ifoneormoreitemsarefound,thenumberofitems
andthefirstfoundprogramwillbedisplayed.
Theselectedprogramwillbehighlighted,andthe
programwillchange.
PressthePrev.buttonorNextbuttontofindthe
previousornextprogram.Thiswillcyclethroughthe
founditemswithinthetab.
Alternatively,youcanusetheINC/DECbuttonsto
switchprograms.Touchthescrollribbonatthebottom
ofthescreentoseealloftheProgramsinthatcategory.
Youcanplaythekeyboardtoauditiontheprogram
thatwasfound.
Playthekeyboardorpressachordtriggerbuttonto
heartheprogramyouselected.
Ifnoitemsarefound,thedisplaywillindicate
nothing.
4. Ifyouwanttoselectfromasubcategory,pressthe
JumptoSubbuttontoaccesstheSubCategory/
ProgSelectmenu.
7. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedprogram,
Pressthelefttabstoselectasubcategory.
Theselectedprogramwillbeselectedinthemenuyou
selectedinstep1.Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththeselected
program,presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.
Note: Youcantselecttabsforasubcategorythathas
noassociatedprograms.
Ifyouwanttosearchforadifferentprogram,orifno
itemswerefound,presstheCancelbutton.
PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,orpress
theCancelbuttontodiscardit.Youwillreturntothe
maincategory.
8. Pressthetabthatyouwanttoselectnext,and
searchasdescribedinsteps37.
IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,thisselectionwillbe
discarded,andyouwillreturntotheprogramthathad
beenselectedpriortoopeningthemenu.
Selectaprogramasdescribedinstep3above.
5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedprogram,
IfinsteadyoupresstheCancelbutton,yourselection
willbediscarded,andyouwillreturntotheprogram
thathadbeenselectedwhenyouopenedthepopup
menu.
23
Program information
Using Controllers
IntheProgP0:PlayMainpageyoucanviewthe
followinginformationabouttheselectedprogram.
OSCPicture:Thisisagraphicthatrepresentsthe
programsoscillator.
Inadditiontousingthekeyboard,theKROMEletsyou
controlthesoundbyusingthejoystick,SW1andSW2
buttons,knobs14,damperpedal,andfootswitchor
footpedal.
OSCOct:Foradoubleoscillatorordoubledrums,this
indicatesOct(thebasicpitchoftheoscillator).
Thesecontrolsletyoumodifythetone,pitch,volume,
effects,etc.inrealtimeasyouplay.
SW1,SW2:Thisindicatesthefunctionthatsassigned
totheSW1/SW2buttons,andtheon/offstateofthe
buttons.
RealtimeControlsTONECONTROLS/USER
CONTROLS/ARPCONTROLS:
Thisshowsinformationaboutthefunctionsofthe
REALTIMECONTROLSknobthatscurrentlyselected.
UsetheSELECTbuttontochoosethefunctionsthat
willbecontrolledbytheknobs.Formoreinformation
aboutthesefunctions,pleaseseepage 28.
EQ(Low,Mid[Hz],Mid,High):Thisshowsthe3band
EQsettings.Youcanusethevaluecontrollerstoedit
thevalues.
EffectControlsIFX,MFX,TFX:
Thisshowstheeffectsthatareassigned.TheKROME
providesinserteffects15,mastereffects1and2,anda
totaleffect.Forthemastereffects,youcaneditthe
returnlevels.
VelocityMeter:
Thismetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalue.
Realtime Controls
- Tone Controls
- User Controls
- Arp Controls
Effect Infomation
IFX 1-5
OSC Oct
SW1,
SW2
Velocity Meter EQ
(Lock
function)
Joystick
Joystick
Thejoystickmovesinfourdirections:left,right,up
(awayfromyourself),anddown(towardsyourself).
Eachofthefourdirectionscanbeusedtocontrola
differentfunction,suchasmodulatingProgramor
effectsparameters.Theseassignmentscanbedifferent
foreveryProgram,butgenerally,theydothefollowing:
StandardJoystickfunctions
Themetershowsthenoteonvelocityofthekeyboard,
MIDIIN,andarpeggiatoretc.(Ifmultiplenoteon
messagesarereceivedsimultaneously,thehighest
velocityvalueisshown.)
OSC
Picture
[SW1], [SW2]
Move the joystick
Controller
Name
Normally controls
Left
JSX
Right
JS+X
Pitch bend down

Pitch bend up
Up (away from yourself)
JS+Y
Vibrato
Down (towards yourself )
JSY
Filter LFO (wah)
Fordetails,pleaseseepage 82.
Joystick Lock
MFX 1, 2,
Send level
(On/Off )
Thisfunctionletsyoumaintaintheeffectthathadbeen
appliedpriortoreleasingyourhandfromthejoystick.
TFX (On/Off )
YoucanusetheSW1/SW2buttonsorafootswitch
connectedtotheKROMEtolockthecurrentposition
sothattheeffectwillcontinueevenafterthejoystick
returnstothecenterposition.Fordetails,pleasesee
LockingtheJoystickonpage 25.
SW1, SW2
Youcanusethesebuttonstocontrolprogram
parametersviaAMS(AlternateModulation),oreffect
parametersviaDmod(DynamicModulation).
Theycanalsotransposethekeyboardbyoctaves,turn
portamentoon/off,ortolockthepositionjoystick.
EachbuttoncanworkaseitheraToggleorMomentary
button.InTogglemode,theassignedfunctionis
switchedbetweenonandoffeachtimethebuttonis
pressed.InMomentarymode,theassignedfunctionis
activeononlyaslongasyouholddownthebutton.
InProgrammode,youcanchecktheassignmentsof
SW1andSW2ontheProgP0:PlayMainpage.
Fordetails,pleaseseePrograminformationon
page 24.
24
Playing Programs Using Controllers
WhenyouwriteaProgramorCombination,theon/off
statusoftheSW1andSW2buttonsissaved.
1. PresstheSELECTbuttontoselecttherealtime
controlfunctionbetweenTONE,USER,orARP.
Fordetails,pleaseseepage 82.
TONE,USER:Usetheknobstomodifythesoundor
effects(seepage 28).
Locking the Joystick
ARP:Usetheknobstocontrolthearpeggiator(see
page 86).
1. Usingthestandardfactorysounds,selectProgram
C027:SemiDistortionGuitar.
Toselectaprogram,makesurethatyouareinProgram
mode,andpressthePROGBANKCbutton,numeric
key2,7,andthentheENTERbutton.
2. Whileholdingdownakey,movethejoystickin
theYdirection(towardyourself).
Thetremoloeffectwilldeepen.
3. WhilekeepingthejoystickintheYdirection
(towardyourself),presstheSW2button.(TheSW2
buttonLEDwilllightup.)
Youcanfreelyswitchbetweenthesefunctionswithout
losingyourcurrentedits.
2. Useknobs14tocontroltheselectedfunctions.
Whenyouturnoneoftheseknobs,thatknobsfunction
andvaluewillappearinapopup.
(Youcanpreventthispopupfromappearing.See
page 111.)
Therewillbeaslightamountofplaywhenturning
theknobnearitsminimumormaximumpositions.
Whenyoupressthebutton,itsLEDwilllightup,and
themodulationeffectatthispointwillbemaintained.
TEMPO knob and TAP button
4. Releasethejoystick,andplaythekeyboard.
ThisadjuststhetempofortheKROMEasawhole,
including:
ThemodulationwillstaythesameasitwaswhenSW2
waspressed.Evenifyoumovethejoysticktoward
yourself,thesoundwillnotchange.
5. PresstheSW2buttononceagaintoreleasethe
Lockfunction.
Keyboard
TheKROMEskeyboardprovidesthefollowingtwo
typesofcontrol.
Velocity
Velocityisameasureofhowhardyouplayanoteon
thekeyboard.Thiscanbeusedtomodulatemany
differentaspectsofthesound,suchasvolume,
brightness,orthecharacteroftheattack.
Note Number
Arpeggiator
DrumTrack
SongsinSequencermode
TemposyncedLFOs
Temposynced(BPM)delayeffects
TEMPO LED
TheLEDwillblinkatquarternoteintervalsofthe
currenttempo.
TEMPO knob
Thisknobadjuststhetempo.Itsaconvenientwayto
makecontinuousadjustments.
Note: IftheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpageMIDI
ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,ExternalUSB,
orifitissettoAutoandaclockiscurrentlybeing
receivedviaMIDI,thenneithertheTEMPOknobnor
theTAPbuttonwillhaveanyeffect.
Soundscanbeprogrammedtochangeincharacter
basedonthenotebeingplayed.
TAP button
Asyouplayhigherorloweronthekeyboard,thenote
numbercanmodulatethetimbresuchasbecoming
brighterasyouplayhighernotes.Envelopesmayalso
becomefasterorslower;thevolumemaychange;and
soon.
YoucansetthetempooftheArpeggiatororDrum
TrackfunctioninProgram,Combination,and
Sequencermodesbylightlypressingortappingthe
TAPbuttonseveraltimesonthebeat.InSequencer
mode,youcancontrolthesongtempointhisway.
Realtime control knobs

Therealtimecontrolsconsistoffourknobsandthe
SELECTbutton.Thesecontrolsfunctionasfollows.
Youcanapplymodulationtosoundsoreditthem.
Youcancontrolthearpeggiator.
Toenterthetempo,useyourfingertogentlytapthe
TAPbutton.Thetempowillbeenteredwhenyoupress
thebuttontwice,butyoushouldtapseveraltimesin
ordertoincreasetheprecision.Theaverageofthelast
sixteentapswillbespecifiedasthetempo.
Duringplayback,lightlypresstheTAPbuttonseveral
timesatthedesiredtempo.Thetempowillfollowyour
tappinginrealtime.Thisisaconvenientwaytomatch
thetempoinrealtimetothebeatofadifferentsource.
Youcanusetaptempocontrolwheneverthe
TEMPOknobcanbeused.Forexamplein
Sequencermode,taptempocontrolwillnotbe
availableifyouareplayingasongwherethe
TempoModesettingissettoAuto.(Seepage 110
oftheParameterGuide)
Note: Youcanalsouseafootswitchconnectedtothe
ASSIGNABLEFOOTSWITCHjacktocontrolthetap
25
tempofunction(seepage 18,andpages202,349ofthe
ParameterGuide).
Damper pedal / Foot switch / Foot

pedal
Fordetailsonusingthedamperpedal,footswitch,or
pedaltocontrolthesound,pleaseseeConnectinga
damperpedal,footswitch,orfootpedalonpage 18.
Performing with the

arpeggiator or drum track
Basedonnotedatathatitreceivesfromthekeyboard
orfromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorcan
generateawiderangeofphrasesandpatterns
includingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboardbackingriffs,
bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.BysettingSELECTto
ARPandusingtheknobs,youcanvarytheduration
andstrengthofthearpeggiatednotes.
Formoreaboutthearpeggiator,pleaseseepage 85.
Thedrumtrackusesarichvarietyofdrumpatternsto
playtheKROMEshighqualitydrumprograms.You
canselectanyprogramandplayalongwiththedrum
patterns.
Ofcourseyoucanalsosynchronizethearpeggiator
andthedrumtrackpatternsandusethemtogether.
Formoreaboutthedrumtrack,pleaseseepage 97.
26
Easy Program editing Adjusting the EQ
Easy Program editing

Thefastestwaytocreatethesoundyouneedistostart
fromapreloadprogramthatsclosetowhatyouhave
inmind,andeditthatprogram.
Adjusting the volume balance
Simpleeditingcanbedonewithinthevariouspagesof
P0:Playwhereyouperform.YoucanadjusttheEQ
andvolumelevel,andintheToneAdjustpageyoucan
usetheslidersandbuttonstoperformvarioususeful
edits.Youcanalsousethefrontpanelrealtimecontrols
tointuitivelyadjustthecutoff,resonance,andrelease
time.
Aprogramssoundconsistsofuptotwooscillators
whichareplayedmainlyfromthekeyboard,andone
drumtrackwhichautomaticallyplaystherhythm
section.
Ifyouwanttododetailedediting,usetheediting
pagesP1andfollowing.
Note: Theresalsoamutefunctionwhich
individuallysilencesthese,andasolofunction
whichmutesallsoundsotherthanthespecifiedone.
Adjusting the EQ
Thevolumesoftheoscillatorsandthedrumtrackcan
beadjustedintheProgP0:PlayMixer&DrumTrack
page.
1. AccesstheProgP0:PlayMixer&DrumTrack
page.
OSC Play/Mute
Drum Track Play/Mute
Menu
YoucanadjustamidsweepablethreebandEQinthe
ProgP0:PlayMainpage.
Note: ThisEQwillaffectbothoscillator1andoscillator
2.
2. Onthedisplay,selecttheEQgainknoborthe
centerfrequencyoftheMidsweepEQthatyou
wanttoedit.
3. UsetheVALUEcontrollers(e.g.,VALUEdial)to
editthevalue.
Youcanalsoeditthevaluebydraggingleftorrighton
aknoboreditcellinthedisplay.
Volume
2. Selectasliderinthedisplay,andusetheVALUE
dialetc.toadjustthevolumeofoscillators1and2
andthedrumtrack.
Foroscillatorsthatusetwodrumkits,youcanusethe
OSC1andOSC2sliderstoadjustthedirectsoundof
theclosemiceddrumkitandtheambientsoundofthe
drumkitcapturedwithmorespace.
Note: Withsingleoscillatorprograms,youwontbe
abletocontroloscillator2.
EQ
3. YoucanpressthePlay/Mutebuttoninthedisplay
totogglethePlay/Mutestatusofoscillators1and2
andthedrumtrack.
4. YoucanpresstheSolobuttoninthedisplayto
toggletheSoloOn/Offstatusofoscillators1and2
andthedrumtrack.
ThefunctionoftheSolobuttonwillswitcheachtime
youselectExclusiveSolointhemenu(seepage 64of
theParameterGuide).
27
Using realtime controls to edit

the sound or effects
Youcanusetherealtimecontrols(theSELECTbutton
andknobs14)tomodifythesoundandcontrolthe
arpeggiator.
1. PresstheREALTIMECONTROLSSELECTbutton
toswitchtherealtimecontrolfunctionbetween
TONE,USER,orARP.
Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,youllcyclethroughA,
B,andCmodes,andthecorrespondingLEDwilllight
up.
Knob 3: EG INT
ThisadjuststhefilterEGintensity(thedepthofhow
theEGaffectsthefilter).
Usingtheknobwillchangetheamountofhowthe
filterisaffectedbytheEG.Normally,turningtheknob
towardtheleftwillmakethefilterEGshallower,and
turningtheknobtowardtherightwillmakeitdeeper.
SincethefilterEGoperatesrelativetothefiltercutoff
frequency,bothknobs1and3willcontrolthetonal
changeproducedbythefilter.
Level
Note: IfCC#7079areassignedtoREALTIME
CONTROLSAmodeandBmode,thesoundthatyou
editusingknobs14willbesavedwhenyouwritethe
program.ArpeggiatorsettingsyouadjustinCmode
willalsobesaved.
2. Modifythesoundbyturningtheknobthatyou
wanttocontrol.Seebelowfordetails.
TONE controls
InTONEsectionyoucanturnknobs14tocontrolor
editthefollowingitems.
Note: Whenaknobisinthecenterposition
(12 oclock),theparameterwillhavethevalue
specifiedbytheprogram.
Time
Knob 4: RELEASE
ThisadjuststhefilterandampEGreleasetime,
changingthetimefromnoteoffuntilthesoundisno
longerheard.
Turningtheknobwillchangethereleasetimeofthe
filterEGandtheampEG.Normally,turningtheknob
towardtheleftwillshortenthereleasetime,and
turningtheknobtowardtherightwilllengthenit.
note-on
Knob 1: CUTOFF
Thisadjuststhefilterscutofffrequency.Adjustingthe
cutofffrequencywillmodifythebrightnessofthe
sound.
Level
Attack Level
Break Level
note-off
Release Level
Sustain Level
Level
Decay Time
Attack Time
Slope Time
Time
Release
time
Sutart Level
Low
Cut off
frequency
Frequency
High
Knob 2: RESONANCE
Thisadjuststhefiltersresonancelevel.
Adjustingthefilterresonancelevelwillboostthe
soundintheregionofthefrequency,givinga
distinctivecharactertothesound.
Example:
1. SelectprogramCategory:KEYBOARDA066:
DarkR&BPiano.
Thisisanelectricpianosound.Letstrymodifyingthe
soundalittle.
2. PresstheREALTIMECONTROLSSELECTbutton
toselectTONE(theLEDwilllightup).
3. Whileyouplay,slowlyturnknob1(filter
frequency)about3/4towardtheright.
Thepianosoundwillbecomemorelikeasynthsweep.
4. Next,turnknob2(filterresonance)about3/4
towardtherightaswell.
5. Leaveknob2initsposition,andtryturningknob
1totheleftandright.
Raisingtheresonancewillchangethesoundasthough
youwereplayingthroughawahpedal.
28
Easy Program editing Using Tone Adjust
USER controls
IntheUSERsectionyoucanturnknobs14tocontrol
variousaspectsofthesoundsuchasvolume,
portamentotime,
pan,filterandampEG,pitchLFO,andmastereffect
sendlevel.
InUSER,themostusefulfunctionsareassigned
individuallyforeachpreloadprogram.
Thetablebelowshowsthestandardassignmentsofthe
RealtimeControlsknobs:
Knob
MIDI CC
TONE1
74
Filter Cutoff Frequency
TONE2
71
Filter Resonance
TONE3
79
Filter EG Intensity
TONE4
72
EG Release Time
USER1, 2
Normally controls
Varies for each Program
USER3
Often Chorus Depth - but can vary per Program
USER4
Often Reverb Depth - but can vary per Program
Fordetails,pleaseseepage 16oftheParameterGuide.
ARP controls
IntheARPsectionyoucancontrolthearpeggiatorin
realtime.
Fordetailsonfunctionality,pleaseseepage 86.
Saving the edits you made by moving the

knobs
Therealtimecontrolknobsareanidealwaytomodify
thesoundwhileyouperform.Asneeded,pressthe
frontpanelWRITEbuttontoWritethePrograminto
memoryandsavethesoundyouveedited.(See
Savingyoureditsonpage 30.)
HoweverforRealtimeControlsUSERknobs14,
theeditedsettingscanbesavedonlyifyouve
assignedCC#7079.
Internally,asingleknobusuallyaffectsseveral
differentparameters.WhenyouwriteaProgram,the
editsaresavedintotheindividualprogram
parameters,andnottotheknobitself.
AfterwritingtheProgram,youllnoticethattheknobs
havereturnedtotheircenterpositionssincetheold
editedvaluesarenowthenewsavedvalues.
Assigning Realtime Controls USER functions

to knobs 14
Youcanassignthefunctionsthatknobs14will
performwhenRealtimeControlsUSERisselected.
(Seepage 41)
Using Tone Adjust

TheToneAdjustfunctionletsyouedittheparameters
oftheprogram.Theprogramparametersthataremost
effectiveforeditingwillbeassignedtothecontrollers
inthedisplay.
1. AccesstheProgP0:PlayToneAdjustpage.
Thispageshowsandreflectsdatageneratedbythe
toneadjustfunction,lettingyouviewtheparameter
assignmentsandtheirprecisevalues.
2. Toeditthesound,selectaslider(18)orbutton(1
8)inthedisplay,andusetheVALUEdialetc.to
useit.(Youcaneditthevalueofasliderby
draggingitinthedisplay.)
Note: Youcanassigntheprincipalprogram
parameterstothevariouscontrollersinthedisplay.For
details,pleaseseepage 7oftheParameterGuide.
For example:
1. SelectProgramA069,DeluxeE.Piano.
2. AccesstheP0:PlayToneAdjustpage.
3. Lookattheassignmentsforsliders5,6,and8in
thedisplay.
Slider5isassignedtoF/AEGAttackTime;slider6is
assignedtoF/AEGDecayTime;andslider8is
assignedtoF/AEGReleaseTime.
4. Raiseeachofthethreesliderssothattheyare
about4/5ofthewaytothetop.
Thedisplayshouldshowtheirvaluesasbetween+60
and+70.ThismeansthatyouhaveeditedthefilterEG
andampEGattack,delay,andreleasetolongervalues.
5. Playafewnotes.
Noticethatthesoundhaschangedfromanelectric
pianointoasoftpad.Next,letsaddjustabitoffilter
modulation,tomakethesoundmorerich.
6. Noticetheassignmentofslider2inthedisplay.
Slider2isassignedto[OSC1]FilterLFO1IntA
(OSC1filterLFO1intensity).Itwilladjusttheamount
offiltermodulationproducedbyLFO1.
7. Lowerslider2slightlysothatthedisplayindicates
about6.
8. Playafewmorenotes.
Thefiltermodulationhasaddedsomeshimmertothe
sound.Now,maybeitcoulduseabitmoreedge
9. Lookattheassignmentsforswitches6and7inthe
display.
TheseareprogrammedtoraisetheFilterCutoffand
FilterResonance,respectively.Switchesarejuston/off,
butyoucansetaspecificvaluefortheOnposition;
noticethe+10and+40intheswitchsvalueboxes.
10. Presseachofthetwoswitchbuttons.
Thesoundnowhasamoreinterestingcharacter,due
tothefilters.Sinceitsbrighter,wevealsorestored
someoftheelectricpianocharacter.
Prettyeasy,huh?Note:dependingontheparameter,
youmayoccasionallyhearglitchesinthesoundasyou
movethecontrol.
29
Changing parameter assignments

ThefactoryProgramsincludedefaultassignmentsof
ToneAdjustparameterstothesliders,andbuttonsin
thedisplay.Ifyoulike,youcanchangeanyofthe
assignments.Todoso:
Comparing the unedited

sound
1. AccesstheProgP0:PlayToneAdjustpage.
Using COMPARE
2. Pressthepopupbuttonlocatedtotheleftofthe
assignedparameter.
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound,
pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthelast
savedversionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted
editing.
Apopupwindowwillappear,withalongmenuof
parameters.Youcantellvariousthingsaboutthe
selections,justfromthewaytheyappearinthemenu:
Fordetails,pleaseseeComparefunctiononpage 11.
ParameterswhichaffectonlyOSC1orOSC2are
prefixedwith[OSC1]and[OSC2],respectively.
ParameterswhichaffectbothOscillators,butwhichare
specifictoPrograms,areprefixedwith[OSC1&2].
Saving your edits
Theothergroupofparametersatthebeginningofthe
list,areCommon.Thatis,youcanusethemwith
mostPrograms.
Afteryouveeditedaprogram,youmustsaveitifyou
wanttokeepthechangesyouvemade.Ifyoureselect
theprogramorturnoffthepowerafterediting,your
editswillbelost.
ParameterscanonlybeassignedtooneToneAdjust
controlatatime.Ifaparameterisalreadyassigned,its
grayedout.
3. Selectaparameterfromthemenu.
Theparameterisnowassignedtothecontrol.Toclose
thelistwithoutmakinganychanges,pressalocation
inthedisplayoutsidethepopupwindow,orpressthe
EXITbutton.
1. PresstheWRITEbutton.
TheWriteProgramdialogboxwillappear.Ifyouwant
tomodifythewritingdestinationorname,youcando
so(seepage 117).
2. PresstheWRITEbuttononceagaintosave(write)
theprogram.
Fordetails,pleaseseeWritingaProgramor
Combinationonpage 115.
YoucanalsosaveprogramsonanSDcardasPCGfiles.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSavingtoSDcard(Media
Save)onpage 118.
30
Detailed Editing with Programs Before you start editing
Detailed Editing with Programs

Youcancreateoriginalsoundsbyeditingapreloaded
programorbyeditinganinitializedprogram.The
programsyoucreatecanbesavedinbanksAF.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSavingyoureditsonpage 30.
OSC (oscillator) 1/2

TheOSC(oscillator)generatesthewaveformthatisthe
basisofthesound.OntheKROME,theoscillator
consistsofmultiplesampledsoundssuchasa
multisampleoradrumkit(drumsamples).
Before you start editing
TheKROMEprovidestwooscillators;OSC1and
OSC2.Youcancreatemorecomplexprogramsby
combiningthese.
The three elements of sound: pitch,

tone, and volume
TheOSC,whichisthebasisofthesound,canbe
controlledbymodulatingitspitch,filter,amp,EG,and
LFOtochangethesoundinawiderangeofways.
Soundismadeupofthreebasicelements:pitch,tone,
andvolume.
Note: PitchEGissharedbyOSC1andOSC2.
TheKROMEprovidespitch,filter,andamp
(amplifier)sectionsthatallowyoutocontrolthese
elements.
Effects
Aseffects,youcanusefiveinserteffects,twomaster
effects,andonetotaleffect.
Thepitchsectionmodifiesthepitch,thefilter
sectionmodifiesthetone,andtheampsection
modifiesthevolume.
YoulleditpitchsettingsinP2:OSC/Pitch(P23)and
OSC2Pitch,filtersettingsinP3:Filter(P313),and
ampsettingsinP4:Amp/EQ(P412).
TheoutputofOSC1/2issenttotheseeffectprocessors.
Bychoosingthedesiredeffectforeachprocessorand
editingitsparameters,youcanapplyawiderangeof
effectssuchasmodulation,distortion,and
reverberation.
EG, LFO, AMS, and controllers
Arpeggiator
Inadditiontothethreeelementslistedabove,asound
canvaryaccordingtothepassageoftime,thepitch
rangeinwhichitsplayed,orbyperformance
expressions.
Aprogramcanuseonearpeggiator.Youcanselectan
arpeggiopattern,specifytherangethatthepatternwill
bedevelopedwithin,andspecifytherangeofnotesor
velocitiesthatwilltriggerthearpeggiator.
Suchaspectscanbecontrolledbymodulatorsand
controllerssuchastheEG(envelopegenerator),LFO
(lowfrequencyoscillator),andjoystick.These
modulatorsandcontrollersapplychangetothebasic
program.
TakealookattheillustrationProgramstructure
NoticethatthesignalflowisintheorderofOscillator/
Pitch,Filter,Amp.YoucanseehowtheEGsandLFOs
affecteachsection.
Asshownintheillustration,eachprogramconsistsof
sectionssuchasOSC1/2,effects,andthearpeggiator.
Programstructure
Program Basic/Controllers: P1
Controllers: P13
Tone Adjust: P07
OSC1 LFO2: P52
OSC1 LFO1: P51
Master
Effect
1, 2: P9
Routing: P81
OSC1 Setup: P21,
OSC1 Velocity: P22
OSC1 Pitch: P23
DrumTrk Pattern: P74, 5
Arpeggio: P71, 2
Common LFO: P510
Amp1/Driver1: P41
Filter1(A/B): P31
3Band EQ
: P410
OSC1, 2
Total
Effect
: P9
Insert
Effect
15: P8
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Amp1 Mod: P42
Filter Key Track: P32
Insert Effects
Master Effects
Filter1 Mod: P33

Filter1 LFO Mod: P34
Filter1 EG: P310
Amp1 EG: P43

FX Control Bus
OSC1 AMS Mix: P61/2

Pitch EG : P210
Common KeyTrack: P69/10
OSC 1
OSC 2
OSC / Pitch
Filter
Amplifier
EQ
Effects
P11, P22, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME.
31
An overview of the edit pages
Basic oscillator settings
Inordertododetailedediting,youllneedtoaccessthe
editpagesinthedisplay.
Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofprogram,selectthe
basicwaveform(multisampleordrumkit),andspecify
whetheritwillplaypolyphonicallyormonophonically
(poly/mono).
TheprecedingsectionEasyProgrameditingon
page 27explainedhowtousetheProgP0:Playpageto
dosimpleediting.Formoredetailedediting,youlluse
theP1andfollowingeditpages.
EDIT
PLAY
Page
P0: Play
Main content
Select and play programs. (see
page 21)
Oscillator and Drum track level
settings. (see page 27)
Simple drum track editing. (see
page 98)
Simple arpeggiator editing. (see
page 86)
Tone Adjust settings. (see page 29)
P1: Basic/
Controllers
Basic program settings, such as

Oscillator mode. (see page 32)
SW1, 2, and knob settings. (see
page 41)
P2: OSC/Pitch
Oscillator selection and pitch settings.

(see page 33)
P3: Filter
Filter 1, 2 (tone) settings. (see page 38)
P4: Amp/EQ
Amp 1, 2 (volume) settings. (see

page 40)
Amp 1, 2 driver and pan settings.
3-band parametric EQ settings.
P5: LFO
LFO settings. (see page 35)
Program type setting (single, double,

drum kit)
Hereyoucanspecifytheprogramtype.
Broadlyspeakingtheprogramtypewillbeeithera
programthatusesamultisampleoraprogramthat
usesadrumkit(seeMultisamplesandDrumKits
onpage 33).
ThischoiceismadebytheProgP1:Basic/Controllers
ProgramBasicOscillatorModesetting,which
specifieswhichtypetheoscillatorswilluse.Uptotwo
canbeusedsimultaneouslyforeachtype.
Multisample:Single,Double
Drumkit:Drums,DoubleDrums
P7: Arpeggiator/
Drum Track
Arpeggiator settings. (see page 88)

Drum track settings. (see page 100)
P8: Routing/IFX
Oscillator output bus and master effect

send level settings. (see page 79)
Insert effect routing, selection, and
P9: MFX/TFX/LFO
Master effect routing, selection, and

Total effect selection and settings. (see
page 80)
EFFECT
ARP/ DT
P6: AMS/Common AMS Mixer settings. (see page 36)

KeyTrack
Common keyboard tracking settings.
Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,
pleaseseeBasicoperationsonpage 9.
Single(singleprogram)usesoneoscillator,and
Double(doubleprogram)usestwooscillators.
Drums(drumprogram)issimilartoasingleprogram,
butusesadrumkit(createdinGlobalmode)insteadof
amultisample.DoubleDrums(doubledrum
program)usestwodrumkits.Byusinganambience
typekitastheseconddrumkit,youcangiveawider
senseofspacetothesound.
Polyphony
Polyphonyisthenumberofnotesthatcanbeplayed
simultaneously,suchasinachord.Thepolyphony
dependsontheprogramtype.
Program type
Single
Polyphony
120
Double
60
Drums
120
Double Drums
60
Note:
DoubleProgramsandDoubleDrumsusetwiceas
manyvoicesasSinglePrograms.
StereoMultisamplesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
MonoMultisamples.
Ifusingvelocitycrossfadeswitching,the
multisamplewillusetwiceasmanyvoicesasusual.
32
Detailed Editing with Programs Basic oscillator settings
Oscillator image setting

Youcanspecifytheprogramoscillatorimagethats
shownintheP0:PlayMainpage.Adjustthissetting
inProgP1:Basic/ControllersProgramBasicOscillator
ModeOSCPicture1and2.
1. PresstheOSCPicture1or2popupbutton(>)
ortheimageiconshownatright;thedialogbox
willappear.
foreachstring,sothatthemultisamplewould
consistofsixsamples.
Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor
playingdrumsamples.
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers

Eachoscillatorprovideseightvelocityzones.Thislets
youswitchbetweenmultisamplesordrumsamples
accordingtothevelocity(speed)atwhichyouplaya
key.
Byspecifyingthethreshold(boundaryvalue)where
eachzonewillrespond,andtheamountofcrossfading
(theoverlapbetweenzones),youcanspecifyhowyour
keyboardplayingdynamicswillswitchorlayerthe
multisamplesordrumsamples.Youcanusethisto
makethefollowingtypesofsetups.
Velocitysplits,wheremultisamples(or
drumsamples)arecleanlyswitchedatthethreshold
2. Toselectanimage,pressanimageinthelistinthe
lowerpartofthescreen,orattheleftorrightinthe
upperpart.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice.
Polyphonic/monophonic playing
TheVoiceAssignModeselectswhethertheProgram
willplaypolyphonically(Poly)ormonophonically
(Mono).
WhenthisissettoPoly,youcanplaybothchordsand
melodylines.WhenthisissettoMono,onlyonenote
willsoundevenifyouplayachord.
Velocitycrossfades,wheremultisamples(or
drumsamples)aresmoothlycrossfadedovera
specifiedrangeoutsidethethreshold
Velocitylayers,wheretwomultisamples(or
drumsamples)arelayeredwhenyouplaya
specifiedrangeoutsidethethreshold
Note: IfOscillatorModeissettoDrumsorDouble
Drums,thevelocitysettingsprespecifiedforthedrum
kitwillbeused,andthereforewillnotbeshowninthe
screen.Thevelocityzonesettingsofadrumkitcanbe
editedinGlobalP5:DrumKit(seepage 105).Youcan
jumpautomaticallytoGlobalP5bypressingtheJump
toDrumKitEditbuttonshownonthescreen.
Selecting Multisamples
NormallyyoullsetthistoPoly,butMonoisuseful
whenplayingsoundssuchassynthbasses,synth
leads,andothersoloinstruments.
Letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfadebetweentwo
Multisamples,usingjustOSC1.
TryswitchingbetweenPolyandMono,andlistento
theresults.
2. SettheMultisampleOn/Offformultisample1and
multisample2toOn.
Working with Multisamples
SettheMultisampleOn/Offformultisample3and
multisample4toOff.
1. AccesstheProgP2:OSC/PitchOSC1Setuppage.
What is a multisample?
Asampleisadigitalrecordingofaparticular
instrumentorwaveform(orothernaturalorartificially
processedsound)recordedataspecificpitch.A
multisampleisacollectionofsimilarlyvoicedsamples,
usedtocreatethesametypeofsoundpiano,bass,
guitar,strings,organacrosstheentirekeyboard,as
thebasisofaprogram.Theoscillatorsofsingleand
doubleprogramsusemultisamples.Thereare583
multisamplesavailableinthisinstrument.
Bank
Slider
Multisample
On/Off
Youcanassignuptofourmultisamplestoeach
oscillatorandswitchbetweenthembyvelocity.
Bydraggingtheslidertotheleft,youcanselecteach
multisampleandviewitssettings.
Multisamples and Drum Kits
3. SelectStereoastheMultisampleBankfor
multisample1andmultisample2.
MultisamplesandDrumKitsallowyoutoplay
samplesindifferentways.
Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacross
thekeyboard.Ifweusetheexampleofasimple
guitarmultisample,onesamplecouldbeassigned
TherearetwomaintypesofMultisampleBanks:
Mono,andStereo.NotethatstereoMultisampleswill
requiretwiceasmanyvoicesasmonoMultisamples.
Multisamplesareorganizedbycategorysuchaspiano,
guitar,bell,etc.
33
4. PresstheMultisamplepopupbuttonfor
multisample1.
Assigning a drum kit

What is a drum kit?
Multisample popup button
ThisbringsupalistofMultisamples,organizedby
category.Usethetabsontheleftofthedisplayto
browsethroughthedifferentcategories.
5. SelectaMultisamplebytouchingitsnameinthe
list.YoucanalsouseFindtosearchfora
Multisample.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection.
7. Performthesamestepsformultisample2,
selectingadifferentMultisamplethanfor
multisample1.
NowthatyouveassignedMultisamplesto
multisample1andmultisample2,letssetupthe
velocityrangesandcrossfades.
DrumkitsarecreatedoreditedinGlobalmode.For
eachnoteofthekeyboard,youcanassignuptoeight
druminstrumentsamples,anduselayering,
crossfading,orvelocityswitchingtoswitchbetween
them.Then,inProgrammode,youcanadjustfilter
andampsettings,andspecifyeffectsandroutingtothe
audiooutputjacks.(Seepage 105)
TouseadrumkitinaProgram,setOscillatorModeto
DrumsorDoubleDrums,andchooseoneofthe48
userdrumkitsorthenineGM2drumkits.
Selecting a drum kit

1. AccesstheProgP1:Basic/ControllersProgram
Basicpage.
2. SetOscillatorModetoDrumsorDouble
Drums.
Multisampleshavenowbeenassignedtomultisample
1and2.
8. Specifythevelocityrangeandcrossfaderange.
PresstheVelocitytabtoaccesstheOSC1Velocitypage.
Setthemultisample2ThresholdVelocityto001,and
turnCrossfadeOff.
3. SelectadrumkitintheProgP2:OSC/PitchOSC1
Setuppage.
9. Setthemultisample1ThresholdVelocityto80.
YoucanalsosetThresholdVelocitybydraggingthe
bottomedgeofthelinegraph.
Withthesesettings,Multisample2willsoundfornotes
playedwithavelocityof79orless,andMultisample1
willsoundfornotesplayedwithavelocityof80or
greater.
TheVelocitySplitmetershowstheoscillatorseight
multisamplesandthevelocityzonesofeachoscillator.
Themeterontheleftshowsthenoteonvelocity.This
letsyouseewhichmultisampleandoscillatorwill
soundforthatspecificvelocity.
10. Setthemultisample1Crossfadeto20,andits
CurvetoLinear.
Thestateofthissplitisshownvisuallyinthescreen.
Thetwomultisampleswillfadeacrosstherangefrom
80to100,withmultisample2fadingoutwhile
multisample1fadesin.Thisproducesasmooth
changewithoutanysuddenswitch.
11. Asnecessary,usetheProgP2:OSC/PitchOSC1
SetuppagetoadjusttheLevelofthetwo
multisamples.
34
4. Specifythebasicpitchoftheoscillator.Foradrum
kit,setOctaveto+0[8].
Detailed Editing with Programs Creating time-varying changes (LFO and EG)
Creating time-varying
changes (LFO and EG)
Using LFOs
YoucanusethecyclicchangeproducedbytheLFO
(LowFrequencyOscillator)tomodulatenumerous
aspectsofthesound.
EachProgramhastwoLFOs:LFO1andLFO2.Thereis
alsoasingleCommonLFO,sharedbybothOscillators.
WhileLFO1andLFO2areseparateforeachvoice,the
CommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesintheProgram.
Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallofthevoicesto
haveanidenticalLFOeffect.
YoucanusetheseLFOstomodulatemanydifferent
Programparameters,including:
Pitch(forvibrato)
Filters(forwaheffects)
Volume(fortremolo)
Pan(forautopanning)
TheLFOscanmodulatemanyotherparameters,in
additiontothoselistedabove.
4. SelecttheShapeparameter,andusetheVALUE
dialtomovethroughitsdifferentsettings,from
99to+99.
Noticehowtheshapeofthewaveformbecomesmore
curved,andhow99emphasizesthelowerpartofthe
shape,and+99emphasizestheupperpart.
5. SelectthePhaseparameter,andusetheVALUE
dialtosweepthroughitsrangeofvalues.
Noticehowthewaveformshiftsfromsidetoside.
Amongotherthings,thisletsyouoffsettheLFOsfrom
oneanotherintime,whichcancreateinteresting
organiceffects.
6. UsetheFreq(Frequency)parametertosetthe
speedoftheLFO.
7. UsetheFadeandDelaysettingstocontroltheway
theLFOsoundsatthebeginningofthenote.
FormoreinformationonLFOs,pleaseseepage 42of
theParameterGuide.
AlloftheseparameterscontrolthewaythattheLFO
works.InorderfortheLFOtoactuallyaffectthe
sound,youcanusethededicatedLFOroutingsonthe
Filter,Pitch,andAmppages,orusetheLFOsasAMS
sourcesforawidevarietyofparameters.
Using EGs (Envelope Generators)

Using the basic LFO
1. AccesstheProgP5:LFOOSC1LFO1page.
Waveform
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving
fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and
thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof
time,andsoon.
TheProgramincludesthreeEGs,forPitch,Filter,and
Amp.Theseproducetimevaryingchangesinpitch,
tone,andvolumerespectively.Theycanalsobeusedto
modulateanumberofotherprogramparametersvia
AMS.
note-on
Attack Level
note-off
Break Level
Level
Sustain Level
2. SelecttheWaveformparameter.
UsetheINCandDECbuttonstoscrollthroughthe
differentwaveforms,andlookattheirshapesinthe
graphicdisplay.
Thereareanumberofwaveformstochoosefrom.Each
aresuitedtodifferentapplications:
TriangleandSinearetheclassicLFOshapesfor
vibrato,tremolo,panning,andfilterwaheffects.
Decay Time
Attack Time
Release
Level
Time
Release Time
Slope Time
Sutart Level
Note: TheparametersthatcanbemodulatedbyanEG
andtherangeofvalueswilldifferdependingonthe
EGsprovidedforeachsection.
Squareisusefulforgatedonandofffilterandamp
effects,andcancreatetrillswhenmodulatingpitch.
TheGuitarwaveformisdesignedespeciallyforguitar
vibrato;itbendsonlyupwardsfromthebasevalue.
SawandExponentialSawDownaregoodfor
rhythmicfilterandampeffects.
Random1(S/H)createstheclassicsampleandhold
effect,whichisgreatformodulatingaresonantfilter.
3. Afterlookingatthedifferentwaveforms,select
Triangle.
35
Diverse modulation settings

(AMS and AMS mixer)
Using AMS
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)letsyoumodulate
programparametersusingcontrollers,EG,orLFOas
themodulationsource.Extremelycreativetypesof
modulationarepossible;forexample,youcanusea
singlecontrollertosimultaneouslymodulatemultiple
parameters,oryoucanuseanEGtomodulatean
LFOsfrequencyandthenusethatLFOtomodulatea
filter.
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)referstoanyof
theassignablemodulationsourcesinKROME,
including:
ControllersoftheKROMEitself,suchasthe
joystick,SW1/2,andtherealtimeknobs
IncomingMIDIcontrollers
ModulatorssuchastheFilter,Pitch,andAmpEGs,
theLFOs,ortheAMSMixers
Intensityisaparameterthatsetsthedegree(speed,
depth,amountetc.)ofhowAMSwillcontrolthe
modulation.
Anumberoffrequentlyusedmodulationroutings,
suchasusingthejoysticktovarythepitch,are
providedasadditional,dedicatedroutings,separate
fromAMS.
NotethatnotallAMSsourcesmaybeavailablefor
somemodulationdestinations.
FordetailsonalternatemodulationandAMS,please
seebelow.
AlternateModulationSources(AMS)onpage 339
oftheParameterGuide
CreatingVibratoonpage 37
PitchEGonpage 37
FilterEGonpage 39
LFOmodulationonpage 39
AMS(Pan)onpage 36oftheParameterGuide
LFO1/2onpage 40
Using the AMS Mixers

TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething
new.
Forexample,thisletsyouuseanLFOtomodulatea
filtersresonancewhilealsomodulatingitbyanEG.
AlthoughresonancehasonlyoneAMSinput,using
theAMSmixermakesthispossible.Youcouldalsodo
thingssuchasusingthefilterEGtocontroltheamount
ofLFO1.Thewidevarietyofotherpossibilitiesinclude
usingthejoysticktocontroltheamountofpitchEG,
allowingthejoysticktoapplybendonlytonotes
playedwhileyouholddownthefootswitch,or
changingtheresponseofarealtimecontroller.
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS
sources,justliketheLFOsandEGs.AnAMSmixers
36
outputsignalcanbeusedtomodulateavarietyof
parameters.
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto
theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,
ifyouuseLFO1asaninputtoanAMSMixer,youcan
usetheprocessedversionoftheLFOtocontrolone
AMSdestination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrol
another.
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether,
byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.
Fordetails,pleasesee61:OSC1AMSMix1on
page 46oftheParameterGuide.
Tips for using AMS

Whenmakingsettingsforalternatemodulation,think
oftheeffectthatyouwishtoproduce,whattypeof
modulationwillbenecessarytoproducethateffect,
andwhatparameteroftheoscillator,filter,oramplifier
needstobecontrolled.
Next,selectasource(AMS)andsettheIntensity.If
youproceedlogicallyinthisway,youwillachievethe
desiredeffect.
Forexampleinaguitarsoundprogramwhereyou
wanttousethejoysticktocontrolthefeedback,you
wouldmakeassignmentssothatthejoystickcontrols
thefilterfrequencyandresonance.
Controller Setup page

Foreachprogram,thefunctionofRealtimeControl
knobs1B4BandtheSW1andSW2buttonscanbe
assignedintheProgP1:Basic/ControllersControllers
Setuppage.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSettingthefunctionsofSW1
andSW2onpage 41,andSettingthefunctionsof
RealtimeControlsUSERknobs14onpage 42.
Detailed Editing with Programs Controlling Pitch
Controlling Pitch
Pitch bend
Portamento
Portamentomakesthepitchchangesmoothlywhen
youplaythenextnotebeforereleasingtheprevious
note.
Pitchbendsmoothlychangesthepitchupwardor
downward,similartohowaguitaristcanbend
strings.OntheKROME,youwillnormallyusethe
joysticktocontrolpitchbendinrealtime.
TheTimeparametercontrolshowlongitwilltakethe
pitchtochange.Asthisvalueisincreased,thepitch
willchangeoveralongertime.Withavalueof000,
therewillbenoportamento.
TheJS(+X)andJS(X)settingsspecifytheamountof
pitchchange(insemitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDI
pitchbendmessagesarereceivedorwhenthejoystick
ismovedtoleftorright.Asettingof+12allowsthe
pitchtobecontrolledamaximumofoneoctave
upward;asettingof12allowsthepitchtobe
controlledamaximumofoneoctavedownward.
YoucanturnPortamentoonandoffviaSW1orSW2,
byassigningthemtoPorta.SWCC#65.
Note: Youcanalsocontrolpitchbendusinga
controllerotherthanthejoystick,orviaMIDI.
Ribbon(#16)specifiestheamountofpitchchange(in
semitoneunits)thatwilloccurwhenMIDIcontrol
changemessage#16isreceived.Withasettingof+12,a
valueof127willraisethepitchoneoctave,andavalue
of0willlowerthepitchoneoctave.
Creating Vibrato
YoucanuseanLFOtocreatevibrato.
LFO1Int.orLFO2Int.setsthedepthofhowthe
selectedLFOwillaffectthepitch.Withasettingof
+12.00,vibratowillproduceamaximumof1octaveof
pitchchange.
JS+YIntspecifiestheamountofvibratothattheLFO
willproducewhenthejoystickispushedawayfrom
you.
Intensity(AMSIntensity)specifiesthedepthof
vibratothatwillbeappliedbytheLFOwhen
modulatedbytheselectedAMS(AlternateModulation
Source).Forexample,ifthepanelswitchassignment
forSW1issettoSW1Mod.(CC#80)(Prog17a),and
yousetLFO1AMStoSW1:CC#80andspecifyan
appropriatevalueforIntensity,vibratowillbeapplied
whenyouturnSW1onorwhenMIDIcontrolchange
#80isreceived.
Pitch EG
WhentheIntensityvalueissetto+12.00,thepitchEG
specifiedinthePitchEGpagewillproducea
maximumof1octaveofpitchchange.
Torealisticallysimulatetheslightchangeinpitchthat
occurswhenastringispluckedorattheattackofa
brassorvocalsound,youcanusetheEGtocreatea
subtlechangeinpitchattheattack.
37
Using Filters
Thefiltersallowyoutodiminishoremphasize
specifiedfrequencyareasofthesound.
Thetoneofthesoundwilldependsignificantlyon
thefiltersettings.
Thebasicfiltersettings,includingtherouting,type,
cutofffrequency,andresonance,aresetontheP31:
Filterpage.
Filter Routing
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.The
FilterRoutingparametercontrolswhetheroneorboth
ofthefiltersareused,andifbothareused,itcontrols
howtheyareconnectedtoeachother.
TheSingleroutingusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,
12dB/octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject).
TheSerialroutingusesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
oscillatorfirstgoesthroughFilterA,andthenthe
outputofFilterAisprocessedthroughFilterB.
ParallelalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly(andallow
independentsettingsforeach),andtheoutputsofthe
twofiltersarethensummedtogether.
LowPass:Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundthatare
higherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthemost
commontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
timbressounddarker.
HighPass:Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundthatare
lowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
BandPass:Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both
highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically
dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators
multisample.
Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand
Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph
sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate
buzzyornasaltimbres.
The24dB(4Pole)routingmergesbothfilterstocreatea
single4pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPass
andBandReject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoption
producesasharperrolloffoffrequenciesbeyondthe
cutofffrequency,aswellasaslightlymoredelicate
resonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthistype
offilter.
BandReject:Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfilter
cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan
LFOtocreatephaserlikeeffects.
SerialandParallelRouting
FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency
Oscillator
Filter A (Low Pass)
Filter B (High Pass)
Filter A (Low Pass)
Low Pass
High Pass
Oscillator
Filter B (High Pass)
Filter Types
Thisselectsthepartsofthesoundthatwillbeaffected
bythefilter,asdescribedbelow.WiththeSerialand
Parallelroutings,youcanindependentlysetthetypes
forFilterAandFilterB.
Band Pass
Band Reject
Thefilterswillproduceverydifferentresults
dependingontheselectedfiltertype.
Cutoff Frequency
38
Detailed Editing with Programs Using Filters
Resonance
LFO modulation
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe
cutofffrequency,asshowninthediagrambelow.
YoucanmodulatethefilterviaLFO1,LFO2,andthe
CommonLFO.Amongotherapplications,LFO
modulationofthefiltercanproducetheclassicauto
waheffect.
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and
frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish
smoothly.
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre
ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormore
extreme.Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbe
heardasaseparate,whistlingpitch.
TheFilter1/2LFOMod.pageletsyousetupthe
followingparametersseparatelyforeachLFO:
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,please
seeKeyFollowonpage 29oftheParameterGuide.
Low resonance
High resonance
IntensitytoAandIntensitytoBspecifyhowmuch
theLFOchangesthetone.
JSYIntensitytoAandJSYIntensitytoBspecifythe
depthofthewaheffectproducedbytheLFOwhenthe
joystickismovedtowardyourself,orwhenCC#2is
received.
Modulating the filters

Youcanmodulatethefiltercutofffrequencyusingthe
FilterEG,theLFOs,keyboardtracking,andother
builtinandMIDIcontrollers.Thisisagreatwayto
addarichvarietyoftonalchangetothesound.
TheAMSsettingselectsanAMSmodulationsourceto
scaletheamountoftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.
ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with
separateintensitysettings.
ForexampleifAMSissettoSW1:CC#80,turningSW1
onwillapplyanautowaheffect(seepage 37).
Filter EG
Keyboard Track
TheFilterEGisamultistageenvelope,whichyoucan
usetomodulatethefilteraswellasotherProgram
parameters.TheEGitselfissetupontheEGtab;the
waythatitaffectsthefiltersiscontrolledbythe
parametersdescribedbelow,ontheFilter1/2
Modulationpage:
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay
higherpitches.Atitsmostbasicapplication,keyboard
trackingrecreatesthiseffectbyincreasingthecutoff
frequencyofalowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthe
keyboard.Usually,someamountofkeytrackingis
necessaryinordertomakethetimbreconsistentacross
theentirerange.
TheKROMEkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore
complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.
Forinstance,youcan:
Makethefiltercutofffrequencyincreasevery
quicklyoverthemiddleofthekeyboard,andthen
openmoreslowlyornotatallinthehigher
octaves.
Makethecutofffrequencyincreaseasyouplay
loweronthekeyboard.
TheIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBsettingscontrol
thebasicamountofEGmodulationforfilter
frequenciesAandB,respectively,beforeother
modulation.
TheVelocitytoAandVelocitytoBsettingsletyouuse
velocitytocontroltheamountofEGmodulation.
TheAMSsettingselectsanAMSmodulationsourceto
scaletheamountoftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersA
andB.ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with
separateintensityIntoAortoBsettings.
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike
effects.
How Key Track works: Keys and Ramps

Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.
Fordetails,pleaseseeHowitworks:Keysand
Rampsonpage 28oftheParameterGuide.
39
Pan - Use DKit Setting
Using the Amp section

TheAmpsectionincludescontrolsforvolume,pan,
andthedrivercircuit.
YoucancontrolthevolumeusingtheAmpEG,LFO1/
2,KeyTrack,andvelocity,alongwithotherAMS
sources.
UseDKitSettingapplieswhenOscillatorModeisset
toDrumsorDoubleDrums.
Ifthisischecked,theProgramcanuseadifferentpan
positionforeachdrumsound,asspecifiedbythe
DrumKit.Ifthisisunchecked,alldrumsoundswill
usetheProgramspanposition.
EachOscillatorhasitsownAmpsection:Amp1for
OSC1,andAmp2forOSC2.
ThefactorypresetsandGMdrumkitsuseindividual
panpositionsforthedifferentdrums,sonormallyits
besttoleavethischecked.
Background - what does Amp

mean?
Amp modulation
Differentsoundshavecharacteristicshapestotheir
volumelevels.
Forexample,thevolumeofapianonotebeginsata
highvolumetheinstantyouplaythenote,andthen
decreasesgradually.
Thevolumeofanorgannote,ontheotherhand,
remainsconstantaslongasyoucontinuepressingthe
key.
Thevolumeofanoteonaviolinorwindinstrument
canbevariedduringthenotebythemusician(i.e.,by
regulatingtheamountofpressureontheboworthe
forceofthebreath).
Volume
Piano
Volume
Volume decays
gradually
Organ
Volume remains constant
until note is released
ThebasicvolumelevelissetbytheAmpLevel
parameter.Youcanthenalterthisusingthe
modulationsourcesbelow:
Keyboard Track
Time
Time
Thisletsyouvarythevolumerelativetothenoteyou
play.
Fordetails,pleaseseeKeyboardTrackonpage 39.
Pan
Amp Modulation
VelocityIntensityisusedbymostprogramsto
decreasethevolumeofsoftlyplayednotesand
increasethevolumeofstronglyplayednotes,andthe
AmpModulationparameteradjuststhedepthofthis
control.
NormallyyouwillsetAmpModulationtopositive(+)
values.Asthissettingisincreased,therewillbe
greatervolumedifferencebetweensoftlyplayedand
stronglyplayednotes.
LFO1/2
Pan
ThemainPanparametercontrolsthestereoposition
afterthesignalhaspassedthroughtheoscillator,filter,
andamp.
NormallyyoullsetthistoC064,sothatthesoundis
centeredequallybetweentheleftandrightspeakers.
TocreateastereoeffectwhenOscillatorModeissetto
Double,settheAmp1/Driver1pagePantoL001,and
theAmp2/Driver2pagePanR127.Thiswillmake
OSC1gototheleftspeaker,andOSC2gototheright
speaker.
WithasettingofRandom,thepanwillchange
randomlyeachtimeyouplayanoteonKROME,
producinganinterestingeffect.
40
SpecifieshowtheLFOswillproducecyclicchangesin
volume(tremoloeffect).
ThevolumewillbeaffectedbytheLFO(s)whereyou
setanLFO1Intensity,LFO2Intensityvalue.
Intensity(AMSIntensity)adjuststhedepthofhowthe
tremoloeffectproducedbytheLFOwillbeaffected
whenyouassignanAMS(LFO1AMS,LFO2AMS).
Forexample,ifyousetAMStoJSY:CC#02,tremolo
willbeappliedwhenyoupushtheKROMEsjoystick
down(towardyourself),orwhenCC#02isreceived.
Detailed Editing with Programs Making controller assignments
Amp EG
TheAmpEGletsyoucontrolhowthevolumechanges
overthecourseofanote.
Making controller
assignments
Setting the functions of SW1 and SW2
SW1andSW2arethetwobuttonsabovethejoystick.
Theseon/offbuttonscanperformanumberofdifferent
functions,suchasmodulatingsoundsoreffects,or
lockingthemodulationvaluesofthejoystick.
Also,eachonemayworkeitherasatoggle,orasa
momentaryswitch.InTogglemode,eachpress
alternatesbetweenonandoff;inMomentarymode,
theswitchonlychangesforaslongasyouholdit
down.
Everyinstrumenthasitsowncharacteristicvolume
envelope.Thisispartofwhatgiveseachinstrumentits
identifiablecharacter.
Conversely,bychangingthevolumecontourfor
instance,applyingastringlikeAmpEGcurvetoan
organmultisampleyoucanproduceinterestingand
unusualsounds.
Piano
Organ
Strings
Drive
TheDrivecircuitaddssaturationandoverdrivetothe
sound,foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic
distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,Driveprocesses
eachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestaysthesame
regardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeingplayed.
EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown
settingsforwhatthebuttonswilldo,andwhethereach
buttonisonoroff(basedontheircurrentstateswhen
thedataissaved).
YoucansetupPanelSwitchAssignontheControllers
Setuppage.
Mode
Page
Programs
Prog P1: Basic/Controllers
Combinations
Combi P1: Controllers
Songs
Seq P1: Controllers
Note: Theon/offstatusoftheSW1andSW2buttons
willbepreservedwhenyouwritetheprogramor
combination.
Note: YoucanuseSW1/2asalternatemodulationor
effectdynamicmodulationsourcestocontrolprogram
parametersoreffectparameters.
Todoso,youwillnormallyassignSW1Mod.(CC#80)
andSW2Mod.(CC#81).
ForanexampleofassigningtheSW1buttonasan
effectdynamicmodulationsourceforaprogram,and
usingittocontrolaneffect,seepage 82.
Foracompletelistofthepossibleassignments,see
Note: Ifyouwanttokeepthesesettingsafterthepower
isturnedoff,youmustsavethem(seepage 116).
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work
togethertocreatetheoveralleffect.
Drivecontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe
timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and
highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion.
Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith
theDrive.
Note: evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the
Drivecircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa
completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol
instead.
LowBoostisaspeciallowfrequencyEQwhich
controlsthebodycharacterofthesound.Thespecific
EQfrequenciesaffectedwillchangewiththeDrive
setting.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.
41
Setting the functions of Realtime

Controls USER knobs 14
WhentheRealtimecontrolsissettoUSER,thefour
knobsontherightfunctionasRealtimeknobs14.
Thesecanperformanumberofdifferentfunctions,
suchasmodulatingsoundsoreffects,adjustingeffects
sendlevels,andsoon.
EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown
settingsforwhattheknobswilldo.
WhenusingtheslidersforAMSorDmod,its
importanttounderstandthatcreatinganassignmentis
atwostepprocess.First,youassigntheknobtosenda
MIDIcontroller,suchasKnobMod.1(CC#17).Second,
youassignthatMIDIcontrollertomodulateoneor
moreProgramoreffectsparameters.
Forthefirstpartoftheabove,usethemodes
ControllersSetuppage(SeeSettingthefunctionsof
SW1andSW2,above).
Thedefaultassignmentsforknobs14areKnobMod.1
(CC#17),KnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobMod.3(CC#20),
andKnobMod.4(CC#21),respectively.
Arpeggiator settings
Accordingtothenotedatareceivedfromthekeyboard
orfromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorwill
automaticallygenerateawiderangeofphrasesor
patternsincludingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboard
backingriffs,bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.Whenthe
realtimecontrolsARPisselected,youcanusethe
knobstovarythedurationanddynamicsofthe
arpeggiatednotes.
Drum Track settings

YoucanusetheKROMEsrichvarietyofdrum
patternstoaccompanyyouwithhighqualitydrum
programswhileyouperformusingaprogram.
PlayingalongwithDrumTrackpatternsisoftena
usefulwaytocomeupwithnewphrases.
FormoreabouttheDrumTrackfunction,pleasesee
page 97.
Heresanexampleofhowtosetupknob1tocontrola
ProgramsfilterandampEGattacktime:
1. PresstheMODEPROGbuttontoenterProgram
mode.
Effects
2. AccesstheP1:Basic/ControllersControllers
Setuppage.
Fordetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectsonpage 77.
PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessPageSelect,and
chooseP1Basic/Controllers.PresstheControllers
tab.
3. PresstheRealtimeControlsKnobAssignKnob
1Bpopupbutton,andchooseF/AAttack
(CC#73).
4. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNREALTIME
CONTROLbuttontoselectUSER.(TheLED
USERwilllightup.)
5. Useknob1tocontroltheEGattackforthefilter
andamp.
Fordetails,pleaseseepage 348oftheParameter
Guide.
Note: Ifyouwishtokeepthesesettingsafterthepower
isturnedoff,youmustsavetheProgram,
Combination,orSong(seepage 116).
42
Automatically importing a
Program into Sequence mode
YoucanusetheAutoSongSetupfeature,which
automaticallycopiesthesettingsoftheprogramor
combinationandputstheKROMEinrecordstandby
modewhenyousimplypresstheREC()button.
ThenyoucanpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
(
)buttontobeginrecording.
Fordetails,pleaseseeAutoSongSetupfunctionon
page 59.
Playing and editing Combinations

About the KROMEs combinations
Combinationsletyousplitandlayerupto16Programs
atonce.
ACombinationismadeupof16Timbres(Notethat
youdonthavetouseall16Timbres).EachTimbreis
assignedaProgram,alongwithparametersforkey
rangeandvelocityzones,mixersettings,MIDIchannel
andcontrollerfiltering,andsoon.
AswithPrograms,eachCombinationhasfiveinsert
effects,twomastereffects,andonetotaleffectfor
shapingandtransformingthesoundsoftheindividual
Timbres.
Thissectionofthemanualtakesaquicklookatplaying
Combinations,includingatourofthefrontpanel
controllersandbasiceditingtechniques.
Playing combinations
Selecting Combinations
Thereareseveraldifferentwaystoselect
Combinations.Eachoneisconvenientinadifferent
way:
UsingCombinationSelectandtheVALUE
controllers:
Selecting a program using

Combination Select and the VALUE
controllers
1. PresstheCOMBIbutton.(TheLEDwilllightup.)
(Refertotheillustrationbelowforthebuttons.)
Alternatively,youcanusethemodebutton(see
Selectingmodesonpage 9).
UsingtheBank/CombinationSelectmenu:
UsingtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenu:
TheKROMEwillenterCombinationmode.
Find
2. AccesstheCombiP0:PlayProgramT0108page.
Usingafootswitch:page 19
Thisisshowninthetoplineofthedisplay.
SendingMIDIprogramchangemessagestoselect
Programsremotely:
Mode button
Mode, page number

and name
Tab name
Fordetails,pleaseseebelow.
Bank
number
Combination Select
(Combination number and name)
Combination Select popup button
Category Select popup button

(Category number and name)
Ifadifferentpageisshown,presstheEXITbutton
severaltimestomovetotheCombiP0:PlayProgram
T0108page.
3. MakesurethatCombinationSelectisselected.
Ifitisnot,pressCombinationSelectinthedisplayto
highlightit.
4. Selectthecombinationyouwanttoplay.
Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselectacombination.
2: COMBI P0: Play
1: Mode name
(button)
3: Combination Select
4: Numeric keypads
ENTER button
4: INC/DEC buttons
1: COMBI button
5: BANK SELECT
AF buttons
4: VALUE dial
43
UsetheINCorDECbuttons.
TurntheVALUEdial.
Usenumerickeys09toenterthecombination
number,andpresstheENTERbutton.
5. PressaCOMBIBANKADbuttontoswitch
banks.
WhenyouselectadifferentBank,thebuttonsLEDwill
lightup,andtheselectedbankwillappearontheleft
sideofthedisplay.
Forexample,toselectbankB,presstheCOMBIBANK
Bbutton.TheBbuttonwilllightup,andthename
BankBwillappearintheleftsideofthedisplay.
Auditioning the sound

PlaytheKROMEskeyboardtohearthecombination
youveselected.
Keyzonepreviewallowsyoutocheckthetimbres
layerandsplitsettings,aswellashowthearpeggiator
isused.
Thekeyboardareaindicatesthelast(single)note
onthatwasreceivedontheglobalMIDIchannel.
Thekeyzoneareashowsthetimbresthatwill
soundatthekeyposition,differentiatedbyseveral
colorsaccordingtothesettingsofeachtimbre.
Velocity meter
Overview: Combination Banks

Withthefactorysettings,theKROMEcontains384
preloadedcombinationsthatareGM2compatible.In
additiontothese,thereare128combinationstostore
soundsthatyoucreate,orstoreoptionalsound
libraries.
Combinationsareorganizedintofourbanksasshown
inthefollowingtable.
Combinationbankcontents
Bank
Combi. No.
Explanation
A, B, C
000...127
Factory Combinations
000...127
Initialized Combinations
Selecting by Bank/Combination
Select menu
YoucanselectCombinationsfromalistorganizedby
Combinationbank.
PresstheCombinationSelectpopupbuttonto
accessthemenuandmakeyourselection.
Green:TimbresthataresoundedontheglobalMIDI
channel,suchasbythekeyboard.
Yellow:Timbresthatwillsoundonlywhenthe
arpeggiatorison(seepage 90).
Orange:Timbresthatwillsoundonlywhenthedrum
trackison.
Blue:Timbreswhosetimbrechannelissetto
somethingotherthantheglobalchannel.Thesewill
notbesoundedbytheKROMEskeyboard,
arpeggiator,ordrumtrack,butwillsoundinresponse
toMIDInoteonmessagesfromanexternaldevice.
Purple:Thesetimbresareusedtoplayanexternal
soundmodule.TheydonotsoundontheKROME.
None:Timbreswhosetimbrestatusisoff.Thesewill
notsound.
Thevelocitymetershowsthenoteonvelocityvalue.
Noteonvelocitiesfromthekeyboard,MIDIIN,
arpeggiator,anddrumtrackareshownforeach
timbre/channel.(Ifmultiplenoteoneventsoccur
simultaneously,thehighestvelocityvaluewillbe
shown.)
Sincethisshowsthenoteonvelocityvalues,itis
notaffectedbythesettingoftheVolumeslidernor
bychangesintheaudiosignallevel.Also,themeter
willrespondevenifkeyzonesettingsorvelocity
zonesettingsaresuchthatthenoteisnotsounded.
TimbreswhosePlay/MuteandSolosettingsallows
themtoplayareshowninadarkcolor,andtimbres
thataremutedareshowninalightcolor.
44
TheselectionmethodisthesameasinSelectingby
Bank/ProgramSelectmenuonpage 22;Refertothat
pagefordetails.
Bank/CombinationSelectmenu
Playing combinations Using controllers to modify the sound
Selecting by Category/Combination
Select menu
YoucanselectCombinationsarrangedbycategory,
suchaskeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.
Whenshippedfromthefactory,thepreloaded
Combinationsareorganizedinto16categories,each
withseveralsubcategories.
PresstheCategorySelectpopupbuttontoaccess
themenuandmakeyourselection.
TheselectionmethodisthesameasinSelectingby
Category/ProgramSelectmenuonpage 23;referto
thatpagefordetails.
Category/CombinationSelectmenu
Using controllers to modify

the sound
TheKROMEprovidesavarietyofcontrollersthatyou
canusetovarythesound,suchasthejoystick,the
SW1,SW2buttons,andthecontrolsurfaceknobs.It
alsoprovideschordtriggerbuttons.
Fordetails,pleaseseethecorrespondingexplanation
forPrograms:UsingControllersonpage 24.
Performing with the

arpeggiator or drum track
Basedonnotedataitreceivesfromthekeyboardor
fromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorcan
generateawiderangeofphrasesandpatterns
includingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboardbackingriffs,
bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.Whentherealtime
controlsARPisselected,youcanusetheknobstovary
thedurationanddynamicsofthearpeggiatednotes.
Find
Youcansearchforacombinationbyaportionofits
name.
TheDrumTrackfunctionusesarichvarietyofdrum
patternstoplaytheKROMEshighqualitydrum
programs.Youcanperformalongwiththedrum
patterns,orsynchronizeDrumTrackpatternswiththe
phrasesgeneratedbyarpeggiator.
page 97.
TheprocedureisthesameasexplainedinFindon
page 23.Pleaseseethatexplanationfordetails.
45
Easy Combination editing

YoucaneditanyoftheCombinationsshippedwith
KROME.Youcancreateyourowncombinationsby
editingapreloadedcombination,orbystartingfrom
aninitializedcombination.
Acombinationhassixteentimbres;youcanassigna
programtoeachtimbreandspecifyitsvolumeand
pan,thekeyrangeinwhichtheprogramwillsound,
andhowitssoundwillberoutedtotheeffects.Youcan
createsimplesetupssuchasdetunedsounds,split,or
layers,orhighlycomplexorchestralikesetups.
Adjusting the mix

Adjusting the volume of each timbre
1. AccesstheCombiP0:PlayMixerT0108page.
Thispageshowsthevolume,pan,andProgram
assignmentsforall8Timbres.
Evenwithoutmovingtothevariouspagesfordetailed
editing,youcanmakedramaticchangesjustfrom
withintheCombiP0:Playpage.Youcanalsoedit
usingthecontrolsurfacesknobsonthefrontpanel.
Changing the program of each

timbre
ChangingtheProgramsassignedtotimbres(116)isa
quickwaytodramaticallyalterthesoundofthe
Combination.
1. AccesstheCombiP0:PlayProgramT0108/T09
16page.
Inthispageyoucanviewtheprogramassignedtoeach
timbre116,andtheplay/muteandsolostatusofeach.
Selected
Timbre Info
Timbre No.
Category/Timbre
Program Select
Bank/Timbre
Program Select
Program Select
Play/Mute
Solo On/Off
2. Useanyofthefollowingmethodstoselecta
Programforeachtimbre.
ChooseProgramSelect,usenumerickeys09to
inputtheprogramnumber,andpresstheENTER
button.
ChooseProgramSelectandturntheVALUEdialor
usetheINC/DECbuttons.
IftheProgramSelectparameterisselected,the
PROGBANKAFbuttonswillswitchprogram
banks.(IfTimbreProgramSelectisselected,the
BANKbuttonLEDoftheprogrambankselectedfor
thattimbrewilllightup.)
FromtheBank/ProgramSelectmenuyoucanview
andselectprogramsbybank.
FromtheCategory/ProgramSelectmenuyoucan
viewandselectprogramsbycategory.
YoucantransmitMIDIprogramchangesfroma
connectedexternalMIDIdevice.(Seepage 359of
theParameterGuide)
Note: ToselectthetimbreprogramviaMIDIprogram
changethetimbresstatusmustbesettoINT.
46
2. Inthedisplay,pressthetimbre1volumeslider
andslideitupordowntoadjustthevolume.
Youcanalsohighlightthenumericalareaoftheslider
andusetheVALUEdialorthenumerickeystoadjust
thevalue.
IfyoucheckHoldBalance,movinganyoneofthe
volumesliders(volumevalues)willcausethevolume
oftheothertimbrestochangeaswell,maintainingthe
relativevolumebalancebetweentimbres116.Thisisa
convenientwaytoadjusttheoverallvolume.
Adjusting the panning of each timbre

1. AccesstheCombiP0:PlayMixerT0108page.
2. Pressthetimbre1panknob,andslideitleft/right
toadjustthepanning.
Youcanalsohighlightthenumericalareaoftheknob
andusetheVALUEdialorthenumerickeystoadjust
thevalue.
Timbrepaninteractswiththepanstoredinthe
Program.AsettingofC064reproducesthePrograms
oscillatorpansettings.AdjustingtheTimbrePanwill
movethesoundtoleftorrightwhilepreservingthe
panrelationshipbetweentheoscillators.Asettingof
L001isfarleft,andR127isfarright.
Detailed Editing with Combinations Simple editing using the knobs
Simple editing using the

knobs
Saving a Combination youve

edited
YoucanusetheControlSurfacetoperformavarietyof
edits.
Afteryouveeditedacombination,youmustsaveitif
youwanttokeepthechangesyouvemade.Ifyoure
selectthecombinationorturnoffthepowerbefore
saving,youreditswillbelost.
Forexample,youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjust
theFiltercutofforresonance.Youcanalsouseitto
varythedepthofaneffect,ortochangethewayin
whichthearpeggiatorgeneratesaphrase.
Fordetails,pleaseseeRealtimecontrolknobson
page 25.
TheWriteCombinationdialogboxwillappear.Ifyou
wanttochangethewritingdestinationorthename,
maketheappropriatechanges(seepage 117).
thedata.
Fordetails,pleaseseeWritingaProgramor
Combinationonpage 115.
YoucanalsosavecombinationsonanSDcardasPCG
files.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSavingtoSDcard(Media
Save)onpage 118.
Detailed Editing with Combinations

Youcaneditthepreloadedcombinations(BanksAC)
thattheKROMEisshippedwith,orstartwithan
initializedCombinationtocreateyourownoriginal
sounds.
YoucanusethefactoryProgramstocreatenew
Combinations,oruseyourowncustomPrograms.
Note: IfyoureintheprocessofeditingaProgramin
Programmode,andyouusethatProgramina
Combination,youllheartheeditedversionin
Combinationmodeaswell.
About the edit pages

IntheCombiP0:Playpageyoucanselectandplay
combinations.Hereyoucanalsousethecontrol
surfacesknobsandthetoneadjustfunctionforquick
editing,ortoeditthesettingsofthearpeggiatoror
drumtrack.Intheotherpagesyoucaneditthesound
ingreaterdetail.
Fordetailsoneachmodeandhowtoaccesseachpage,
pleaseseeBasicoperationsonpage 9.
Combinationstructureandcorrespondingpages
Timbre1
Parameters
Routing: P8-1, 2
Controllers: P11
DrumTrack: P77
Tone Adjust: P07
Arpeggio: P71, 2, 3, 4, 5
Program
Timbre2
Program
Timbre3
Program
Timbre4
Program
Timbre16
Program
3Band EQ
Parameters
3Band EQ
Parameters
Master
Effects
1, 2: P9
Timbre
3Band EQ
Insert Effects
Master Effects
Insert
Effects
15: P8
Total
Effects:
P9
AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Parameters
3Band EQ
FX Control Bus
Parameters
3Band EQ
P11, P22, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KROME.
47
A suggested approach for

editing
Layers, Splits, and Velocity

Switches
First,selectaProgramforeachTimbre,ontheP0:
PlayProgramT0108orT0916page.(Notethatyou
donthavetouseall16Timbres)
WithinaCombination,youcanusenoterangeand
velocityleveltodefinethezoneinwhichaspecific
timbrewillplay.
Next,createanydesiredkeyboardorvelocitysplits,
layers,orcrossfadesbetweenthedifferentTimbres.
YoucandothisontheP4:Zone/DelayKeyboard
Zonespage.
TheProgramsassignedtoeachTimbrecanbeplayed
inthreeways:aspartofalayer,asplit,oravelocity
switch.ACombinationcanbesettouseanyoneof
thesemethodsortousetwoormoreofthesemethods
simultaneously.
Afterthis,adjustthevolumesoftheTimbres(backon
theProgramSelect/Mixertab),andsetupanyother
Timbreparametersasdesired.
Toaddfinishingtouchestothesound,setuptheInsert,
Master,andTotalEffectasdesired(ontheP8:Routing/
IFXandP9:MFX/TFX/LFOpages,respectively.)These
effectscanbedifferentfromthoseassociatedwiththe
individualProgramsinProgrammode,ifdesired.
Inaddition,youcanmakearpeggiatoranddrumtrack
settings(ontheP7:ART/DTpage)andcontroller
settings(ontheP1:Controllerspage)tocreatethe
finishedCombination.
Soloing timbres
YoucanusetheControlSurfacesSolofunctiontohear
thesoundofeachtimbrebyitself.
Layer
LayerscausetwoormoreProgramstoplay
simultaneouslywhenanoteisplayed.
Program A
Program B
Layer:
Two or more programs sound
simultaneously.
Split
SplitscausedifferentProgramstorespondondifferent
areasofthekeyboard.
Program A
Program B
Split:
Different programs will sound in
different areas of the keyboard.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSoloOn/Offonpage 72ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Velocity Switch
Restoring edited settings
VelocitySwitchescausedifferentProgramstorespond
dependingonthevelocity(howhardyouplaythe
notes).
Using COMPARE
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound,
pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved
versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted
editing.
Fordetails,pleaseseeComparefunctiononpage 11.
Program B
Program A
Strong
Soft
Keyboard playing
dynamics
Velocity Switch:
Keyboard playing dynamics
(velocity) switches between
different programs.
OntheKROME,youcanuseadifferentProgramfor
eachofuptosixteenTimbres,andcombinetwoor
moreoftheabovemethodstocreateevenmore
complexsetups.
Program B
Program A
Program D
Program C
Strong
Soft
Keyboard playing
dynamics
Example:
B and C/D are split. In the lower
keyboard range, A and B are
layered. In the higher keyboard
range, C and D are switched by
velocity and layered with A.
Asanadditionalpossibility,youcansettheslopefora
keyzoneorvelocityzonesothatthevolume
diminishesgradually.Thisletsyouchangeasplitintoa
keyboardcrossfade,oravelocityswitchintoavelocity
crossfade.
Program A
48
Program B
Keyboard X-Fade (keyboard

crossfade):
As you play from low notes to
high notes, the volume of A
will fade out, and the volume
of B will fade in.
Detailed Editing with Combinations Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches
Creating Key Splits and Layers
Creating Velocity Switches
Splits and Layers
Next,letscreateasimplevelocityswitched
Combination,likethediagrambelow:
LetscreateaCombinationthatcombinesbothsplits
andlayers,likethediagrambelow:
Timbre 1
Piano
Timbre 2
Brass
Timbre 3
Strings
Timbre 1
Brass
Timbre 2
Strings
127
64
63
1
Velocity
switch
C1
B3
C4
G9
2. SelectabrasssoundforTimbre1,andastrings
soundforTimbre2.
2. SelectapianosoundforTimbre1,abrasssound
forTimbre2,andastringssoundforTimbre3.
3. AccesstheP3:TimbreParametersMIDIT0108
page.
3. AccesstheP3:TimbreParametersMIDIT0108
page.
4. ForTimbres1and2,setStatustoINTandMIDI
ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel).
4. ForTimbres13,setStatustoINTandMIDI
ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel).
5. AccesstheP4:Zone/DelayVelZT0108page.
6. SetTimbre1sTopVelocityto127,anditsBottom
Velocityto64.
Youcanalsoenteravelocityvaluebyselectingthe
parameterandthenplayinganotewiththedesired
velocityonthekeyboardwhileholdingdownthe
ENTERbutton.
5. AccesstheP4:Zone/DelayKeyZT0108page.
6. SetTimbre1sTopKeytoG9,anditsBottomKey
toC4.
7. SetTimbre2toaTopVelocityof63,andaBottom
Velocityof1.
Velocity Zone Slope

SimilartoKeyZoneSlopes,asdescribedabove,these
letyoufadeinandfadeoutsoundsgraduallyovera
velocityrange,insteadofasimplehardswitch.
Youcanalsoenteranotevaluebyselectingthe
parameterandthenplayingthedesirednoteonthe
keyboardwhileholdingdowntheENTERbutton.
Inthecaseoftheexampleabove,youcouldsetthe
velocityzonesofthetwoTimbressothattheypartially
overlap.Then,settheTopSlopeandBottomSlopeso
thatthesoundchangesgradually,insteadofchanging
suddenlybetweenvelocityvaluesof63and64.
7. SetTimbres2and3toaTopKeyofB3,anda
BottomKeyofC1.
Key Zone Slope

Inadditiontohardsplits,wherethesoundchanges
abruptly,youcanusetheSlopeparametersto
graduallyfadeasoundinoroutoverarangeofkeys.
Intheexampleabove,youcouldsettheBottomKeyof
timbre1toG3,andsettheTopKeyoftimbre2toG4,
sothatthesetwotimbresoverlap.
Next,ifyousettheBottomSlopeoftimbre1to12,and
settheTopSlopeoftimbre2to12,thesoundwill
changegraduallyinsteadofchangingsuddenly.
49
MIDI settings
MIDI filter settings
Timbre Parameters MIDI page
ForeachMIDIFilteritem,youcanspecifywhetheror
notthecorrespondingMIDImessagewillbe
transmittedandreceived.Thecheckeditemswillbe
transmittedandreceived.
Status
ThiscontrolsthestatusofMIDIandtheinternaltone
generatorforeachTimbre.Normally,ifyoureplaying
aninternalProgram,thisshouldbesettoINT.
TheMIDIfiltersdontturnthefunctionsthemselveson
oroff.Instead,thefilterjustcontrolswhetherornot
thatMIDImessagewillbetransmittedandreceived.
IfthestatusissettoOff,EXT,orEX2,thatTimbres
internalsoundswillnotbeplayed.Offsimplydisables
theTimbreentirely.TheEXTandEX2settingsallow
theTimbretocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice.
Forexample,ifportamentoison,portamentowillbe
appliedtotheinternalKROMEsoundevenifEnable
PortamentoSWisunchecked.
Fordetails,pleaseseeStatusonpage 81ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Bank Select (when status=EX2)

WhentheStatusissettoEX2,theseparametersallow
youtotransmitMIDIBankSelectmessagestoexternal
MIDIdevices.
MIDI Channel
TimbresthatyouwishtoplayfromtheKROMEs
keyboardmustbesettotheglobalMIDIchannel.Your
playingonthekeyboardistransmittedontheglobal
MIDIchannel,andwilltriggeranytimbrethatmatches
thischannel.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.When
thisissettoGch,theMIDIchannelofthetimbrewill
alwaysmatchtheglobalMIDIchannel,evenifyou
changetheglobalMIDIchannel.
OnsomepreloadedCombinations,Timbresused
bythearpeggiatormayhavetheirMIDIChannels
settosomethingotherthanGch.Thesewillbe
timbresthatplayonlywhenthearpeggiatorison,
whichisaveryusefultechniqueforcreating
ApreggiatorbasedCombinations.
Fordetails,pleaseseeArpeggiatorsettingsin
CombinationandSequencermodesonpage 89.
Inparticular,notetherelationshipsbetween
arpeggiatorA/BassignmentsandMIDIChannel.
50
Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveselecteda
bassProgramforTimbre1,andapianoProgramfor
Timbre2,withthegoalofcreatingabass/pianosplit.
Youcouldchoosethefollowingsettingssothat
pressingthedamperpedalaffectsonlyTimbre2s
pianosound:
1. AccesstheP51:MIDIFilter<1>T0108page.
2. UnchecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre1.
3. ChecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre2.
Detailed Editing with Combinations Altering Programs to fit within a Combination
Altering Programs to fit

within a Combination
Timbre Parameters: Pitch
YoucanmakevariouschangestoProgramswithinthe
contextofaparticularCombinationtomakethemfit
betterwithotherPrograms,ortocreateparticular
soniceffects.Thesechangesdonotaffecttheoriginal
Programs,orhowthoseProgramssoundinother
Combinations(seepage 81oftheParameterGuide).
Timbre Parameters: OSC

Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)
Theseparametersadjustthepitchofthetimbre.
Inalayertypecombination,youcansettwoor
moretimbrestothesameprogram,andcreatea
richersoundbyusingTransposetoshifttheirpitch
apartbyanoctaveorbyusingDetunetocreatea
slightdifferenceinpitchbetweenthetwo.
Insplittypecombinations,youcanuseTranspose
toshiftthepitch(insemitoneunits)ofthe
programsspecifiedforeachkeyzone.
Force OSC Mode

Ifyouwishtoforceapolyphonicprogramtosound
monophonically,setthiseithertoMN(Mono)orLGT
(Legato).Conversely,setthistoPolyifyouwishto
forceamonophonicprogramtoplaypolyphonically.
NormallythisshouldbesettoPRG,sothatthesound
willplayassetbytheoriginalProgram.
Fordetails,pleaseseeForceOSCModeonpage 82of
theParameterGuide.
Note: Ifyouwishtochangetheplaybackpitchofa
drumprogram,useDetune.Ifyouchangethe
Transposesetting,therelationshipbetweenthenotes
anddrumsoundswillchange.
Use Programs Scale, Scale

Thisspecifiesthescaleforeachtimbre.
IfyoucheckUseProgramsScale,thescalespecified
bytheprogramwillbeused.Timbreswherethis
parameterisnotcheckedwillusetheScalesetting.
OSC Select
IfthetimbreisusingaProgramwheretheOscillator
ModeisDoubleorDoubleDrums,andyouwantonly
OSC1orOSC2(notboth)tosound,setthistoOSC1
(onlyOSC1willsound)orOSC2(onlyOSC2will
sound).
Normally,thisshouldbesettoBTH(Both).
Portamento
IftheProgramusesportamento,butyoudliketo
disablethisforthecurrentCombination,setthis
parametertoOff.
Conversely,ifyouwanttoforcetheportamentotobe
on,orjusttochangetheportamentotime,setthistoa
valueof001127.Theportamentowillchangetouse
thenewlyspecifiedtime.
Normally,thisshouldbesettoPRG.
51
Delay
YoucansetsomeTimbressothattheydontsound
immediatelyatnoteon.Thiscancreatecooleffects,
andmoredramaticlayers.
YoucanspecifythedelayforeachTimbreeitherin
milliseconds(ms),orinrhythmicvalueswhichsyncto
thesystemtempo.
IfyousettheDelaytoKeyOff,theTimbrewillsound
whenthenoteisreleased.
Accordingtothenotedatareceivedfromthekeyboard
orfromtheMIDIINconnector,thearpeggiatorwill
automaticallygenerateawiderangeofphrasesor
patternsincludingarpeggios,guitarorkeyboard
backingriffs,bassphrases,ordrumpatterns.Ifthe
SELECTbuttonissettoARP,youcanusetheknobsto
varythedurationanddynamicsofthearpeggiated
notes.
Drum Track settings

Whileyouperformusingacombination,youcanuse
theKROMEsrichvarietyofdrumpatternstoplay
highqualitydrumprograms.
PlayingalongwithDrumTrackpatternsisoftena
usefulwaytocomeupwithnewphrases.
page 97.
Editing Programs with Tone Adjust

UsingToneAdjust,youcancreatedetailededitsto
ProgramswithinthecontextoftheCombination.
TheseeditswillnotaffecttheoriginalProgram,orany
otherCombinationswhichusetheProgram.Toedita
ProgramwithToneAdjust:
Effects
SelectatimbreintheTimbrefieldoftheP0:PlayTone
Adjustpage.Thenselecttheparameterthatyouwant
toadjust,andusetheVALUEcontrollerstoeditthe
sound.
Automatically importing a
Combination
into Sequencer mode
Fordetails,pleaseseeUsingEffectsonpage 77.
TheAutoSongSetupfeatureautomaticallyappliesthe
settingsofthecurrentCombinationtoasong.
Fordetails,pleaseseeAutoSongSetupfunctionon
page 59.
52
Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Overview
About the KROMEs Sequencer
Sequencer mode structure
ThesequencerbringstogethertheKROMEsnumerous
functionssuchasitsarpeggiator,RPPR,high
performanceeffects,andcontrollers,allowingyouto
takeadvantageoftheseinawiderangeofsituations.
Sequencermodeisstructuredasfollows.
Thissequencerisa16trackMIDIsequencerthatcan
storeupto128songsand210,000MIDIevents.Youcan
useittorecordandplaybacknotesfortheinternal
soundgeneratoraswellasforexternalMIDIsound
modules.
Asongconsistsoftracks116,amastertrack,song
parameterssuchasthesongname,arpeggiator,Drum
Trackfunction,effectandRPPRparameters,and100
userpatterns.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,thesettingscreated
inSequencermode,thesongdata,anyuser
patterndata,andCueListthatyourecordedwill
notbebackedup.Ifyouwishtokeepthisdata,
youmustsaveitonanSDcardbeforeturningoff
thepower,orperformaMIDIdatadumptosave
thedataonanexternaldatafileretc.
Ifyouwishtowritetheprograms,track
parameters,effects,andarpeggiatorsettingsetc.
selectedforasongasatemplatesong,usethe
menucommandSaveTemplateSong.
Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,KROME
willnotcontainanysongdata,soifyouwishto
playasongonthesequencer,youmustfirstload
datafromSDcard,orreceiveaMIDIdatadump
fromaMIDIfiler.Fordetails,pleaseseepage 118,
andpage 219oftheParameterGuide.
Songs
Amaximumof128suchsongscanbecreatedon
KROME.
Tracks116consistofsetupparameters(suchaseach
tracksprogram,pan,andvolume)locatedatthestart
ofthesong,andthemusicaldataitself.Themaster
trackconsistsoftempoandtimesignaturedata(see
Setupparameters&Musicaldataonpage 106ofthe
ParameterGuide).
Song recording and editing

Songrecordingisperformedontracks.
Youcanrecordtracksineitheroftwoways;realtime
recordingorsteprecording.Forrealtimerecording
youcanchooseoneofsixrecordingmodes.
YoucanedittracksbyusingEventEditoperationsto
modifytherecordeddataorinsertnewdata,andby
usingTrackEditfunctionssuchasCreateControlData,
whichgeneratesandinsertspitchbend,aftertouch,or
controlchangedata.
Patterns
Therearetwotypesofpatterns:presetpatternsand
userpatterns.
Presetpatterns:Patternssuitablefordrumtracksare
presetininternalmemory,andcanbeselectedforany
song.
Userpatterns:Eachsongcanhaveupto100patterns.
Whenusingapatterninadifferentsong,usethe
UtilitymenucommandsCopyPatternorCopyFrom
Songetc.tocopythepattern.Thepatternlengthcanbe
specifiedinunitsofameasure.
Eachpatternconsistsofmusicaldataforonetrack.Itis
notpossibletocreatepatternsthatcontainmultiple
tracks.
Youcanusethesepatternsbyplacingtheminatrack
(PuttoTrackmenucommand)orbycopyingthem
(CopytoTrackmenucommand).Youcanalsouse
patternswiththeRPPRfunctionofasong(see
page 71).
53
Recording and editing a pattern
PAUSE ( ) button
Youcanrecordapatternineitheroftwoways:realtime
recordingorsteprecording.However,unlikerealtime
recordingtoatrack,youcanselectonlyonerecording
type(looprecording)whenrealtimerecordingtoa
pattern.
Thisbuttonpausestheplaybackofthesong.When
paused,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup.PressPAUSE
( )onceagaintoresumeplayback,andtheLEDwill
turnoff.
Youcaneditthepatterntocorrectmistakesinthe
recordeddata,oruseeventeditingtoinsertnewdata.
YoucanusetheGetFromTrackmenucommandto
obtainadesiredregionofperformancedatafroma
trackanduseitaspatterndata.Conversely,youcan
usethePuttoTrackorCopytoTrackmenu
commandstoplaceorcopyapatternsperformance
dataintoatrack.
REW (
WhentheSongisplayingorpaused,thisbuttonwill
rewindthesong.Whenyoupressandholdthisbutton,
itsLEDwilllightup,andtheplaybackwillrewind.
(Rewindisdisabledduringrecording,andwhilethe
Songisstopped.)
Note: YoucanusetheFF/REWSpeedmenucommand
tospecifythefastforwardandrewindspeed.
FF (
How Sequencer patterns are related to Drum

Track patterns
ThepatternsoftheDrumTrackfunctionyouusewith
aProgramorCombinationarerelatedtoSequencer
modepatternsasfollows.
Presetpatternsareacommonlibrarythatcanalsobe
usedbytheDrumTrackfunction.
UserpatternscannotbedirectlyusedbytheDrum
Trackfunction,buttheycanbeconvertedtouserDrum
TrackpatternsandusedwithaProgramor
Combination.Ifyouconvertauserpattern,itwillbe
storedininternalmemory,andthisdatawillnot
disappearevenwhenyouturnoffthepower.
Cue List
) button
) button
WhentheSongisplayingorpaused,thisbuttonwill
fastforwardthesong.Whenyoupressandholdthis
button,thebuttonwilllightup,andtheplaybackwill
fastforward.(Fastforwardisdisabledduring
recording,andwhiletheSongisstopped.)
LOCATE (
) button
BypressingtheLOCATE( )buttonyoucanmoveto
aspecifiedlocatepoint.Bydefault,youllmoveto
001:01.000.
Tochangethelocatepointthatsassignedtothe
LOCATE( )button,usethemenucommandSet
Location.Alternatively,youcansetthelocatepoint
duringplaybackbyholdingdowntheENTERbutton
andpressingtheLOCATE( )button.
START/STOP (
) button
Thecuelistallowsyoutoplaybackmultiplesongsin
succession.TheKROMEletsyoucreatetwentycue
lists.Eachcuelistletsyouconnectupto99songsand
specifythenumberoftimesthateachsongwillrepeat.
Thisstartsorstopsrecordingandplaybackin
Sequencermode.
ThemenucommandConverttoSongletsyouconvert
thesongsinacuelistintoasinglesong.
Pressingthisbuttonwillenterrecordreadymode.
Onceyoureinrecordreadymode(shownbythe
buttonslitLED),youcanbeginrecordingbypressing
theSEQUENCERSTART/STOP(
)button.For
details,pleaseseeRecordingMIDIinrealtimeon
page 60.
Forexampleyoucanuseacuelisttocreatethe
backing,convertthecuelisttoasong,andthenadd
solophrasesonunusedtracks.
Transport control
Thesecontrolsletyouplayback,record,fastforward,
orrewindthesequencer.
Front panel buttons

YoucanusethefrontpanelSEQUENCERbuttonsto
controlrecordingandplaybackonthesequencer.
PAUSE
REW
REC (
) button
Buttons in the display (the transport

bar)
Thetransportbuttonsinthebottomlineofthedisplay
canalsobeusedtocontrolsequencerrecordingand
playbackinthesamewayasthefrontpanel
SEQUENCERbuttons.
Thetransportbuttonswillappearwhenyoupressthe
<buttononthelowerrightsideofthedisplayand
dragittowardtheleft.Toclosethem,pressthe>
buttonanddragittowardtheright.
FF
<, >
SET LOCATE REC
popup LOCATE
LOCATE
54
REC
START/
STOP
START/ PAUSE
STOP
REW
FF
Playing Songs Playback
Playing Songs
Playback
Inordertoplaybacksongdatainthesequencer,you
mustfirstrecord,loadordumpsongdataintothe
KROME.
Letsstartbyloadingandplayingthedemosongdata.
Fordetails,pleaseseeListeningtothedemosongs
onpage 21oftheQuickStartGuide.
1. PresstheSEQbuttonorMODEbuttontoenter
Sequencermode.
TheP0:Play/RECProgramT0108orT0916page
willappear.Ifthisisnotdisplayed,presstheEXIT
buttonaboutthreetimes.
2. UseSongSelecttoselectthesongyouwantto
playback.
YoucanpresstheSongSelectpopupbuttonand
choosefromalist.Ifyouselectanemptylist,anew
songwillbecreated.
YoucanalsoselectasongbyusingtheINC/DEC
buttonorVALUEdial.Howeverifthereisnosong,
youcantmakeaselectionusingtheVALUE
controllers.
Meter
Tempo
Changing the volume, mute, and solo

settings of each track
IntheSEQP0:Play/RECProgT0108,T0916,Mixer
T0108,andT0916pagesyoucanchangethevolume,
mute,andsolosettingsofeachtrack.
Muting a specific track/Monitoring a

specific track (Mute/Solo functions)
TheKROMEprovidesaMutefunctionthatletsyou
silencespecifiedtracks116,andaSolofunctionthat
letsyouhearthespecifiedtrackorchannelbyitself.
Thesefunctionscanbeusedinvariousways.For
exampleyoucanintentionallymuteorsolospecific
tracks,orlistenonlytotherhythmsectionofthe
previouslyrecordedtrackswhileyourecordnew
tracks.LetstryouttheMuteandSolofunctions.
1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesongthatyouwant
toplayback.
2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP(
button.
3. Presstrack1Play/Rec/Mute.
ThedisplaywillchangefromPlaytoMute,andthe
playbackoftrack1willnolongerbeheard.Inthisway,
themutefunctionallowsyoutosilenceaspecified
trackuntilthetrackisunmuted.
Location
Song Select
Popup
Song Position Bar
Track Select
Presstrack2Play/Rec/Mute.Thedisplaywillchange,
andtheplaybackoftrack2willalsobemuted.To
cancelmuting,pressPlay/Rec/Muteonceagain.
Category
Program Select,
& Popup
Play/Mute/Rec
Solo
Track 1
Track 2
3. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP(
button.
4. Presstrack1SoloOn/Off.
)
Alternatively,pulloutthetransportbarandpressthe
START/STOP(
)button.Thetransportcontrol
functionalityintheprocedurebelowisdescribedas
buttonoperations,butyoucanalsoperformthesame
operationsusingtheonscreentransportbuttons.
Thesongyouselectedinstep2willbeginplaying.
Note: Thesongwillbeginplayingifyoupressthe
START/STOP(
)buttoninapageotherthanP10:
Pattern/RPPR.Ifyoupressthisbuttonwhileyourein
P10:Pattern/RPPR,thecurrentlyselectedpatternwill
beginplaying.(InP11:CueList,thesongsofthecue
listwillbeplayed.)
4. Duringplayback,youcanpresstheSTART/STOP
(
)buttontostopplayback.
IfyoupresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttononce
again,playbackwillresumefromwhereyoustopped.
FordetailsonthefunctionsoftheLOCATE( ),
PAUSE( ),REW( ),andFF( )buttons,please
seepage 54.
Solowillbehighlighted,andthistime,onlythe
performanceoftrack1willbeheard.Toplaybackonly
aspecifiedtrackbyitselfinthiswayisknownas
soloingthetrack(turningSoloon).
IfbothMuteandSoloareused,theSolofunctionwill
begivenpriority.
Presstrack2SoloOn/Off.
Thedisplaywillchange,andyouwillhearthe
playbackoftracks1and2.Youwonthearthesoundof
tracks316.
5. ToswitchSolooff,pressSoloOn/Offonceagain.
PressSoloOn/Offforbothtracks1and2.
Thedisplaywillchange,andtheplaybackoftracks1
and2willbemuted.IftheSolofunctionisturnedoff
foralltracks,playbackwillbeaccordingtothePlay/
Rec/Mutesettings.
TheSOLOsettingisnotstoredwhenyousavethe
song.
YoucanusetheFF/REWSpeedmenucommandto
specifythefastforwardandrewindspeed.
55
Exclusive Solo
ExclusiveSoloisafunctionthatlimitstheSolo
function(describedabove)toasingletrackatatime.If
ExclusiveSoloison,onlythetrackforwhichSolowas
lastturnedonwillbeplayed;othertrackswillalways
besilent.
UsetheExclusiveSolomenucommandtospecifyhow
theSolofunctionwillfunction.
ExclusiveSolooff:Youwillbeabletosolomorethan
onetrackatatime.Thestatusofatrackwillchange
eachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton.
ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Off
button,onlythattrackwillbesoloed.
Tip:YoucanturnExclusiveSoloon/offbyholding
downtheENTERbuttonandpressingnumerickey1.
Loop playback
Whenrecordingorplayingbackasong,youcanloop
individualtracksthatareplaying.
IntheP01:PlayLoopT0108orT0916page,check
TrackPlayLoopforthetracksyouwanttoloop,and
useLoopStartMeasureandLoopEndMeasureto
specifythestartingandendingmeasureoftheregion
thatwillplaybackasaloop.
IfyoucheckPlayIntro,themeasuresprecedingthe
loopwillbeplayedbackasanintroductionbeforethe
loopbegins.
Track Play Loop

Loop Start
Measure
Loop End
Measure
Play Intro
Ifyouplaybackfromthefirstmeasurewiththe
settingsshowninthescreenshotabove,thespecified
regionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.
Measures 1
Track 1
9 10 11 12 13
5
Track 2
10
10
10
10
10 9
10
IfPlayIntroisunchecked,thespecifiedregionof
measureswillrepeatasfollows.
Measures 1
56
Track 1
9 10 11 12 13
5
Track 2
10
10
10
10
10 9
10
Recording Preparations for recording
Recording
Preparations for recording
Beforeyoubeginrecording,makesurethatthe
memoryprotectsettinginGlobalmodeisturned
off.Fordetails,pleaseseeProtectingthe
memoryonpage 110.
Track settings
Sinceweregoingtorecordanewsonginthisexample,
wewillstartbyexplaininghowtoassignaprogramto
eachtrack,andadjustbasicsettingssuchasvolume.
1. Assignaprogramtoeachtrack.
UseProgramSelecttoassignaprogramtoeach
track.Themethodisthesameaswhenassigninga
programtoatimbreinacombination(seepage 46).
Creating a Song
Beforewecanbeginthisexample,weneedtoselectan
emptysongwherewecanrecord.
1. PresstheSEQbuttonorMODEbuttontoenter
Sequencermode.
2. ChooseSongSelect(e.g.,intheP0:Play/REC
ProgramT0108page).
YoucanpresstheSongSelectpopupbutton,and
choosefromalist.
Meter
REC Resolution Tempo

Mode
Tempo
YoucancopyvarioussettingsfromProgramsor
Combinations.(Seepages166,167oftheParameter
Guide.)
2. Whenassigningaprogram,youcanuseTrack
Selecttochoosethetracktowhichyouwishto
assignaprogram,andauditionthesound.
3. Setthepanandvolumeofeachtrack.
PresstheMixer18tab(ortheMixer916tab)toaccess
theMixerT0108page(MixerT0916page).
Location
Song Select
Popup
Track Select
Category
Program Select,
& Popup
Play/Mute/Rec
Solo
3. Usethenumerickeystoinputthenumberofthe
newsongthatyouwanttocreate,andpressthe
ENTERbutton.(Forexample,pressthe1switch
andthentheENTERbutton.)Adialogboxwill
appear.
IfyoupressedtheSongSelectpopuptoaccessthe
SongNo.dialogbox,pressthedesiredsongnumberto
openthedialogbox.
Pansetsthepanpositionofeachtrack,andVolume
setsthevolumelevelofeachtrack.
4. SpecifythetonegeneratorandMIDIchannelthat
willbeplayedbyeachtrack.
PressthePAGEbuttontoaccessSEQPageSelect,and
pressP3TrackParametersTheP3:TrackParameters
pagewillappear.PresstheMIDI18tab(ortheMIDI
916tab)toaccesstheMIDIT0108page(MIDIT0916
page).
4. UseSetLengthtoinputthedesirednumberof
measuresandpresstheOKbutton.
Youcanchangethenumberofmeasureslaterif
desired.Fordetails,pleaseseeSetSongLengthon
5. PresstheOKbuttontocreatethesong.
Tip:YoucanusetheENTERbuttoninsteadoftheOK
button.
UseStatustospecifywhethereachtrackwillplay
theinternaland/orexternalsoundgenerator.
NormallywhenusingtheKROME,youwillselectINT
orBTH.
INT:Duringplayback,theKROMEsinternaltone
generatorwillplaytheMIDIdatarecordedonthat
track.WhenyouusetheKROMEskeyboardor
57
controllers,youwillbeplayingandcontrollingthe
trackselectedbyTrackSelect.
EXT,EX2,BTH:Duringplayback,theMIDIdata
recordedonthattrackwillbetransmittedfromMIDI
OUTtoplayanexternalsoundmodule.Whenyouuse
theKROMEskeyboardorcontrollers,MIDIdatawill
betransmittedtoplayandcontroltheexternalsound
moduleselectedbyTrackSelect.(TheMIDIchannelof
theexternaltonegeneratormustbesettomatchthe
MIDIChannelofKROMEtracksthataresettoEXT,
EX2orBTH.)
IfStatusissettoBTH,boththeexternaltonegenerator
andinternaltonegeneratorwillbeplayedand
controlled.
UseMIDIChanneltospecifytheMIDIchannelfor
eachtrack.
NormallyyouwillsettheMIDIChanneltoa
differentchannel:116foreachtrack.Tracksthat
aresettothesameMIDIchannelwillsound
simultaneouslywhenyourecordorplayback
eitherofthetracks.
5. Adjusttheeffectsettings.
AdjustsettingsforeacheffectinP8:Routing/IFXand
P9:MFX/TFX/LFO.
Fordetails,pleaseseeUsingeffectsinCombinations
andSongsonpage 81.
6. Setthetempoandtimesignature.
Tosetthetempo,youcanturntheTEMPOknobor
presstheTAPbuttonatthedesiredinterval.
Alternatively,youcanselect(Tempo)intheP0:
Play/RECProgramT0108page(orsimilarpage),
andusetheVALUEcontrollerstosetthetempo.Set
TempoModetoManual.
Nextyouwillsetthetimesignature.Inthis
example,wellexplainhowtosetthetimesignature
usingtheMeterfield.Normally,youspecifythe
timesignaturebeforerecordingthefirsttrack,and
thenbeginrecording.
thenoteswillberecordedwiththetimingatwhich
youplaythem.
8. Makeothersettingsasnecessary.
Youcanadjustthesettingsforthearpeggiator(P7:
ARP/DT),MIDIfiltering(P5:MIDIFilter),etc.(See
page 89)
YoumayalsowishtouseToneAdjusttotweakthe
sound.Whenyouarefinishedmakingthesesettings,
thebasicsetupiscomplete.
Saving your song parameter settings

Thesongparametersettingsyoucreateherecanbe
savedasatemplate.Ifyouusethesesettings
frequently,youcansimplyloadoneofthetemplates
youvesaved.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSaveTemplateSong(Saveas
UserTemplateSong)onpage 164oftheParameter
Guide.
Using template songs

Loadingatemplatesongisaneasywaytocreate
settingsappropriateforaparticularmusicalstyle.You
canalsoassignadrumpatterntoatrackatthesame
time.
1. IntheP0:Play/RECpage,pressthemenubutton
andchooseLoadTemplateSong.
Adialogboxwillappear.
a) PresstheSEQUENCERREC()button,andsetMeter
to**/**.
b) Press**/**tohighlightit,andusetheVALUEcontrollers
tosetthetimesignature.
c) PresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobegin
recording.WhentheprecounthasendedandLocate
reaches001:01:000,presstheSTART/STOP(
)
buttontostoprecording.Thetimesignatureyou
specifiedhasnowbeenrecordedontheMastertrack.
IfyoupresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttonduringthe
precount,thetimesignaturewontberecorded.
7. SettheRECResolutionifnecessary.
Whenyourecordinrealtimeonatrack,thisparameter
specifieshowthetimingoftherecordedMIDIdata
willbecorrected.Thetimingwillalsobecorrected
whenyourecordautomationdatainrealtmeonan
audiotrack.(Datathatwasalreadyrecordedwillnot
becorrected.)
Forexample,letssupposethatyourecordedsome
eighthnotesinrealtime,butyourtimingwasnotquite
perfect,asshowninpart1oftheillustrationbelow.If
RECResolutionweresettowhenyourecorded,the
timingwouldautomaticallybecorrectedasshownin
part2oftheillustration.IfRECResolutionissettoHi,
58
2. IntheFromfield,choosethetemplatesongyou
wanttoload.
3. IfyoucheckCopyPatterntoTracktoo?,adialog
boxforcopyingapatternwillautomatically
appearafteryouexecutetheLoadTemplate
Songoperation.
Ifyouexecutethecommandwithoutcheckingthis,
onlythetemplatesongyouselectedinstep2willbe
loaded.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthetemplatesong,or
presstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidetocancel.
Whenyouperformthisoperation,songsettingsother
thantrackLoopandRPPRwillbecopied.
IfyouexecutedthisoperationwithCopyPatternto
Tracktoo?checkedinstep3,theCopyPatternTo
Trackdialogboxwillappear.
Recording Preparations for recording
Auto Song Setup function

1. EnterCombinationmode.
2. InP0:Playpage,selectthedesiredcombination
andedittheArpeggiatoretc.asdesired.
Note: Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedstateofthe
combination,usetheWriteCombinationmenu
commands.
Thisdialogboxisthesameastheonethatappearsfor
theCopyToTrack(P10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEdit)
menucommand.
3. PresstheREC()button.Alternatively,selectthe
pagemenucommandAutoSongSetup.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear.
5. InthePatternfield,selectthepatternthatyou
wanttocopy.
IntheToTrackfield,selectthecopydestinationtrack.
IntheMeasurefield,specifythestartingmeasureof
thecopydestination.
Followingthepatternnameforeachofthe605preset
patterns,themusicalstyleandthenameofthemost
suitableDrumscategoryprogramarepartially
displayed.
Byloadingadrumstrackandthecorrespondingpreset
pattern,youcaninstantlysetupadrumtrack
appropriateforeachpresettemplatesong.
6. Toexecutethisoperation,presstheOKbutton.
Whenyouexecutethisprocedure,theMeasurefield
willcountupautomatically,showinghowmany
measuresoftheselectedpatternhavebeenplacedin
theselectedsong.Youcanthencopyanotherpatternif
desired,oraddmoremeasuresofthesamepattern.
Whenyourefinished,presstheExitbutton.
Copying the settings of a combination

or program
Youcancopythesettingsofacombinationorprogram
intothesequencer.
Thiscanbedoneinthefollowingways.
4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe
REC()buttonortheOKbutton.Ifyoudecide
nottoexecute,presstheCancelbutton.
YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,and
thesettingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtothe
song.
Thefirstunusedsongwillbethecopydestination
song.
Contents automatically copied from a combination

Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyou
executethemenucommandCopyFromCombiwith
thefollowingsettingsinthedialogbox.(Seepage 166
IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked
AutoAdjustArpsettingforMultiRECchecked
Contents automatically copied from a program
AutoSongSetup
AutoSongSetupisafunctionthatcopiesthe
settingsoftheselectedcombination(in
Combinationmode)orprogram(inProgrammode)
tothesonginSequencermode.
Thecopiedcontentswillbethesameaswhenyou
executethemenucommandCopyFromProgramwith
thefollowingsettingsinthedialogbox.(Seepage 167
MenucommandsCopyFromCombiorCopyFrom
Program.(Seepages166,167oftheParameter
Guide)
InSequencermode,youcanusethesepagemenu
commandstocopythedesiredsettings.
Arpchecked
IFXs,MFXs,TFXchecked
TosettoTrack01
ArpsettoA
withDrumTrackchecked
To:DrumTracksettoTrack10
CheckRecordingSetupMultiREC
SetthePlay/Rec/MutesettingtoRECfortracks01
and10(seepage 101oftheParameterGuide).
5. TheKROMEwillautomaticallyenterrecordready
mode,andthemetronomewillsoundaccordingto
theMetronomesetting(Seepage 119ofthe
ParameterGuide).
6. PresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontobegin
realtimerecording.Tostoprecording,pressthe
START/STOP(
)buttononceagain.
59
Recording MIDI in real time

WhenyouvefinishedwithPreparationsfor
recording,youcanstartrecording.
Thisisamethodofrecordingwhatyoureplayingon
thekeyboardandyourcontrollerusage,inrealtime.
Thismethodofrecordingisnormallyusedonetrackat
atime,andiscalledsingletrackrecording.
Asanalternative,multitrackrecordingallowsyouto
simultaneouslyrecordmultiplechannelsofdataonto
multipletracks.Thisisthemethodyouwillusewhen
usingtheDrumTrackfunction,theRPPRfunction,and
thearpeggiatortorecordmultipletracksofmusical
dataatonce,orwhenyouplaybackexistingsequence
dataonanexternalsequencerandrecorditonto
KROMEssequencerinrealtime.
Recording setup
InP0:Play/RECPreferencespageRecordingSetup,
selecttherealtimerecordingmethodyouwanttouse.
Overwrite
Bydefault,thisrecordingmethodisselected.
Thiswillrecordyourperformancebyoverwritingany
previouslyrecordeddata.Alldatafollowingthe
measurewhereyoustartrecordingwillbeerased.
Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen
modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofrealtime
recordingorMIDIeventediting.
1. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwant
torecord.
2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSTART/STOP
(
)button.
Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturntothe
pointwhereyoubeginrecording.
IfyoupressthePAUSE( )buttoninsteadofthe
START/STOP(
)button,recordingwillpause.
WhenyoupressthePAUSE( )buttononceagain,
recordingwillresumewhereyouleftoffbefore
pausing.Whenyouarefinished,presstheSTART/
STOP(
)buttontostoprecording.
Thefollowingrecordingsetupparametersarealso
available.
Overdub
Selectthismethodifyouwishtorecordadditional
performancedatabyoverdubbingitwithouterasing
thepreviouslyrecordeddata.
Manual punch-in
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtousethe
SEQUENCERREC()buttonorafootswitchtore
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded
track.
Auto punch-in
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre
recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded
track.
Then,recordingwilloccuronlyoverthespecifiedarea
(AutoPunchInStartMeasureAutoPunchInEnd
Measure),rewritingitwiththenewlyrecordeddata.
Loop All Tracks

Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtorepeatedlyrecord
overaspecifiedareaofatrack,whilecontinuingtoadd
data.Thisissuitableforcreatingdrumpatterns,etc.
Fordetails,pleaseseeAnexampleofrealtime
recordingonpage 61.
3. InLocation,specifythelocationwhereyouwish
tobeginrecording.
Location
4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC()button,andthen
presstheSTART/STOP(
)button.
IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefault
settings,themetronomewillsoundforatwomeasure
precount,andthenrecordingwillbegin.
Playthekeyboardandmovecontrollerssuchasthe
joysticktorecordyourperformance.
60
Multi (multitrack recording)

UseMIDImultitrackrecordingifyouwantto
simultaneouslyrecordmultipletracksofdifferent
channels,suchaswhenrecordingtheoutputofthe
drumtrack,arpeggiatororRPPRfunctions,orwhen
recordingfromanexternalmultitracksequencer.
Recording Step recording
An example of realtime recording

Inthisexample,wellassignadrumprogramtotrack
01andcreatethefollowingonemeasuredrumphrase.
Hi hat: F#3
Snare: E3
Bass drum: C3
Step recording
Steprecordingistherecordingmethodwhereyou
specifythedurationandstrengthofeachnote,anduse
thekeyboardtospecifythepitchofeachMIDInote.
YoucanusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttonofthe
dialogboxtoinputrestsandties.
1. Createanewsong,andspecifyadrumprogram
fortrack01.
UseTrackSelecttoselecttrack01,andverifythatyou
hearadrumprogram.(Seepage 57)
2. AccesstheP0:Play/RECPreferencespage.In
RecordingSetup,specifyLoopAllTracksand
setittoM001M001(seepage 117oftheParameter
Guide).
Withthissetting,measure1willberecorded
repeatedly.Thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedat
eachpass.
Steprecordingisusefulwhenyouwanttocreate
mechanicallyprecisebeats,orwhenyouneedto
recordaphrasethatwouldbedifficulttoplaybyhand
inrealtime,orwhenyoufinditdifficulttoplay
extremelycomplicatedorrapidpassages.
An example of step recording

Inthisexample,wellassignabassprogramtotrack02
andsteprecordthefollowingtwomeasurebass
phrase.
3. SetRECResolutionto.(Seepage 58)
4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC()button,andthen
theSTART/STOP(
)button.
Themetronomewillsoundatwomeasurecount
down,andthenrecordingwillbegin.
5. Asshowninthemusicalexampleprintedabove,
startbyplayingtheC3noteofthekeyboardto
recordthebassdrumforonemeasure.
Note
Step
Time:
Select
Step
Time:
.3-
Key, Button
Measure/
Beat Tick
C3
C3 key
001 / 01.000
G3
G3 key
001 / 01.360
Rest button
001 / 02.000
C4 key
001 / 02.240
Rest button
001 / 02.360
6. Next,playtheE3noteofthekeyboardtorecord
thesnareforonemeasure,andthentheF#3noteto
recordthehihat.
C4
C4
C4 key
001 / 03.120
recording.
D3
D3 key
001 / 03.240
Eb3
Eb3 key
001 / 04.000
E3
E3 key
001 / 04.240
F3
F3 key
002 / 01.000
Rest button
002 / 01.120
C3 key
002 / 01.360
Rest button
002 / 02.000
F2
F2 key
002 / 02.240
Tie
Tie button
002 / 03.000
F2
F2 key
002 / 03.240
Rest button
002 / 03.360
A2
A2 key
002 / 04.000
A3
A3 key
002 / 04.240
Rest button
002 / 04.360
)buttontostop
8. Playbacktheresult,andlistentothedrum
performancethatyourecorded.
PresstheSTART/STOP(
)button.Whenyouve
finishedlistening,presstheSTART/STOP(
)
buttononceagaintostopplayback.
9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe
COMPAREbuttontoreturntothestatepriorto
recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4.
Note: Whenyourefinishedrecording,changethe
RecordingSetupbacktothenormallyusedOverwrite
(P0:Play/RECPreferencespage).
Inaddition,accesstheP0:Play/RECPlayLoopT01
08page,checkTrackPlayLoopfortrack01,andsetthe
LoopStartMeasureandLoopEndMeasureto001.
Whenyouplayback,track01willrepeatedlyplaythe
firstmeasure.
C3
1. Specifyabassprogramfortrack02.UseTrack
Selecttoselecttrack02,andverifythatyouheara
bassprogram.
2. AccesstheP6:TrackEditTrackEditpage.
61
3. SetFromMeasureto001.
Withthissetting,steprecordingwillbeginfrom
measure1.
7. Asdescribedinsteps5and6,inputthenotesand
reststhatfollowthefirstC3note.
Inadditiontothemethodsdescribedinsteps5and6,
youcanalsousethefollowinginputmethods.
Toinputarest,presstheRestbutton.Thiswill
inputarestoftheselectedStepTimevalue.
Toenteratie,sothattwoormorenotesofthesame
pitchwillbeplayedasasingleunbrokennote,
presstheTiebutton.WhenyoupresstheTie
button,thepreviouslyinputnotewillbeextended
bytheStepTimelength.
Todeleteanoteorrestthatyouinput,pressthe
StepBackbutton.Thepreviouslyinputnotewillbe
deleted.
4. Pressthemenubutton,andpressmenucommand
StepRecording.
Toinputachord,simultaneouslypressthenotesof
thedesiredchord.Evenifyoudonotpressthem
simultaneously,notesthatarepressedbeforeyou
fullyremoveyourhandfromallkeysonthe
keyboardwillbeinputatthesamelocation.
Toauditionanotewithoutactuallyinputtingit,
pressthePAUSE( )button.Nowwhenyouplaya
noteonthekeyboard,itwillsound,butthenote
willnotbeactuallyinput.Inthisstate,playinga
keywillproduceasound,butwillnotinputanote.
PressthePAUSE( )buttononceagaintocancel
therecordpausestate,andresumeinputtingnotes.
8. Whenyouarefinishedrecording,presstheDone
button.
PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP(
toplayback.
5. InStepTime,useSelecttospecifythebasic
timingvalue.
InputthefirstC3noteas.(dottedeighthnote).
Usethepopupbuttontothelefttoselect.
Youcanchooseanotevaluerangingfromawholenote
()toa32ndnote().
Inputadottednotebyselecting.withthepopup
buttonsatright.
Youcanspecify3toinputatriplet.Ifyouwanttouse
theunmodifiedlengthofthenotethatsselectedatthe
left,choose.
NoteDurationindicatesthelengththatthenote
itselfwillsound.Smallervalueswillproduceastaccato
note,andlargervalueswillproducealegatonote.For
thisexample,leavethissettingunchanged.
NoteVelocityisthevelocity(playingstrength),and
largervalueswillproducealoudervolume.Setthisto
Key.
IfyouselectKeyforthisparameter,thevelocityofhow
youactuallyplaythekeyboardwillbeinput.
6. Onthekeyboard,pressandthenreleasethefirst
C3notethatyouwanttoinput.
Thedatayouinputwillappearinthedisplayas
numericalvalues.Ontheupperrightside,Measure
001BeatTick01.000willchangetoMeasure001Beat
Tick01.360.Thenextnoteyouinputwillbeplacedat
thislocation.
62
)button
AccesstheP0:Play/RECPlayLoopT0108page,
checkTrackPlayLoopfortrack02,setLoopStart
Measureto001,andLoopEndMeasureto002.track
02willplaymeasures12repeatedly.
9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe
COMPAREbuttontoreturntothestatepriorto
recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4.
Whenyoubeginsteprecording,alldatainthe
trackthatfollowsthemeasurewhereyoubegan
recordingwillbeerased.Youneedtobeawareof
thisifyoubeginsteprecordingfromameasure
midwaythroughthesong.
Ifyouwanttocopydataintoameasurethat
alreadycontainsdata,performsteprecordingin
anemptytrack,andusetheMoveMeasureor
CopyMeasuremenucommands.(Seepage 179of
theParameterGuide)
Ifyouwanttoeditoraddtotherecordeddata,you
canusetheEventEditorPianoRollfunction.(See
pages 169,171oftheParameterGuide)
Recording Recording multiple tracks from an external sequencer
Recording multiple tracks

from an external sequencer
TheplaybackfromanexternalMIDIsequencer
connectedtotheKROMEcanberecorded
simultaneouslyusingmultirecording.
5. IntheP3:TrackParametersMIDIT0108and
T0916page,useMIDIChanneltospecifythe
MIDIchannelofeachtrack.
SettheMIDIchannelofeachKROMEtracktomatch
theMIDIchannelofeachexternalsequencertrack.
Datafromeachchannelwillberecordedonthe
correspondingKROMEtrack.
1. MakesurethattheMIDIOUTofyourexternal
sequencerisconnectedtotheMIDIINofthe
KROME.
MakesurethatStatusissettoINTorBTH.
Ifitisnotconnected,turnoffthepower,makethe
connection,andthenturnthepoweron.
7. PresstheSEQUENCERREC()buttontoenter
recordstandbymode.
2. IntheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpage,set
MIDIClocktoExternalMIDI.Withthissetting,
theKROMEwillsynchronizetoMIDIclock
messagesfromyourexternalsequencer.
8. Startyourexternalsequencer.
TheKROMEssequencerwillautomaticallybegin
recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStartmessage
transmittedbyyourexternalsequencer.
MakesurethatReceiveExt.RealtimeCommandsis
checked.
9. Whenplaybackhasended,stopyourexternal
sequencer.
6. PresstheLOCATE(
to001:01.000.
)buttontosetthelocation
TheKROMEssequencerwillautomaticallystop
recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStopmessage
transmittedbytheexternalsequencer.Youcanalso
stoprecordingbypressingtheSTART/STOP(
)
buttonontheKROME.
Afterthis,youcanplaybackthenewlyrecorded
sequence:
10. IntheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpage,set
MIDIClocktoInternal.
SetTempoModetoAutointheSeqP0:Play/REC
ProgramT0108page.
3. CreateanewsonginSequencermode,andinthe
P0:Play/RECPreferencespage,checktheMulti
RECcheckbox.SetRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.
PresstheSTART/STOP(
)buttontoplayback.
Note: Ifthecorrectsoundsarenotselectedwhenyou
startplayingback,youmaybeabletosolvethe
problembyusingthemenucommandEventEdit(P6:
TrackEdit)torespecifytheProgramChangedata.
4. PressPlay/Rec/MutetoselectRECforthetracks
youwanttorecord.
Forthetracksyoudontwanttorecord,selectPlayor
Mute.
63
Recording System Exclusive

events
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI
deviceortheparameterchangesproducedwhenyou
editatrackparameteroreffectparametercanbe
recordedinrealtimeonanytrack.
2. SelectTrack09inTrackSelect,andrecord
parameterchangesasdesired.
Note: Forthisexample,selectanemptytrack.Ifyou
wanttorecordontoaMIDItrackthatalreadycontains
data,settheP0:Play/RECPreferencespage
RecordingSetuptoOverdub,asdescribedon
page 60.
Duringplayback,theexclusivemessagesyourecorded
willcontrolthetrackparametersandeffectparameters
ofthesong,andcanbesenttoexternalMIDIdevices.
Note: YoucanusethemenucommandPutEffect
SettingtoTracktoinsertanexclusiveeventcontaining
theparametersettingsforaninserteffect,mastereffect
ortotaleffectintothedesiredlocationofatrack,so
thatthesesettingswillautomaticallyswitchduring
playback.
GM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagescanbe
recordedonatrack,buttheKROMEstone
generatorwillnotrespondtothesemessages.
Recording internal parameter

changes
YoucanuseSysExforautomationofinternalKROME
effectsandProgramparameters.
Herewellexplainhowtorecordinternalparameter
changes.Asanexample,wellexplainhowparameter
changesrecordedonadifferenttrackcanbeusedto
modifytheparametersoftheinserteffect(IFX1)
appliedtotheprogramoftrack1.
SelectTrack09inTrackSelect.Thenpressthe
SEQUENCERREC()buttonandthentheSTART/
STOP(
)button,andbeginrecording.
Attheappropriatetimewhilerecording,adjustthe
parameter(s)thatyouwanttorealtimerecord.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage,select
anothereffectforIFX1,andmodifytheeffect
parametervalues.
Note: Inordertorecordsystemexclusivemessages,
makesurethattheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIRouting
settingEnableExclusiveischecked.GotoGlobal
modeandverifythatthisischecked.
Note: Inadditiontoeffectparameterchanges,youcan
alsorecordparameterssuchassoundparameters.For
detailsontheparametersthatcanberecorded,please
seepage 191oftheParameterGuide.
3. Stoprecording.
Note: Exclusivemessagesarealwaysrecordedonthe
currenttrackselectedbyTrackSelect.Inthisexample,
theyarerecordedonMIDItrack9.
1. SelectthedesiredprogramforMIDItrack1,and
routeittoIFX1.Thenrecordaphraseofabout
sixteenmeasures.
Note: IntheMIDIeventeditpageyoucanviewthe
recordedexclusiveeventsandtheirlocation.Exclusive
eventsaredisplayedasEXCL.
IntheP0:Play/RECProgramT0108page,use
ProgramSelecttoselectthedesiredprogramfor
MIDITrack01.
Toviewtheseevents,gototheP6:TrackEditTrack
Editpage,andselectthemenucommandMIDIEvent
Edit.ThenintheSetEventFiltersdialogbox,check
ExclusiveandpresstheOKbutton.
IntheP8:Routing/IFXRoutingT0108page,route
theMIDITrack01Bus(IFX/Output)SelecttoIFX1.
ThenintheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage,
selectthedesiredeffectforIFX1.
SelectMIDITrack01inTrackSelect.Thenpress
theSEQUENCERREC()buttonandthenthe
START/STOP(
)button,andrecordaphrase
ofaboutsixteenmeasures.
64
Exclusiveeventscannotbechangedtoadifferent
typeofevent.Norcanothereventsbechanged
intoexclusiveevents.
4. Ifyougotothepage(e.g.,P8:Routing/IFX)that
showstheparametersyouadjustedinrealtime,
youcanwatchtherecordedchangesbereproduced
whilethesongplaysback.
Recording Recording patterns
Exclusive messages that will be recorded during realtime recording

Thefollowingexclusivemessageswillberecorded.
(Seepage 191oftheParameterGuide)
ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI
device.
ParameterchangesinSequencermode.
MasterVolumeuniversalsystemexclusive
messagesassignedtoafootpedalorknob.
Using realtime controls to record

changes in a MIDI tracks pan, EQ,
volume, and tone adjust
Bycontrollingthepan,EQ,volume,andtoneadjust
parametersduringrealtimerecording,youcanrecord
thesechangessothattheywillbereflectedduring
playback.
Usemultitrackrecordingifyouwanttomodifythe
settingsofmultipletrackssimultaneously.
Note: Controllingtheseparameterswilltransmit
controlchangeorsystemexclusivemessages.Inorder
forthisdatatoberecorded,theGlobalP1:MIDIMIDI
RoutingEnableControlChangeandEnableExclusive
settingsmustbechecked.GotoGlobalmodeand
verifythattheseitemsarechecked.
Note: UseParam.MIDIOutinGlobalP1:MIDIBasic
pagetospecifywhethercontrolchangemessagesor
systemexclusivemessageswillbetransmittedwhen
youeditthePan(CC#10),Volume(CC#7),orSend1/2
level(CC#93andCC#91)parameters.
Inthiscase,theGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIRouting
settingsEnableControlChangeandEnableExclusive
mustbecheckedrespectively.
Recording patterns
Recording and editing patterns
Youcanrecordpatternsineitheroftwoways;realtime
recordingorsteprecording.However,patternrealtime
recordingdiffersfromsongrealtimerecordinginthat
youcanuseonlyLooptyperecording.
YoucaneditpatternsbyusingEventEditoperationsto
modifytherecordeddataorinsertnewdata.Youcan
alsousetheGetFromTrackmenucommandto
convertadesiredregionofperformancedatafroma
MIDItrackintoapattern.Conversely,youcanusethe
PuttoTrackorCopytoTrackmenucommandsto
placeorcopytheperformancedatafromapatterninto
aMIDItrack.
Inaddition,youcanusetheConverttoDrumTrack
Patternpagemenucommandtoconvertauser
patterntoadrumtrackpattern.(SeeConvertingtoa
DrumTrackpatternonpage 103)
Recording patterns in real time

Whenrealtimerecordingapattern,apatternofthe
specifiednumberofmeasureswillplayback
repeatedly,allowingyoutocontinueaddingmusical
datatoit.
1. Createanewsong,andasdescribedin
Preparationsforrecordingonpage 57,setthe
tracktotheprogramthatwillbeusedbythe
pattern.
2. AccesstheP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage.
Pattern Select
REC Resolution
Remove Data
Track
Select
3. UseTrackSelecttochoosethetrackthatyouwill
usetorecordthepattern.
Thepatternwillplaybackwiththeprogramandother
settingsoftheselectedtrack.
4. SetPattern(PatternBank)toUser,andset
PatternSelecttoU00.
UserpatternsU00U99canbecreatedforeachsong.
5. SelectthemenucommandPatternParameter.
65
Other way to record

Using the Drum Track function and
the arpeggiator to record on multiple
tracks simultaneously
6. Setthenumberofmeasuresinthepatterntoa
Lengthof04(fourmeasures),andsetMeterto
atimesignatureof4/4.PresstheOKbutton.
Youcanusemultirecordingtosimultaneouslyrecord
amultitrackperformanceusingtheDrumTrack
functionandarpeggiator.
7. Asnecessary,setRECResolutiontoapply
realtimequantization.
Fordetails,pleaseseeRecordingMIDIinrealtime
onpage 60.
8. Beginrealtimerecording.
Youcanrecordinthesamewayasyoudidwhen
recordingtrackswithLoopAllTracks.(SeeLoopAll
Tracksonpage 60)
Using the RPPR function to record on

multiple tracks simultaneously
PresstheSEQUENCERREC()button,andthenpress
theSTART/STOP(
)button.
Youcanusemultirecordingtosimultaneouslyrecord
amultitrackperformanceusingtheRPPRfunction.
Aftertheprecount,patternrecordingwillbegin.Play
thekeyboardandusethejoystickandothercontrollers
torecordyourperformance.
Fordetails,pleaseseeCreatinganRPPRpatternon
page 71.
Whenyoureachtheendofthepattern,thesequencer
willreturntothebeginningofthepatternandcontinue
recording.Ifyoucontinuerecording,thenewly
recordeddatawillbeaddedtothepreviously
recordeddata.
9. Ifyouwanttodeletespecificdatawhileyou
continuepatternrecording,youcanpresstheREC
()buttonorchecktheRemoveDatacheckbox.
Fordetailsrefertostep6ofLoopAllTrackson
page 60.
recording.
)buttontostop
Ifyoumadeamistakeordecidetorerecord,pressthe
START/STOP(
)buttontostoprecording,and
presstheCOMPAREbutton.Thenbeginthepattern
recordingprocedureagainasinstep8.
66
Song editing Song
Song editing
Youcanapplyavarietyofeditingprocedurestoa
song.Theavailabletypesofeditingproceduresare
listedbelow.
measures.TheEraseMeasurecommandcanalsobe
usedtoremoveonlyaspecifictypeofdata.Unlikethe
DeleteMeasurecommand,executingtheErase
Measurecommanddoesnotcausethesubsequent
measuresofmusicaldatatobemovedforward.
Song
DeleteMeasure:Thiscommanddeletesthespecified
measures.WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandis
executed,themusicaldatafollowingthedeleted
measureswillbemovedtowardsthebeginningofthe
sequence.
Load(Save)TemplateSong:Loadsasongtemplate
intothesong(orsavesasongasatemplate)(see
page 58).
CopyFromCombination/CopyFromProgram:Copies
thesettingsofthespecifiedcombination/programtothe
settingsofthesongthatscurrentlyselected.
CopyFromSong:Thiscommandcopiesallofthe
settingdataandmusicaldatafromthespecifiedsong
tothesongthatscurrentlyselected.
Renamesong:Renamestheselectedsong.Youcan
enterupto24characters.
DeleteSong:Thiscommanddeletesthecurrently
selectedsong.
FF/REWSpeed:Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedat
whichfastforwardorrewindwilloccurwhenyou
presstheFF( )buttonorREW( )button.
GMInitialize:ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystem
OnmessagetotheSequencermode,resettingallMIDI
trackstotheGMsettings.
SetSongLength:Thiscommandchangesthelengthof
thespecifiedsong.Whenitisexecuted,thelengthof
themastertrackwillchange,andthenumberof
measuresplayedwillchange.
MIDI tracks
Tracks
StepRecording:Thisallowsyoutospecifythelength
andvelocityofeachnotenumerically,andtoinput
MIDIdata,thepitches,fromthekeyboard.Youcanuse
theRestbuttonandTiebuttontoenterarestortie.
EventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsof
MIDIdata.
PianoRoll:Allowsyoutoeditnotes,velocities,and
controlchangesinthepianorollscreen.Byselecting
anddraggingeventsinthescreen,youcanedittheir
pitchortiming,ordeleteoraddevents.
EraseTrack:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe
specifiedtrack.Itisnotpossibletoerasethemaster
trackbyitself.
CopyTrack:Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafrom
thecopysourcetracktothespecifiedtrack.
BounceTrack:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical
dataofthebouncesourceandbouncedestination
tracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthebounce
destination.Allmusicaldatainthebouncesourcewill
beerased.
EraseMeasure:Thiscommanderasesthespecified
type(s)ofmusicaldatafromthespecifiedrangeof
InsertMeasure:Thiscommandinsertsthespecified
numberofmeasuresintothespecifiedtrack.Whenyou
executetheInsertMeasurecommand,themusicaldata
followingtheinsertlocationwillbemovedbackward.
RepeatMeasure:Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthe
specifiedmeasuresforthespecifiednumberoftimes.
WhenyouexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,the
measureswillbeinsertedfollowingthemeasure
specifiedbyToEndofMeasure,andmusicaldata
followingtheinserteddatawillbemovedbackward.
CopyMeasure:Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresof
musicaldataspecifiedastheFromsourcetothe
beginningofthemeasurespecifiedastheTo
location.WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasure
command,theexistingtrackdataatthecopy
destinationwillberewritten.
MoveMeasure:Thiscommandmovesthespecified
measuresofperformancedatatoanothermeasure.
WhenyouexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,the
performancedatafollowingthemovesourcemeasures
willmoveforwardbythecorrespondingnumberof
measures,andtheperformancedatafollowingthe
movedestinationwillmovebackward(i.e.,laterinthe
song)bythesamenumberofmeasures.
CreateControlData:Thiscommandcreatescontrol
change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempodatainthe
specifiedregionofaMIDItrackorthemastertrack.
EraseControlData:Thiscommanderasesdatasuchas
controlchanges,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempoin
thespecifiedrange.
Quantize:ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDI
dataofthetypeyouspecify(notedata,controlchange,
aftertouch,pitchbend,programchange,etc.)inthe
track.Youcanalsoadjustforswing.
Shift/EraseNote:Thiscommandshifts(moves)or
erasesthespecifiednotenumbersinaspecifiedMIDI
trackandrangeofmeasures.
ModifyVelocity:Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocity
valuesofnotesinthespecifiedareasothattheywill
changeovertimeaccordingtoaselectedcurve.
CreateExclusiveData:Thiscommandcreates
universalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROME
parameterchangemessagesinthespecifiedregionofa
MIDItrack.
EraseExclusiveData:Thiscommanderases(deletes)
universalsystemexclusivemessagesorKROME
parameterchangemessagesfromthespecifiedregion.
Todeletealltypesofsystemexclusivemessageother
thanthoselistedabove,settheEraseMeasure
commandsKindfieldtoExclusive,andexecutethe
command.
67
Pattern
Track view edit
StepRecording(LoopType):Hereyoucanperform
steprecordingintoapattern.
Herewellexplaintrackviewediting.
EventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsofthe
musicaldatainapattern.
PianoRoll:Youcaneditnotes,velocities,andcontrol
changesinthepianorollscreen.
PatternParameter:Thiscommandspecifiesthe
numberofmeasuresandthetimesignatureofthe
selectedpattern.
ErasePattern:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe
selectedpattern.
CopyPattern:Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsand
musicaldataoftheselectedpatterntoanotherpattern.
BouncePattern:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical
dataofthebouncesourcepatternandbounce
destinationpattern,andplacesthecombinedmusical
datainthebouncedestination.
GetFromTrack:Thiscommandtakesmusicaldata
fromaMIDItrackandloadsitintothespecified
pattern.
Youcanvisuallyspecifyregionsofmeasuresinthe
display,andthenmove,copy,orerasethem.
Foreachtrack,eventdatasuchasnotes,velocities,and
controlchangesaredisplayed(seetheillustration
below).
Youreditingwillapplytothehighlightedmeasures.
TherangeisshowninFROMMEASUREandToEND
ofMEASUREintheupperline.
Youcanmove,copy,orerasedatainunitsofmeasures.
Note: Youcantspecifyaregionofmeasuresunlessa
toolisselectedinthetoolbox.
Examples of using the tools

Example)
Moving the events of measures 12 to measures 56
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
1
PutToTrack:Thiscommandplacesapatternintoa
MIDItrack.
CopyToTrack:Thiscommandcopiesthespecified
areaofmusicaldatafromthespecifiedpatterntoa
MIDItrackasmusicaldata.
ConverttoDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommand
convertsauserpatternintoauserdrumtrackpattern,
whichcanthenbeusedwiththeDrumTrackinany
mode.
2
LoadDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommandloadsauser
DrumTrackpatternintoauserpattern.
3. Pressthe
EraseDrumTrackPattern:Thiserasesthespecified
DrumTrackpattern.
4. Pressmeasure5(themovedestinationmeasure).
Alternatively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure5.
tool.
Location bar
Track name indication
Control message name indication
( Track View Setup)
Note events
Indicate the selected region.

Linked with the identicallynamed parameter of the
Track Edit page.
Scroll button
Tool box
Specify the starting
measure.
Track View area select

The bar at left indicates the
four tracks shown in the track
view area (in this example,
tracks 14).
Specify the ending

measure.
Move the events of the
selected measure(s).
Scroll button
Setup
Press this button to open
the Track View Setup
dialog box.
( Track View Setup)
68
Copy the events of the

Erase the events of the
Jump to the piano roll.
Displays note events in a

one-octave range
( Track View Setup)
Selected region
Velocity indication
( Track View Setup)
Pattern
Scroll button
Track view area
Displays the values for the

control message name indicated
in the left of the screen
( Track View Setup)
Song editing Track view edit
5. Inthisexample,aneventexistsinthemove
destinationmeasure,sotheDragMovedialogbox
willappear.
4. Whilecontinuingtopress,dragtothemove
destinationtrack,andrelease.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthe
destinationdata(replacingthedestinationdatawith
thesourcedata).Mergewillcombinethesourceand
destinationdata.
PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethemove.
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestination
measures,thisdialogboxwillnotappear;themove
willoccurimmediately.
Ifthemovedestinationmeasurescontainevents,the
DragMovedialogboxwillappear.
Overwritewilloverwritethesourcedataoverthe
destinationdata(replacingthedestinationdatawith
thesourcedata).Mergewillcombinethesourceand
destinationdata.PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethe
move.
If you choose Overwrite
If you choose Merge
The destination is overwritten

by the source data
Iftherearenoeventsinthemovedestination
measures,thisdialogboxwillnotappear;themove
willoccurimmediately.
The two sets of data are combined
Example)
Copying the events of measures 12 to measures 34
1. Pressthe
tool.
2. Dragovermeasures12tospecifytheeditregion.
1
Example)
Moving the data of an entire track
1. Returnthelocationtothebeginning.
2. Pressthe
tool.
3. Presstheleftsideofmeasure1inthetrackyou
wanttomove.
2
3. Pressthe
tool.
4. Pressmeasure3(thecopydestinationmeasure).
Alternatively,dragtheeditregiontomeasure3.
69
Thecopywillbeexecuted.
Piano Roll Editing

PianoRolleditingletsyouenter,edit,ordeleteevent
datasuchasnotes,velocities,andcontrolchanges.
1. IntheSeqP6:TrackEditTrackViewpage,specify
thetrackandmeasurethatyouwanttoedit.
2. Selectthe toolintheTrackViewpageorselect
PianoRollfromthemenucommandstoaccess
thePianoRollwindow.(Seeillustrationbelow)
5. Ifdesired,youcanpressanothercopydestination
tocopythedatarepeatedly.
Example) Copying the data of an entire track
3. Makesurethattheeventsyouwanttoeditare
displayedinthenoteviewareaattheupperpart
ofthewindoworinthecontrolviewareaatthe
lowerpartofthewindow.
Pressthenoteviewareaselector,andusethevalue
controllers.
Youcancopythedataofanentiretracktoanother
track.
Selectthe
RefertoExample)Movingthedataofanentiretrack.
EnterMeasor#intheeventlist.
Instep2,choosethe
Usetheviewcontrolzoombuttonstozoomin/out.
tool.
tool,anddrag.
Switchtheviewareaheightselector.
4. Usethetoolboxtoselectatool,andeditthedata.
Note: Ifyouwanttoundoanedit,presstheUndo
button.
5. Toplaybacktheevents,pressthePlaybutton.A
dialogboxwillopen,andthesongwillstart
playing.Thisallowsyoutochecktheresultsof
yourediting.
6. Youcanchangesettingssuchasthenote
resolution.PresstheSetupbutton,andadjustthe
settingsinthePianoRollSetupdialogbox.
7. Whenyourefinishedediting,presstheDone
button.
Note events
The selected note event
Note view area

Toolbox:
Select or move a note.
Change the length of notes.
Enter notes.
Note view area select
Delete notes.
Select what will be
shown in the control
view area. (In this
example, velocity values
are shown.)
Move the note view

area that is displayed.
View area height select
Switch the note event
display
Control view area
Scroll (view control)

Event list
The Piano Roll Setup dialog

box will appear when you
press the Setup button
(->see Piano Roll Setup).
70
Zoom
Undo cancels the

preceding edit. Redo
returns to the state prior
to Undo.
Plays back the song. The Piano Roll

Edit Play dialog box will appear
when you press this button
( Piano Roll Edit Play).
Ends piano roll editing
Creating an RPPR pattern Creating RPPR data
Creating an RPPR pattern

RPPRstandsforRealtimePatternPlay/Recording,and
isafunctionthatletsyouassignpatterndatatoeach
key,andthenplaybackthatpatternsimplybypressing
thekeywhereitisassigned.Youcanrealtimerecord
thisperformance.
Creating RPPR data

1. Createanewsong,andchooseadrumprogramfor
track1.
2. AccesstheP10:Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetuppage.
Inthispage,theRPPRfunctionisautomatically
turnedon.
Asdescribedabove,assignseveralotherpatterns
suchasP003andhigher.
3. Selectthekeywherethepatternwillbeassigned.
11. PresstheC#2key.
4. SelectC#2.
Theassignedpatternwillplay.
Youcanalsochangethissettingbyholdingdownthe
KEYeditcellandplayinganoteonthekeyboard.
12. TakeyourfingerofftheC#2key,andpresstheD2
key.
Note: C2andlowerkeysareusedtostopplayback,
andcannotbeassignedpatterns.
Thepatternwillchange,andplaybackwillbegin.At
thistime,thepatternoperationwilldependonthe
SyncandModesetting.
5. CheckAssignforC#2.
6. SetPatternBanktoPreset,andsetPattern
SelecttoP001.
7. SetTracktoTrack01.
Theselectedpatternwillbeplayedaccordingtothe
settings(program,etc.)ofthetrackyouselecthere.
13. SetKEYtoC#2,andsetSynctoMeasure.Make
thesamesettingforD2.
Nowpressthenotesconsecutively.Noticethatthe
patternsfunctioninadifferentway.
WiththeMeasuresetting,patternswillbehandledin
onemeasureunits.Thesecondandsubsequent
patternswillstartinsyncwiththeendofpatternthat
waspreviouslyplayed.
IfyouchangetheModesettingtoOnce,theentire
patternwillplaybacktotheendevenifyourelease
yourfingerfromthekeyboardimmediately.
Tostopplayback,eitherpressthesamekeyonce
again,orpresstheC2orlowerkey.
FordetailsonSync,Mode,andShift,pleasesee
Theassignedkeysarealsoshowninthekeyboard
graphicinthedisplay.
8. Assignpatternstootherkeys.
ForKEY,presstheINCbuttontoselectD2.
9. PresstheRevertbutton.
TheAssign,PatternBank,PatternSelect,andTrack
settingswillbegiventhepreviously(steps57)
specifiedvalues.
10. ChoosePatternSelect,andpresstheINC
buttontoselectP002.
Keyswherenopatternsareassignedcanbeplayed
normally.UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackyou
wanttoplay.Forexampleyoucouldassignbacking
patternsfordrumsorbasstokeysC#2B2anduse
thesekeystocontrolthepatternplayback,while
usingthekeysC3andabovetoplayasolo
performanceinrealtime.Itsagoodideatokeep
yourRPPRassignmentswithinaspecificrangeof
keys.
ByusingRevertinthisway,youcanworkefficiently
whenassigningcontiguous(ornearby)pattern
numbersortracks.
71
RPPR playback
LetsusetheRPPRpatternthatyoucreatedtoperform
intheP0:Play/RECProgramT0108page.
1. AccesstheP0:Play/RECProgramT0108page.
Realtime-recording an RPPR
performance
Youcanrecordtherealtimeperformancegeneratedby
RPPR.
RPPR On
Recording an RPPR performance

TheRPPRplaybackcanberecordedasperformance
dataonthetrack(s)assignedtoeachpattern.This
meansthatyoulluseeithersingletrackrecordingor
multitrackrecording,asappropriateforthetrack
settingsorperformancestyleoftheRPPRyoure
playing.
Ontheotherhand,evenifRPPRusesonlyonetrack,
usemultitrackrecordingifyouwillberecording
anothertrackatthesametime.
2. ChecktheRPPRcheckbox.
TheRPPRfunctionwillbeturnedon.SettheRPPRon/
offforeachsong.
3. Playthekeyboard,andpatternswillbeginplaying
accordingtotheRPPRsettings.
IfyouwanttoplayRPPRphrasesfromanexternal
MIDIdevice,youcancontrolthemontheMIDI
channelofthetrackthatsselectedinTrackSelect.
PatternplaybackforkeyswheretheSyncsettingis
BeatorMeasurewillsynchronizetothepattern
playbackoftheveryfirstkeyplayed.
Ifyouareplayingthepatterninsynchronization
(whenSyncisBeat,Measure,orSEQ),thepattern
willstartaccuratelyifyouplaythenoteslightly
earlierthanthetimingofthebeatormeasure.Even
ifyouplaythenoteslightlylaterthanthebeator
measure(butnolaterthana32ndnote),itwillbe
consideredtohavestartedatthebeatormeasure,
andthebeginningofthepatternwillbe
compressedsothattheremainderoftheplayback
willbecorrect.
Youshouldalsoselectmultitrackrecordingifyou
specifiedtheRPPRdatausingmultipletracksrather
thanjustasingletrack,andwanttosimultaneously
recordtheperformanceofmultipletracks.
HereshowyoucanrecordanRPPRperformanceand
akeyboardperformanceatthesametime.Beforeyou
continue,usetheP0:Play/RECProgramT0108page
toassignadrumprogramtoMIDItrack1,andabass
programtoMIDItrack2.
1. AssignseveralkeysstartingwithC#2topreset
patterns.
ChecktheC#2Assignsetting,andsetPatternBankto
PresetandPatternSelecttothedesiredpresetpattern.
ForTrack,selectMIDItrack1(Track01)towhichyou
assignedadrumprogram.
2. ForeachRPPRpattern,setSynctoSEQ.
WithasettingofSEQ,RPPRpatternstriggeredwhile
thesequencerisplayingorrecordingwillstartin
synchronizationwiththemeasuresofthesequencer.
(Seepage 158oftheParameterGuide.)
4. ToturnofftheRPPRfunction,unchecktheRPPR
checkbox.
Play RPPR while a song plays back

RPPRcanbeplayedinsynchronizationwiththe
playbackofasong.
PatternplaybackforakeywithaSyncsettingofSEQ
willsynchronizetotheplaybackofthesong.Startthe
songplayback,andthenpressthekey.Thepattern
playbackwillstartinsynchronizationwiththe
measuresofthesong.
SynchronizationwillbelostifyouusetheREW
( )orFF( )buttonswhileasongisplaying.
Note: IfyouwantRPPRpatternplaybacktobeginat
themomentthatsongplaybackbegins,itisagood
ideatoinsertanemptymeasurecontainingnomusical
databeforethesongplaybackbegins.
Note: Ifthesongisstopped,thepatternwill
synchronizetothetimingofthearpeggiator.
72
3. AccesstheP0:Play/RECProgramT0108page.
4. ChecktheRPPRcheckbox,andsetTrackSelect
toMIDITrack02.
IftheRPPRcheckboxisselected,theRPPRfunction
willbeturnedoneveninpagesandtabsotherthan
RPPRSetup,allowingyoutoperformwiththeRPPR
functionbypressingakeytowhichanRPPRis
assigned.
Note: InthenoterangeC#2andabove,keystowhich
nopatternhasbeenassignedcanbeplayedtosound
theprogramoftheMIDItrackselectedbyTrack
Select.
Creating an RPPR pattern Realtime-recording an RPPR performance
5. SinceyouwantthetracksyouplayviaRPPRand
thetrackyouplayfromthekeyboardtobe
recordedatthesametime,checktheMultiREC
checkbox.
Note: IfRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks,it
willnotbepossibletoselectMultiREC.Setthe
RecordingSetuptoOverwrite(seepage 60).
6. PresstheSEQUENCERREC()buttontoenter
recordreadymode.
7. Forthetracksyouwillberecording(MIDITrack1,
2),pressPlay/Rec/Mutetomakethemindicate
REC.
Makesurethatthetracksyourenotrecordingare
indicatedasPlayorMute.
8. PresstheLOCATE(
to001:01.000.
)buttontosetthelocation
)button,andthen
pressakeythatplaysanRPPRpattern.
ThenpressthekeywheretheRPPRpatternplaybackis
assigned.
IfthekeywheretheRPPRisassignedispressed
duringtheprecountbeforerecording,RPPRpattern
playbackwillstartthemomentthatrecordingbegins
aftertheprecount.
RecordtheRPPRpatternplaybackandkeyboard
performance.
Whenrecordingtheplaybackofpatternstriggered
byRPPR,thetimingoftherecordedeventsmaybe
slightlyskewed.Ifthisoccurs,trysettingREC
ResolutiontoasettingotherthanHi.
10. Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe
START/STOP(
)button.
Recordingwillend,andthesequencerwillreturnto
thelocationwhererecordingbegan.
Ifyoumadeamistakeduringyourperformanceor
wouldliketorerecord,youcanusetheCompare
function(presstheCOMPAREbutton)torerecordas
manytimesasyouwish.
11. Ifyouwanttorecordothertracks,uncheckthe
MultiREC(Seestep5)orRPPR(Seestep4)
checkboxesasnecessary.
73
Creating and playing a Cue List

Acuelistallowsyoutoplaymultiplesongsin
succession.Youcancreatetheindividualsectionsofa
song,suchastheintro,melodyA,melodyB,chorus,
andending,andthenuseaCueListtoassemblethese
sectionsintoasongbyspecifyingthedesiredorder
andthenumberofrepetitionsforeachsection.Youcan
theneditthecuelisttoefficientlytryoutdifferent
structuresforyoursong.
Youcanalsousethisasajukeboxfunctionthatwill
playbackcompletedsongsintheorderyouspecify.
Cue List
Step
Song
Repeat
01
S000: Intro
02
02
S001: A
02
03
S002: B
01
04
S003: Chorus
02
05
S001: A
02
S002: B
01
06
07
S003: Chorus
02
08
S001: A (Solo)
01
09
S003: Chorus
03
10
S004: Ending
02
Intro
Intro
Chorus
Chorus
Chorus
Chorus
A(Solo)
Chorus
Chorus
Chorus
Ending
Ending
3. SetthelaststeptoEnd.
IfyousetthistoContinuetoStep01,thecuelistwill
playbackrepeatedly.
4. InRepeat,specifythenumberoftimesthatthe
songforthatstepwillberepeated.Forthis
example,setStep02S001:VERSEto02.
5. Specifywhethereffectsettingswillalsobe
switchedwhenthesongateachstepisplayed
back.Ifyouwanteffectsettingstochange,check
theLoadFX?checkbox.
Forthisexample,checktheLoadFX?checkboxfor
Step01,whichloadstheeffects.
6. Toplaybackatthetempothatwasspecifiedfor
eachsong,setTempoModetoAuto.
IfthisissettoManu(Manual),playbackwillusethe
tempospecifiedby=.
Creating a cue list

Eachunitinacuelistiscalledastep,andeachstep
containsasongnumberandthenumberofrepeats.
Forexample,supposeyouvecreatedthesongsS000:
INTRO,S001:VERSE,andS002:CHORUS.Letsusea
cuelisttoconnectthesesongstogether.
1. AccesstheSeqP11:CueListpage.
Withthedefaultsettings,songS000willbeselectedfor
Step01,andEndwillbeselectedforStep02.
7. WhenyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
(
)buttonh,playbackwillbeginfromthe
stepthatisspecifiedastheCurrentStep.
Song Position Bar
2. AddasongtotheSteparea.
SelecttheSongforStep02,andpresstheInsert
button.Asongwillbeaddedtostep02.Pressthe
popupbutton,andthenchooseS001:VERSEfromthe
list.
Inthesameway,selecttheStep03Song,andpress
theInsertbuttontoaddasongtoStep03.Setthisto
S002:CHORUS.
74
Step:Thearrowwillindicatethestepthats
currentlyplaying. indicatesthecurrentlyselected
Step.TheSongPositionBarlocatedbelowthe
songnameshowstheprogressionofthesong
withinthestep.Whilestopped,youcanspecifythe
CurrentStepandthedisplaywillchange
accordingly.
M****:Indicatesthestartingmeasureofthatstep.
WhenyoupresstheCutbutton,theselectedstepwill
bedeletedandtemporarilysaved.Whenyoupressthe
Insertbutton,thesongthatwascutwillbeinsertatthe
selectedstep.
Meter:Indicatesthecurrentlyplayingtime
signature.Thiscannotbechanged.
IfyoupresstheCopybutton,theselectedstepwillbe
copied.IfyoupresstheInsertbutton,thecopiedstep
willbeinserted.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,theprogramofthe
trackselectedbyTrackSelectwillsound.Ifa
differentprogramisselectedforeachsong,the
Thenameofacuelistcanbespecifiedbythe
RenameCueListmenucommand.
Saving your song Converting a cue list to a song
programthatsspecifiedforthesongthats
currentlyplayingwillplay.
Converting a cue list to a song

TheConverttoSongmenucommandletsyouconvert
acuelisttoasinglesong.
Fordetails,pleaseseeConverttoSong(ConvertCue
ListtoSong)onpage 189oftheParameterGuide.
Saving your song

Inordertoensurethatthedatayoucreateis
reproducedfaithfully,werecommendthatyousave
yourdatabyusingSaveAllsothattheprogramswill
alsobesaved.Howeverifyouhavenotchangedthe
programnumbersorsoundsusedinyoursong,saving
onlythesongrelateddata(.SNG)willminimizethe
sizeofthedata.
Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermode
settings,therecordedsongs,andtheuserpattern
datawillbelost.
1. InsertanSDcardintheSDcardslot.
Withthecardlabelfacingupward,inserttheconnector
endofthecardintotheSDcardslotandpressitin
untilyouhearaclick.
Makesurethatthecardisorientedcorrectlywhen
youinsertit.Forcingitinthewrongdirectionmay
damagetheslotorthecard,andthedatamaybe
lost.
TheSaveSongsandCueListsDatadialogboxwill
appear.Ifyouwanttochangethename,adjustthe
appropriatesettings(seepage 117).
thedata.
Ifdataofthesamenamealreadyexists,asmessagewill
askwhetheryouwanttooverwritetheexistingdata.If
youwanttooverwritetheexistingdata,presstheOK
button.
Ifthesavedestinationdirectoryissomething
otherthanaDOSdirectory(e.g.,ifyoureina
directoryshownbyopeninga.PCGor.SNGfile),
amessagesuchasFile/pathnotfoundwill
appear,andyouwontbeabletosavethedata.If
thisoccurs,movetoMediamode,selectthe
appropriatesavedestination(i.e.,aDOS
directory),andthenexecuteSaveAllorSave
SEQ.
Saving a template song

Ifyouwanttheprograms,trackparameters,effect
settings,andarpeggiatorsettingsetc.usedbyasongto
besavedasaTemplatesong,usetheSaveTemplate
Songmenucommandtosavethesesettings.
75
76
Using Effects
An overview of the KROMEs effects
Youcanchoosefrom193differenttypesofhigh
qualitydigitaleffects.TheKROMEprovidesfiveinsert
effects,twomastereffects,andonetotaleffect,together
withamixersectionthatcontrolstheroutingofthese
effects.Allofthesearestereoin/out.
Specificparametersoftheseeffectscanalsobe
controlledinrealtimefromtheKROMEscontrollers
orviaMIDImessagesusingDynamicModulation
(Dmod),byMIDI/TempoSync,orbyusingacommon
LFOtoapplysynchronizedchangestomultiple
modulationeffects.
Total Effect
Thetotaleffect(TFX)isstereoin/stereoout.TheDry
(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dryparametersendsthe
stereoinputsounddirectlytothestereooutput.The
waythattheWet(processed)sideisoutputdependson
thetypeofeffect,asfollows.
Wet
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
Mono In - Stereo Out
Effect
Stereo In - Stereo Out
Effect
Effect
Note: TheParameterGuideincludesblockdiagrams
foreachindividualeffect,whichincludetheeffects
input/outputstructure.(Seepage 251oftheParameter
Guide)
Effect I/O
Insert Effects
InsertEffects(IFX15)arestereoin/stereoout.Ifyou
selectDry(unprocessed)fortheWet/Dryparameter,
thestereoinputsignalwillbeoutputinstereowithout
beingprocessedbytheeffect.IfyouselectWet(effect
applied),theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputinoneof
thefollowingways:
Wet
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Master Effects
MasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereoin/stereo
out.Send1andSend2determinethesendleveltothe
MasterEffects.
WithMastereffects,onlytheWet(processed)signal
willbeoutput.TheoutputsignalsfromtheMaster
EffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbuswiththeoutputlevel
specifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.Theseoutput
signalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfromthebus
specifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(P8Routing
pageineachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignals
fromthebusspecifiedbyBus(IFX/Output)Select(P8
InsertFXSetuppageineachmode)L/R,thenroutedto
thetotaleffect.
Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.The
processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowing
ways,accordingtothetypeofeffects.
Wet
Mono In - Mono Out
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
77
Using Effects
Effects in each mode

Program mode
Forprograms,youcanuseinserteffectstoprocessthe
finalsoundinthesamewaythatyouusetheFilter,
Driver,Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)toprocessthe
soundfromtheoscillators(OSC1&2).Next,the
mastereffectsareusedtocreateoverallambiencesuch
asreverb,andyouusethetotaleffecttomakefinal
adjustments.Youcanapplyaneffectinthesameway
totheoutputofadrumtrackprogram.Allofthese
settingscanbemadeindependentlyforeachprogram.
Combination and Sequencer modes

InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethe
trackEQandinserteffectstoprocessthesoundofeach
timbre/trackprogram.Thenyoucanusethemaster
effectstocreateoverallambience,andusethetotal
effecttomakefinaladjustments.
InCombinationmode,youcanadjustthesesettingsfor
eachcombination,andinSequencermodeyoucan
adjustthemforeachsong.
InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor
modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges,
sothateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffect
parameterswillbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesong
playsback.
Programmode
Oscillator1
Filter1
Driver1
Amplifier1
Oscillator2
Filter2
Driver2
Amplifier2
Send
EQ
Master Effect 1, 2
Return
Insert Effect 15
Total Effect
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Total Effect
OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
EQ
Drum Track
CombinationandSequencermodes
Send
78
Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1
EQ
Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16
EQ
Insert Effect 15
Master Effect 1, 2
Return
Routing effect settings Program Effects settings
Routing effect settings

Theinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffecthave
thesamestructureinallmodes,buttherouting
settingswilldeterminehowtheoscillatorsofa
programorthetimbresofacombinationortrackofa
songwillbesenttoeachinserteffect,mastereffector
totaleffect.Inthepagesthatfollow,wewillexplain
howyoucanadjustroutingsettingsandeffectsettings
ineachmode.
Insert effects
5. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetup
page.
Program Effects settings

Routing
1. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpage.
6. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor
eachinserteffectIFX15.
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,alleffectswillbe
displayed,organizedintotencategories.Usethepages
locatedtotheleftandrighttoselectacategory,and
chooseaneffectfromthedesiredcategoryonthe
display.
YoucanusetheCopyInsertEffectmenucommandto
copyeffectsettingsfromanotherprogrametc.Also,
youcanuseSwapInsertEffecttoexchange(for
example)IFX1andIFX5.
2. UseBus(IFX/Output)Selecttospecifythebus
wheretheoscillatoroutputwillbesent.Ifyou
wanttheoscillatoroutputtobeinputtoinsert
effect1,chooseIFX1.
L/R:Theoutputwillnotbesenttothetotaleffect.After
bypassingthetotaleffect,thesoundwillbesentto
AUDIOOUTPUTL/MONOandR.
IFX15:TheoutputwillbesenttoinserteffectIFX15.
Off:Choosethisifyouwantthesignaltobeconnected
inseriestothemastereffectsatthesendlevels
specifiedbySend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2).
3. OSCMFXSendspecifiesthesendlevelfromeach
oscillatortothemastereffects.
ThiscanbesetonlywhenBus(IFX/Output)Selectis
eitherL/RorOff.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thesend
leveltothemastereffectsissetbySend1andSend2
(InsertFXSetuppage)afterthesignalpassesthrough
theinserteffects.
4. FXControlBussendstheoutputofoscillator1and
2totheFXControlbus.Usethisifyouwantthe
audioinputtotheeffecttobecontrolledbya
differentsound.
YoucanusethetwoFXControlbusestocontroleffects
freely.Fordetails,pleaseseeFXControlBuseson
7. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert
effect.
Eachtimeyoupressthisbutton,theinserteffectwill
toggleon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethesameas
when000:NoEffectisselected;thesoundwillbe
outputwithoutbeingprocessedbytheinserteffect.
8. MakeChainsettings.
IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffectwill
beconnectedinseries.Sincetheoutputoftheoscillator
isbeingsenttoIFX1instep2,adjustingsettingsas
showninthediagramabovestep6,wouldconnectall
fiveinsertioneffectsIFX1IFX2IFX3inseries,so
thattheseeffectswouldbeinsertedintotheoutputof
theoscillator.
9. AdjustsettingsforPan:#8,Bus(BusSelect),Send
1,Send2andFXCtrlforthesoundafterithas
passedthroughtheinserteffects.
Ifyouvespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollowthe
lastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptforFXCtrl).
Pan:#8:SetsthepanoftheIFXoutput.
Bus(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutputdestination.
NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.
Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster
effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127.
FXControlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate
effectssidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolan
effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whilethe
effectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal.
Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders,compressors
andlimiters,gates,etc.Fordetails,pleaseseeFX
ControlBusesonpage 238oftheParameterGuide.
79
Using Effects
10. AccesstheP8:Routing/IFXInsertFXSetuppage,
andedittheparametersoftheinserteffectyou
selected.
PresstheIFX15tabsandedittheparameters.
Effect Parameters
Effect On/Off
P (Effect Preset)
Master effects
11. Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaresetby
theSend1,2levels(step3or9).IfSend1,2are
zero,themastereffectswillnotapply.Send1
correspondstoMFX1,andSend2correspondsto
MFX2.
12. AccesstheProgP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Wet/Dry
Effect1On/Off:Turnstheinserteffecton/off.Thisis
linkedwiththeon/offsettingontheInsertFXSetup
page.
P(EffectPreset):Selectsaneffectpreset.TheKROMEs
internalmemorycontainseffectpresetswhichare
parametersettingsforeacheffectfrom001:Stereo
Compressorthrough193:EarlyReflections.
Effectparametersyoueditaresavedaspartofeach
program,buteffectpresetsallowyoutosaveandrecall
yourfavoriteparametersettingsforeacheffect.If
youvecomeupwithaneffectsettingyoulike,usethe
menucommandWriteFXPresettosaveitasapreset
sothatyoucaneasilyrecallitinadifferentprogramor
mode.
Fordetailsontheparametersofeacheffect,see
page 251andfollowingintheParameterGuide.
Double-size effects
Doublesizeeffects(172:St.MltbandLimiter193:
EarlyReflections)usetwiceasmuchspaceasother
effects.
YoucanusedoublesizeeffectsforinserteffectsIFX1
IFX4andmastereffectMFX1.However,becauseit
takesuptwounitsofeffectspower,thenextnumbered
effectwillbeunavailable.Forexample,ifyouve
selectedadoublesizeeffectforIFX1,youwontbeable
touseIFX2.Ifyouveselectedadoublesizeeffectfor
MFX1,youwontbeabletouseMFX2.
AnexampleofwhenadoublesizeeffectisselectedforIFX1
andIFX4
13. InMFX1andMFX2,selectthetypeofeachmaster
effect.
Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectinganinsert
effect(seestep6).
Note: Youcanonlyselectadoublesizeeffectfor
MFX1.Fordetails,pleaseseeDoublesizeeffects,
above.
14. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnonthemaster
effect.
Eachtimeyoupressthisbutton,themastereffectwill
toggleon/off.WhenOff,theoutputofthemastereffect
willbemuted.
15. UseReturn1andReturn2toadjusttheoutput
levelsofthemastereffects.
Note: Foreacheffect,theWetvalueoftheWet/Dry
parameteristheoutputleveloftheeffect.Thereturn
valueismultipliedwiththis(Return=127willbe
x1.0)todeterminetheactualoutputlevelofthemaster
effect.
16. SelecttheMFX1andMFX2pages,andsetthe
parametersforeachselectedeffect.
FordetailsontheProgramEffectssettingsstep10.
Total Effect
17. IfyouuseBus(IFX/Output)SelecttochooseL/R
astheoscillatoroutput,orifyousetthepostIFX
BustoL/R,thesignalwillbeinputtothetotal
effect.
Theoutputfromthemastereffectisinputtothetotal
effectviatheReturn1andReturn2settingsoftheProg
P9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
Afterbeingprocessedthroughthetotaleffect,the
signalisoutputfromtheAUDIOOUTPUTL/MONO
andRoutputs.
18. AccesstheProgP9:MFX/TFX/LFORoutingpage.
19. ChoosethedesiredtotaleffectforTFX.The
procedureisthesameaswhenselectinganinsert
effect.(Seestep6)
Youcantuseadoublesizeeffectasthetotaleffect.
Fordetails,pleaseseeDoublesizeeffects,above.
80
Routing effect settings Using effects in Combinations and Songs
20. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnthetotaleffecton.
Thetotaleffectwilltoggleon/offeachtimeyoupress
thebutton.IfthisisOff,theresultwillbethesameasif
000:NoEffectisselected.Theinputsoundwillbe
outputwithoutbeingprocessedbythetotaleffect.
21. AccesstheTFXpage,andedittheparametersof
eacheffecttoadjustthefinalsoundasdesired.
FordetailsontheProgramEffectssettings,seestep
10.
Using effects in Combinations

and Songs
InCombination,andSequencermodes,youcan
specifytheroutingofeachtimbre/tracktotheinsert
effects,mastereffectsandtotaleffect.Thesesettings
areadjustedinthesamewayineachofthesemodes.
WewillbeusingtheexampleofCombinationmodein
ourexplanationhere.
4. PresstheFXControl18tabstoaccesstheFX
ControlT0108pages.
Bus(IFX/Output)SelectisthesameasintheRouting
T0108page.Youcansetitfromeitherpage.
FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbretoanFX
Controlbus.Usethiswhenyouwanttheaudioinput
toaneffecttobecontrolledbyanothersound.There
aretwoFXControlbuses,whichgivesyouagreatdeal
offreedomforcontrollingeffectsfreely.Fordetails,
pleaseseeFXControlBusesonpage 238ofthe
ParameterGuide.
Insert effects
5. AccesstheCombiP8:Routing/IFXInsertFX
Setuppage.
Routing
1. AccesstheCombiP8:Routing/IFXRoutingT01
08page.
6. SelectaninserteffectinIFX15andeditthe
settings.
7. AccesstheIFX15pagestoedittheindividual
effectparameters.
Thesesettingscanbeadjustedinthesameway.(See
page 79.)
2. UseBus(IFX/Output)Selecttospecifythebus
whereeachtimbrewillbeoutput.ChooseIFX1if
youwanttosendtheoutputofatimbretoinsert
effect1.
Therouting,inserteffects,andchainsettingsare
showngraphicallyontheupperpartofthepage.In
thisexample,T01(timbre1)usesIFX1and2.T02uses
IFX2,T03usesIFX3and4,T02andT05useIFX4,and
T06andT07useIFX5.
3. UseSend1andSend2tospecifythesendlevelof
eachtimbretothemastereffects.
ThiscanbesetonlyifBus(IFX/Output)Selectissetto
L/RorOff.
YoucanuseMIDItocontroldynamicmodulation
(Dmod)foreacheffect,thepostIFXpan(CC#8),
andSend1andSend2levels.
Anasterisk*isshownattherightofCh01Ch16
forthechannelnumberoftracksroutedtoIFX.If
youveroutedmultipletracksthathavedifferent
MIDIchannelsettings,thisspecifiesthechannel
onwhichtheywillbecontrolled.
Master effects and Total effect

Thesesettingscanbeadjustedinthesamewayason
page 80.
YoucancontroltheseeffectsviaMIDIontheCtrl
Ch.ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillcontrol
dynamicmodulation(Dmod)fortheMasterand
TotalEffect.
Note: Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby
multiplyingthisbytheSend1orSend2settingsfor
oscillators1and2withintheprogramselectedbythe
timbre.IftheprogramparameterSend1orSend2is
setto0,theresultinglevelwillstillbe0evenifyou
raisethissendlevel.
IfBus(IFX/Output)SelectissettoIFX15,thesend
levelstothemastereffectsaresetbySend1andSend2
(InsertFXSetuppage)followingtheinserteffects.
81
Using Effects
Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO

Dynamic modulation (Dmod)
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)letsyouuseMIDI
messagesortheKROMEscontrollerstomodulate
specificeffectparametersinrealtime.
Dynamic modulation to control an effect parameter in realtime

Asanexample,letssetupdynamicmodulationto
controlaneffectparameterinrealtime.
1. AsdescribedintheprocedureforProgram
Effectssettingsonpage 79,setIFX1to078:L/C/R
BPMDelay.Verifythatyourehearingadelay
effect.
2. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFXIFX1page.
Now, we can set the Dmod to change the delay

level via the Joystick
Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfand
presstheSW1button,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease,
andthedelaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime.
TheAmtsettingspecifiesthefeedbacklevelthatwill
beineffectwhentheSW1buttonispressed.IfAmtis
setto10,pressingtheSW1buttonwillreducethe
feedbacklevelto0.
Finally, we can use the MIDI/Tempo Sync

function to synchronize the delay time to the
arpeggiator tempo.
6. SetBPMtoMIDI.
7. ForL,C,andR,settheDelayBaseNoteandTimes
asdesired.
Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNoteto andTimes
tox1sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable.
Thedelaytimewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote.
3. SetInputLevelDmodto+100.
4. SetSourcetoJS+Y:#01.
Thedelaysoundwilldisappear.
Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythe
joystick.Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourself,
thedelaysoundwillgraduallyincrease.
8. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill
change.
Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand)
presstheSW1button,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,and
thedelayswillbecomelonger.
9. WhenyouturnontheARPbutton,arpeggiator
willbeginplaying.
In addition, we can use Dmod to change the feedback level via SW1
5. IntheP1:Basic/ControllersControllersSetup
page,settheSW1functiontoSW1Mod.CC#80,
andtheModetoToggle.
ChooseP8:Routing/IFXIFX1page.SettheFeedback
SrctoSW1:#80,andsetAmtto+30.
Selectanydesiredarpeggiator.Whenyourotatethe
TEMPOknob,thedelaytimewillchangein
synchronizationwiththechangingtempoofthe
arpeggiator.
Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmay
hearsomeunexpectednoiseifyouchangethe
tempowhilethedelayissounding.Thisisbecause
thedelaysoundbecomesdiscontinuous,andisnot
amalfunction.
Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO
frequencytothetempo.Settheeffectparameters
MIDISynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.Fordetails,
pleaseseepage 236oftheParameterGuide.
82
Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO Common FX LFO
Common FX LFO
TwoCommonFXLFOsareavailableformodulation
effects,suchaschoruses,filters,phasers,etc.Normally,
thephaseoftheLFOsofmultiplemodulationtype
effectswillnotbesynchronizedevenifyousetthemto
theidenticalFrequency,sincetheLFOsarebeing
generatedindependently.
However,ifyouselectCommon1orCommon2forthe
LFOTypeparameterofamodulationtypeeffect,the
effectwillusetheoneofthecommonLFOsinsteadof
itsownindividualLFO.Thisallowsyoutouseasingle
CommonFXLFOtocontroltwoormoremodulation
typeeffectssuchasflanger,phaser,orautopanwith
thesamephase.Sinceyoucanmakeindependent
settingsforLFOwaveformandphaseoffsetforeach
effect,youarefreetocreatecomplexcombinationsof
effects.
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1
Common FX LFO1
Frequency[Hz]
Reset
Stereo Flanger
Waveform = Triangle
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Generate original LFO waveform
Stereo Phaser
Waveform = Sine
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]
Stereo Auto Pan

Waveform = Sine
Phase Offset = +90 [deg]
83
Using Effects
84
Arpeggiator function
Using the arpeggiator while you play
Thearpeggiatorisafunctionthatautomatically
generatesarpeggios(patternsofindividualnotes
derivedfromachord).Mostarpeggiatorsproducean
arpeggiowhenyouplayachordonthekeyboard.
Arpeggiator on/off
EachtimeyoupresstheARPbutton,the
arpeggiatorwillbeswitchedon/off.
Whenthearpeggiatoristurnedon(theLEDwilllight
up)andtheselectedarpeggiopatternwillbeginwhen
youplaythekeyboard.
The chord you played on

the keyboard is sounded as
an arpeggio (broken chord)
TheKROMEsarpeggiatorisalsopolyphonic,andcan
produceavarietyofchordaltransformationsor
phrasesbasedonthepitchortimingofthenotesyou
playonthekeyboard.Thesefunctionsletyouusethe
arpeggiatortoplayawiderangeofpatternsincluding
drumorbassphrases,andguitarorkeyboardbacking
riffs.Itisalsoeffectivetousethearpeggiatoraspartof
thesounddesignprocesswhencreatingsubtly
movingpads,synthsounds,orsoundeffects.
TheKROMEsDualArpeggiatorfeatureletsyouuse
twosimultaneousarpeggiopatternsinCombination
mode,andSequencermode.Youcantakeadvantageof
thisinmanyways,includingaseparatearpeggio
patternforadrumprogram,andanotherappliedtoa
bassprogram,orusingakeyboardsplitorvelocityto
switchbetweentwoarpeggiopatterns.
TheKROMEprovidesfivepresetarpeggiopatterns:
thestandardUP,DOWN,ALT1,ALT2,and
RANDOM.Youcanalsocreateandstore1,028ofyour
ownuserpatterns.Thefactorysettingscontainawide
varietyofarpeggiopatternsstoredintheseuser
locations(seepage 211oftheParameterGuide).
Using the arpeggiator in

Program mode
1. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgrammode,
andselectaprogram.Fordetails,pleasesee
SelectingProgramsonpage 21.
2. PressARPbutton(theLEDwilllight)toturnon
thearpeggiator.Arpeggioswillbeginsounding
whenyouplaythekeyboard.
Note: Theon/offstatusissavedwhenyouwriteeach
program.
InCombinationandSongmodes,thearpeggios
maynotstartwhenyoupresstheARPbutton
dependingonthesavedsettings.Youmayneedto
playakeyboard(seepage 90).
Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo

RotatetheTEMPOknoborTAPbutton
toadjustthetempo.
The =displayintheupperrightof
theLCDwillchange.Thetempocanbe
adjustedoverarangeof40.00300.00
bpm.TheLEDwillblinkintimewith
thespecifiedtempo.
AsanalternativetousingtheTEMPO
knoborTAPbutton,youcanalsosetthe
tempobyselecting=inthedisplay,
usingthenumerickeys09toenterthetempo,and
pressingtheENTERbutton.Youcanalsosetthe
tempobyusingtheVALUEcontrollers.TheLED
willblinkinsynchronizationwiththetempoyou
specify.
Note: Thetemposettingisalsosavedwhenyouwritea
program.
Note: Thearpeggioplaybackspeedisaffectedbythe
Resosetting(ProgP0:PlayArpeggiatorpage),or
Resolution(P7:ARP/DTARPSetuppage).
IftheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpageMIDI
ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,External
USB,orsettoAutoandMIDIClockmessagesare
beingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate =EXT,
meaningthattheKROMEissynchronizedtoan
externalMIDIdevice.Inthiscase,youwontbe
abletochangethetempobyusingtheKROME.
3. AsdescribedinthefollowingsectionsUsing
knobs14tocontrolthearpeggiatorand
Selectinganarpeggiopatternandspecifyingits
function,movethecontrollersormodifythe
parameterstochangethewaythatthearpeggios
areplayed.
85
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthe
patternlength(Length)byhalf.Turningtheknob
towardtherightwillshortentheintervalofthe
arpeggiatednotes(Resolution)byhalf.Whenthe
knobisinthecenterposition(12oclock),thepat
ternwillbeasspecifiedbytheparametersLength
andResolution(GlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern
Setuppage).
Using knobs 14 to control the

arpeggiator
Youcancontrolthearpeggiatorbypressingthe
SELECTbuttontoselectARPandthenturning
knobs14.
IfthearpeggiopatternselectedbyPat(Pattern
Select)isoneofthepresetarpeggiopatternsP0
P4,turningtheknobswillnotproduceany
change.Theseadjustmentsareavailableonlyifa
userarpeggiopatternU0000(INT)U1027(USER)
isselected.
Note: Thestateoftheknobsissavedwhenyouwrite
theprogram.
Adjusting the duration of the arpeggiated

notes
Turnknob1toadjustthedurationofthe
arpeggiatednotes.
Rotatingtheknobtowardtheleftwillshortenthe
durationofthenotes,androtatingittowardthe
rightwilllengthenthedurationofthenotes.Atthe
centerposition(12oclock),thenotelengthwillbe
asspecifiedbytheprogramparameter:Gate(Prog
P7:ARP/DTARPSetuppage).
Note: Theknobsettingissavedwhenyouwriteeach
program.
Note: Dependingontheprogramthatsselected,using
knob4maynotproduceanyeffect.
Selecting an arpeggio pattern and

specifying its function
IntheProgP0:PlayArpeggiatorpageyoucanselect
anarpeggiopatternandspecifyhowthearpeggiator
willfunction.
InProgP0:Play,presstheARPtabtoaccessthe
ProgP0:PlayArpeggiatorpage.
Note: ItiseffectivetousetheSELECTbuttontoselect
TONE,andthenadjustknob4(RELEASE).
Changing the dynamics of the arpeggiated

notes
Turnknob2toadjustthedynamicsofthe
arpeggiatednotes.
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillmakethe
notessofter,andturningittowardtherightwill
makethenotesstronger.Whentheknobisinthe
centerposition(12oclock),thevalueofthepro
gramparameterVelocity(ProgP7:ARP/DTArp
Setuppage)willbeused.
Note: Thestateoftheknobissavedwhenyouwrite
theprogram.
Note: ItiseffectivetousetheSELECTbuttontoselect
TONE,andthenadjustknobs1(CUTOFF),2
(RESONANCE),and3(EGINT).
Adding a shuffle feel to the arpeggio pattern

Ifyouturnknob3,thetimingofthearpeggiated
notesonevennumberedbeatswillbeshifted
forwardorbackward.
Turningtheknobtowardtheleftwillspeedupthe
timingoftheevennumberedbeats.Whentheknob
isinthecenterposition(12oclock),thetimingwill
beasspecifiedbytheprogramparameterSwing
(GlobalP6:ArpeggioPatternSetuppage).
Changing the number of steps in the

arpeggio pattern
Byturningknob4(STEP),youcanchangethe
numberofstepsinthearpeggiopattern.
86
Selecting an arpeggio pattern

Anarpeggiopatterncanbeselectedfrompreset
arpeggiopatternsP0P4anduserarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)U1027(USER).Thefactorysettings
U0000(INT)U0899(INT),U0900(USER)U1027(USER)
containawidevarietyofpreloadeduserarpeggio
patterns.
ChoosePattern,andusetheVALUEdial,INC/DEC
buttons,andpopupmenutoselectanarpeggio
pattern.
Userarpeggiopatternscanalsobeselectedbyusing
thenumerickeys09toinputthepatternnumber
andthenpressingtheENTERbutton.
P0: UP
UP
Using the arpeggiator while you play Using the arpeggiator in Program mode
P1: DOWN
DOWN
P2: ALT1
ALT1
Sounding an arpeggio in the order of the

pitches in the chord you played
Youcanselectwhetherthenotesofthearpeggiowill
besoundedintheorderofthepitchesinthechordyou
played(regardlessoftheorderinwhichyouactually
playedthenotes),orintheorderinwhichyouplayed
thenotes.
PresstheSortcheckboxinthedisplaytomake
thissetting.
Checked:thearpeggiowillplayeachnoteinthe
orderofitspitch,regardlessoftheorderinwhich
youactuallyplayedthenotes.
Unchecked:thearpeggiowilltriggereachnotein
theorderinwhichyouactuallyplayedthenotes.
Sort
P3: ALT2
OFF, UP
ALT2
Sort
ON, UP
P4: RANDOM
RANDOM
Setting the arpeggio to continue playing

even after you have taken your hand off the
keyboard
Youcanselectwhetherthearpeggiowillcontinue
playingwhenyoutakeyourhandoffthekeyboard,or
whetherthearpeggiowillstop.
Changing the note value of the arpeggiated

notes
TheResolutionparameterletsyousetthenotevalue
ofthearpeggiatednotes,overarangefrom 3 .
PressResolution,andusetheVALUEdial,INC/
DECbuttons,orpopupmenutoselectthedesired
arpeggionotevalue.
Selecting the octave range where the

arpeggio is sounded
UsetheOctaveradiobuttonstospecifytherangeof
octaveswherethearpeggiowillplay.
PressanOctaveradiobuttontomakeyour
selection.
Octave: 4
UP
PresstheLatchcheckboxtomakethissetting.
Checked:Thearpeggiowillcontinueplayingeven
afteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
Unchecked:Thearpeggiowillstopplayingwhen
youremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.
Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your

keyboard timing
Youcanspecifywhetherthearpeggiowillbeginatthe
momentyouplaythekeyboard,orwhetheritwill
alwaysplayinsynchronizationtotheMIDIclock
tempo.
PresstheKeySync.checkboxtomakethis
setting.
Checked:Thearpeggiopatternwillstartfromthe
beginningwhenyoupressakey.Thissettingissuit
ablewhenyouwantthearpeggiotostartfromthe
beginningofthemeasureasyouareplayinginreal
time.
Unchecked:Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe
MIDIclocktiming.
Sounding both the arpeggio notes and the

notes you play
PresstheKeyboardcheckboxtoadjustthis
setting.
Checked:Thenotesyouplayonthekeyboardand
thenotesplayedbythearpeggiatorwillbothbe
heard.
87
Unchecked:Onlythearpeggiatednoteswillsound.
Using the arpeggiator in

Combination mode
InCombinationmodetheKROMEprovidesdual
arpeggiators,allowingyoutoruntwoarpeggio
patternssimultaneously.
1. InCombinationmode,selectacombination(see
SelectingCombinationsonpage 43).
Asyouselectvariouscombinations,youllnoticethat
theARPbuttonLEDwilllightupforsome
combinations(seeLinkingthearpeggiatorto
programsorcombinationsonpage 91).
Changing the duration of the arpeggiated

notes
TheP7:ARP/DTARPSetupGateparameterspecifies
thedurationofthearpeggiatednotes.Withasettingof
000100(%),thedurationwillalwaysbethespecified
gatetime.Stepisavailableifyouveselected
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)asthePattern;thegate
valuespecifiedforeachstepwillbeused.
Youcanalsocontrolthisbyusingthearpeggiocontrol
(ARP)GATEknob(seepage 86).
Specifying the arpeggio patterns velocity

and other settings
InP7:ARP/DTARPSetup,theVelocityparameter
specifiesthevelocityofthearpeggiatednotes.Ifyou
chooseavalueintherangeof001127,thatvelocity
valuewillalwaysbeused.IfyouchooseKey,the
velocityvalueofhowyouplayedthekeywillbeused.
StepisavailableifPatternissettoU0000(INT)
U1027(USER);thiscausesthevelocityvaluespecified
foreachsteptobeused.
Swingoffsetsthetimingofarpeggiatednotesthat
areevennumbered(countingfromthebeginning).
VelocityandSwingcanbecontrolledbyknobs2
and3respectivelywhenSELECTissettoARP.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thearpeggiatorwill
start.Evenforothercombinations,youcanturnthe
arpeggiatoronbypressingtheARPbutton(theLED
willlightup).
2. Listentohowthearpeggiocanbemodifiedas
describedintheUsingknobs14tocontrolthe
arpeggiator(above)andSelectinganarpeggio
patternandspecifyingitsfunctionsections
(below).
TheARPbutton,TEMPOknob,TAPbutton,and
controlsurfaceARPwillapplytoboth
arpeggiatorsAandB.Theirstateissavedwhen
thecombinationiswritten.
Selecting an arpeggio pattern and

adjusting settings
IntheCombiP0:PlayArpeggiatorpageyoucan
selectanarpeggiopatternandspecifyhowthe
arpeggiatorwillfunction.
InCombiP0:Play,presstheARPAtabortheARP
BtabtoselecttheCombiP0:PlayArpeggiatorA
orBpage.
Arpeggiator Run
Timbre Assign
Specifying the zone where the arpeggiator

will function
InP7:ARP/DTARPScanZoneyoucanspecifythe
rangeofnotes(keys)andvelocitieswherethe
arpeggiatorwillfunction.
Select the arpeggiator(s) that will run

UsetheArpeggiatorRuncheckboxestospecifythe
arpeggiator(s)thatyouwanttohaverunning.The
arpeggiator(s)thatarecheckedherewillrunwhenthe
ARPbuttonison.However,thearpeggiatorwillonly
playatimbreifthetablenexttothecheckboxes
assignsarpeggiatorAorBtoatimbre:T116.You
changethesesettingsinCombiP7:ARP/DTARP
SetupT0108,T0916pageArpeggiatorAssign(see
page 90).
88
Using the arpeggiator while you play Arpeggiator settings in Combination and Sequencer modes
Arpeggiator-A, Arpeggiator-B
ForeacharpeggiatorAandB,youcanadjustsettings
forPattern(Select),Resolution,Octave,Sort,Latch,
KeySync,andKeyboard(seepage 86).
Checking the structure of a user arpeggio

pattern
LetsseehowthecombinationA005:BoomPowPad
(category:LeadSplits)isconstructed.
SelectcombinationA005:BoomPowPad
(category:LeadSplits),andlookattheArpeggio
PlayApageandArpeggioPlayBpage.
Thedrumprogramsoftimbres14usethesame
arpeggiatorApattern,butsincethenotessounded
byeachtimbrearedividedbykeyzone,eachwill
playonlyaportionofthearpeggiatorpattern.Goto
theP0:PlayProgramT0108pageandtrymuting
eachtimbre14toheartheresult.Youcanadd
varietybyusingdifferentcombinationsoftimbres.
Arpeggiator settings in
Combination and Sequencer
modes
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanuseuse
twoarpeggiopatternssimultaneously,thankstothe
KROMEsdualarpeggiatorfunctionality.Thesettings
ineachofthesemodesareadjustedinasimilarway.
Thefollowingexampleshowshowtoadjustsettingsin
Combinationmode.
Thedualarpeggiatorfunctionalityletsyoudothe
followingthings.
Assignanarpeggiatorforeachtimbre.Choosefrom
Off,(arpeggiator)A,or(arpeggiator)B.step5
InTimbreAssignyoullseethatarpeggiatorAis
assignedtotimbres15,andarpeggiatorBis
assignedtotimbres6and7.
Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thedrumprogramsof
timbres14willbesoundedbythearpeggiopattern
ofarpeggiatorA.(Timbre5isadummyprogram
usedtoplaytimbres14.Seepage 91.)
ArpeggiatorBwillsoundtheprogramsoftimbres6
and7.
IfyouuncheckArpeggiatorRunAorArpeggiator
RunB,itwillstop.
IndependentlyspecifywhetherAandBwill
function.step6
Selectanarpeggiopatternandsetparameters
independentlyforAandB.step7
MakeScanZonepagesettingssothatyoucanuse
keyboardrangeorplayingvelocitytoswitch
betweennormalplayingandarpeggiatedplaying,
ortoswitchbetweenarpeggiatorsAandB.step8
Makesettingsfortimbresthatwillbesilentwhen
thearpeggiatorisOff,andwillsoundonlywhen
thearpeggiatorisOn.step10
Ifyoucheckitonceagainandplaythekeyboard,
thatarpeggiatorwillbeginrunning.
WhenyouaccesstheCombiP7:ARP/DTARP
ScanZonepage,youllseethattheBTopKey
andBottomKeyparametersaresetsothat
arpeggiatorBwillrunonlyforthenotesB3and
below.ArpeggiatorAissettorunforanykey.
89
7. OntheArpeggiatorAandArpeggiatorBpages,set
theparametersforarpeggiatorsAandB.
1. SelectCombiP0:PlayProgramT0108page.
TheparametersforAandBarethesameasfora
program(seepage 86).
Selectprogramsforthetimbresthatyouwishtouse.
Forthisexample,selectanydesiredprogramfor
timbres14.
8. IntheScanZoneA/Bpage,specifytherangein
whicharpeggiatorsAandBwillfunction.
2. SelectCombiP3:TimbreParameters,MIDIT0108
page.
TheparametersforAandBarethesameasfora
program.
Forthetimbresthatyouwillbeusing,setStatusto
INT,andsetMIDIChanneltoGchortotheglobal
MIDIchannel(setinGlobalP1:MIDIBasicMIDI
Channel).
Youcanusekeyboardrangesorvelocityrangestouse
oneorbothofthearpeggiators,ortoswitchbetween
arpeggiatorsAandB.ByusingtheCombiP4:Zone/
DelayKeyZoneT0108T0916page,andVelZone
T0108T0916pagetosetkeyboardandvelocity
rangesinconjunctionwitheachother,youcancreate
evenmorevariations.
Forthisexample,settimbres14toaStatusofINT,
andtimbres58toaStatusofOff.SettheMIDI
Channeloftimbres14toGch.
9. Ifyouwishtosavetheeditedcombination
settingsininternalmemory,turnoffmemory
protectinGlobalmode,andwritethecombination
(seepage 115andpage 117).
10. TheStatus,MIDIChannelandAssign
settingsshowninthedisplayofsteps2and3can
bemadesothatcertaintimbreswillsoundonly
whenthearpeggiatorisOn,andwillbesilent
whenthearpeggiatorisOff.
Combination A001: Bossa Rose (SW1/2)

(Category: Keyboard)
3. SelectCombiP7:ARP/DTARPSetupT0108
page.
Althoughthisisasomewhatsophisticatedediting
technique,wewilldescribethesettingsofoneofthe
presetcombinationsasanexample.
Whenyouplayaspecificregionofthekeyboard,this
combinessettingsthatcausethearpeggiatortoplayan
arpeggiousingdifferentsoundsthanwhatsbeing
playedbythekeyboard,withothersettingsthatcause
thearpeggiatorsoundstoremaincompletelyunplayed
whenthearpeggiatorisoff.
Beforeyouplay,makesurethattheglobalMIDI
channel(GlobalP1:MIDIBasicMIDIChannel)isset
to01.
SelectcombinationA001:BossaRose(SW1/2),turnthe
ARPbuttonon,andplay.
4. Set(Temp)tospecifythetempo.
Thisisthesameasforaprogram.However,thetempo
issharedbybotharpeggiatorsAandB.
5. MakeArpeggiatorAssignsettings.
AssignarpeggiatorAorBtothedesiredtimbres.Each
timbrewillbeplayedbythearpeggiatorthathasbeen
assignedtoit.
6. MakeArpeggiatorRunsettings.
Checkthearpeggiator(s)thatyouwanttorun.The
arpeggiator(s)checkedherewillrunwhentheARP
buttonisturnedon.
Withthesettingsshowninthedisplayforsteps2and
3,turningtheARPbuttononwillcausearpeggiatorA
torunfortimbres1and2,andarpeggiatorBtorunfor
timbre3.WhentheARPbuttonisturnedoff,timbres
14willsoundasalayer.
IfalltimbresAssignstatusaresettoOff,orif
ArpeggiatorRunAorBisunchecked,thearpeggiator
willnotfunction.
90
ArpeggiatorAisassignedtotimbre2and16.When
youplaythekeyboard,thebassriffarpeggio
patternwillsoundthetimbre2program.
TheABottomKeyandTopKey(CombiP7:ARP/
DTARPScanZonepage)aresetsothat
arpeggiatorAwillfunctiononlyfornotesB3and
lower.
ArpeggiatorAisalsoassignedtotimbre16,butthis
issothatthetimbre2programwillsoundonly
whenthearpeggiatorison.
Noticethetimbresettingsfortimbre2and16.
Timbre
Status
MIDI Channel
Assign
INT
02
16
Off
Gch
Ifthearpeggiatorisoff,playingthekeyboardwill
soundthetimbre(s)thataresettoGchortothe
globalMIDIchannel(inthiscase,01).Sincethe
MIDIChanneloftimbre2issetto02,itwillnot
sound.Timbre16issettoGch,butsinceStatusis
Offitwillnotsound.
Using the arpeggiator while you play Linking the arpeggiator to programs or combinations
NotesfromanyMIDIchannelthatisassignedtoa
timbrewilltriggerthearpeggiator.Inthiscase,
thesewillbeMIDIChannel02andGch(global
MIDIchannel).Whenthearpeggiatorison,playing
thekeyboardwilltriggerarpeggiatorA,whichis
assignedtotimbre16(Gch).Timbre2willbe
soundedbyarpeggiatorA.SincetheStatusof
timbre16isOff,itwillnotsound.
SincetheStatusoftimbre16isOff,itwillnot
sound,regardlessofwhetherthearpeggiatorison
oroff.Itisadummytimbrethatcausestimbre2to
soundonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.
Combination A005: Boom Pow Pad

(Category: Synth)
Beforeyouplay,makesurethattheglobalMIDI
channel(GlobalP1:MIDIBasicMIDIChannel)isset
to01.
SelectcombinationA005:BoomPowPad,turntheARP
buttonon,andplay.
ArpeggiatorAisassignedtotimbres15,and
arpeggiatorBisassignedtotimbres6and7.When
youpressanynoteoftheentirekeyboard,thedrum
programsoftimbres14willbesoundedbythe
arpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorA.Whenyouplay
theB3oralowernoteonthekeyboard,thesynth
programsoftimbres6and7willbesoundedbythe
backingarpeggiopattern.
ThearpeggiatorAparametersBottomKeyand
TopKey(CombiP7:ARP/DTARPScanZone
page)aresetsothatarpeggiatorAwillrunforthe
entirekeyboard.
TheBBottomKeyandTopKey(CombiP7:ARP/
DTARPScanZonepage)aresetsothat
arpeggiatorsBwillfunctiononlyforthenoteB3
andbelow.
ArpeggiatorAisassignedtotimbre5aswell,but
thissettingissothatthetimbre1to4programwill
soundonlywhenthearpeggiatorison.Refertothe
precedingsectionCombinationBossaRose(SW1/
2).
Linking the arpeggiator to

programs or combinations
Youcanspecifywhetherthearpeggiatorsettings
writtentoaprogramorcombinationwillberecalled
whenyouswitchprogramsorcombinations,or
whetherthecurrentarpeggiatorsettingswillbe
maintained.
Creating a user arpeggio

pattern
About user arpeggio patterns
ThepatternsthatcanbeselectedontheKROMEs
arpeggiatorarecalledarpeggiopatterns.Thereare
twotypesofarpeggiopatterns:presetarpeggio
patternsanduserarpeggiopatterns.
Presetarpeggiopatterns:
Therearefivepatterns;UP,DOWN,ALT1,ALT2,and
RANDOM.
Thefunctionalityofthesepatternsisfixed,andcannot
beedited.
Userarpeggiopatterns:
Thereare1028patternsU0000(INT)U1027(USER)
whichcandevelopchordsorphrasesinawidevariety
ofways,basedonthepitchesthatyouplayonthe
keyboardorthetimingwithwhichyouplaythem.
InGlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern,Setupyoucanmodify
theseuserarpeggiopatterns,orcreateanewuser
arpeggiopatternfromaninitializedcondition.Edited
userarpeggiopatternscanbewrittentointernal
memoryareasU0000(INT)U1027(USER)(see
page 221oftheParameterGuide).
InMediamode,youcanalsosaveuserarpeggio
patternstomedia.
Editing a user arpeggio pattern

Ifyouwanttoeditauserarpeggiopattern,you
mustfirstmakesurethatmemoryprotectis
unchecked.(Seepage 197oftheParameterGuide)
IfyouenterthismodefromtheProgrammode,your
editingwillapplytothearpeggiopatternspecifiedfor
theselectedprogram.
1. InProgrammode,selectaprogramwhichusesthe
arpeggiopatternyouwishtoedit,oraprogram
thatyouwishtouseasabasisforeditingthe
arpeggiopattern.
2. PresstheARPbuttontoturnthearpeggiatoron
(thebuttonwilllightup).
EvenifyouenteredGlobalmodefromaprogramin
whichthearpeggiatorwasturnedoff,youcanusethe
ARPbuttontoturniton.
3. SelecttheGlobalP6:ArpeggioPatternSetup
page(seepage 211oftheParameterGuide).
Withthefactorysettings,theformerisselected.Use
thelatterwhenyouwanttokeepthesamearpeggio
patternrunning,andchangeonlytheprogramsound.
ThissettingismadeinLoadARPwhenchanging
(GlobalP0:BasicSetup,Basicpage).(Seepage 110)
91
4. ArpeggiatorSelectwillautomaticallybesettoA
whenyounavigatetothispagefromProgram
mode.
YoucanalsoselectthestepbypressingtheStepline
intheparameterviewatthebottom.Youcanalso
editbydraggingintheparameterview.
5. InPattern,selectthearpeggiopatternthatyou
wishtoedit.
Pressthebuttontotheleftoftheparameterviewto
switchbetweenPitch(PitchOffset)Gate(Gate)
Vel.(Velocity)Flam(Flam).
Forthisexample,selectanemptyuserarpeggio
pattern.
Ifablankpatternisselected,playingthekeyboard
willnotstartanarpeggio.Althoughpreset
arpeggiopatternsP0P4canbeselected,they
cannotbeedited.
Whenyoueditauserarpeggiopattern,the
changeswillhaveaneffectanytimethatthis
patternisusedinProgram,Combination,orSong.
6. InLength,specifythelengthofthepattern.
Afterthepatternhasplayedforthelengthspecified,it
willreturntothebeginning.Thissettingcanalsobe
changedduringorafterediting.Forthisexample,setit
to08.
Setknob4(STEP)tothecenterposition(12
oclock)sothatthevaluesoftheLengthand
Resolutionparameters(GlobalP6:Arpeggio
PatternSetuppage)willbeused.
Note: ForthepreloadarpeggiopatternsU0000(INT)
U0899(INT),simplychangingtheLengthcan
significantlychangethecharacterofthepattern.Try
changingthelengthandlisteningtotheresult.(See
Length(PatternLength)onpage 211ofthe
ParameterGuide.)
7. Makesettingsforthe (Tempo),Resolution,
Octave,Sort,Latch,KeySync.,and
Keyboardparameters.
Theseareprogramparameters,buttheycanbeset
fromhereaswell.
IfafteraccessingthispagefromProgrammode,
youmodifytheseparametersandwishtokeep
yourchanges,returntoProgrammodeandwrite
theprogram.Theseparametersarenotsavedby
WriteArpeggioPattern.
Tone:Eachstepcansoundachordofupto12tones
(ToneNo.0011).Bytouchinganddraggingthe
overviewontherightpartofthescreenorbyusing
thezoomscrollbuttonsaboveit,selectthelocation
forenteringtonesinthezoomviewbelow.Press
thetouchgridtoentertones.
WhenStepisselected,youcanalsoentertonesby
usingthenumerickeys09andtheand.but
tons.
Note: TheToneNo.correspondstothenumerickeys
09andtheand.buttonsasshownbelow.Each
timeyoupressanumerickey09oraor.button,
thecorrespondingtonewillturnonoroff.The
horizontallinesofthegridinthecenterofthedisplay
correspondtotones.
Tone0009:09buttons
Length: 8
Tone No.
Tone10:button
Tone11:.button
01
05
Step No.
Entering tones
Alternate:Setorresetthetone.
Pen(setonly):Setthetone.
Erase(resetonly):Resetthetone.
Tool:Opensthetooltablet.Thetooltabletletsyou
usevariouscommandsinaregionyouvespecifiedin
theoverview,ortocopyandpaste(seeToolTablet
onpage 214oftheParameterGuide).
Creating an example pattern
Forthisexample,makethesettingsshowndisplaystep
3.
8. InArpeggioPatternSetup,specifyhowthe
arpeggiowillbedeveloped.
9. Pressthe
buttontoselectEditdialog.
Overview
Resolution
Zoom Scroll
Tone Input
1. Pressthealternatebutton.
Touch Grid
Parameter
View
ApatternconsistsofStepsandTones.
Step:Eachuserarpeggiopatternhasupto48steps.
Startingwiththefirststep,thearpeggiatorwillplay
notesatintervalsofthenotevaluespecifiedby
Resolution.Theverticallinesofthegridindicate
thesteps.
UseSteptoselectthestep;thenspecifyPitchOff
set,Gate,VelocityandFlamforeachstep.
92
2. Entertonesinthetouchgridasshowninthe
illustrationbelow.
Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern
3. Whenyouplaythekeyboardasshowninthe
illustration,thearpeggiatorwillbeginplaying.
Tone0correspondstothepitchofthelowestkeyof
chordyouplayonthekeyboard.(IfSortisunchecked,
itwillcorrespondtothepitchofthefirstnoteyou
play.)
Other examples of creating a user

arpeggio pattern
Melody pattern
4. Forsteps0108,makesettingsforPitchOffset,
Gate,Velocity,andFlam.
PitchOffset:Thisoffsetsthepitchofthearpeggionote
insemitonesupordown.Youcaninputthesametone
foreachstep,andchangethePitchOffsetvaluefor
eachtocreateamelodyusingasingletone.(See
Melodypattern)
Gate:Specifiesthelengthofthearpeggionoteforeach
step.WithasettingofLegato,thenotewillcontinue
soundingeitheruntilthenextnoteofthesametoneor
untiltheendofthepattern.WithasettingofOff,the
notewillnotsound.
Velocity:Thisspecifiesthestrengthofthenote.Witha
settingofKey,thenotewillsoundatthestrengthof
howitwasactuallyplayed.
TheGateandVelocitysettingsyouselectherewill
bevalidiftheGateandVelocityparameters
(ProgramP7:ARP/DTARPSetuppage)ofthe
programselectedinProgrammodearesettoStep.
IftheseparametershaveasettingotherthanStep,
theGateandVelocitythatwerespecifiedforeach
individualstepwillbeignored,andallnotesofthe
arpeggiowillsoundaccordingtothesettingsin
ProgramP7:ARP/DTARPSetuppage.Besureto
verifythesettingsoftheprogram.
2. Inthetouchgrid,settone0forStep01,02,03,04,
05,07,and08(i.e.,allbut06).
3. Specifythepitch.SettheStep02Pitchto+10,
Step05Pitchto+12,andtheStep08Pitch
to2.
WheneditingGate,Velocity,andSwing,usethe
SELECTbuttontoselectARP,andsetknob1
(GATE)andknob2(VELOCITY)tothecenter
position(12oclock).
4. Playasinglekey;thearpeggiowillbeginplaying.
Chordal pattern
5. Tochangetheuserarpeggiopatternname,usethe
RenameArpeggioPatternmenucommand.(See
page 221oftheParameterGuide)
6. Ifyouwishtosavetheediteduserarpeggio
patterntointernalmemory,besuretoWritethe
userarpeggiopattern.(Seepage 221ofthe
ParameterGuide)
Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithoutwriting,theedited
contentswillbelost.
7. Ifyouwishtosavethestateoftheprogramatthe
sametime,returntoProgrammodeandwritethe
program.(Seepage 115)
2. Inthetouchgrid,settone00ofStep01.
3. InStep03,04,06,and07,settones0004.
4. SelectStep01,andsetGatetoLegato.
5. SelectStep06,andsetGatetoLegato.
Note: Tosimulatethetimingnuancesofastrummed
guitarchord,selectFlam.InProgrammode,selectan
acousticguitarprogram,andchoosetheuserarpeggio
patternthatyoucreatedhere.IntheArpeg.Program
P7:ARP/DTARPSetuppage,setGatetoStep.
93
ThenreturntotheGlobalP6:ArpeggioPatternSetup
page.Foroddnumberedsteps,setFlamtoapositive
(+)value.Forevennumberedsteps,setFlamtoa
negative()value.
Letsinputthefollowingrhythmpattern.
4. ForeachTone,specifyFixedNoteNo.
Drum pattern
Youcanusethearpeggiatortoplayarhythmpattern
byusingFixedNotewithadrumprogram.
1. InProgrammode,selectadrumkitprogram.
Forthisexample,selectthepresetprogramA017:Jazz
Dry/Amb1Kit(Category:Drums).
2. InGlobalP6:ArpeggioPattern,selecttheSetup
page,andparametersettings.
UsetheFixedNoteSetupbuttontoopenthedialog
box.Hereyoucanassignadifferentdrumsample(note
number)ofthedrumkittoeachfixednote.
Forthisexample,setToneNo.andFixedNoteNo.as
follows.
Tone No.
Fixed Note No.
00
C2 (kick)
01
F2 (snare)
02
F#3 (closed hi-hat)
03
A#3 (open hi-hat)
ArpeggioToneMode:SetthistoFixedNote.Thiswill
causethetonetoalwayssoundatthespecifiedpitch.
FixedNoteMode:IfyousetthistoTriggerAllTones,
playingasinglenoteonthekeyboardwillsoundall
tones.
IfyousetthistoTriggerAsPlayed,thetoneswillbe
soundedaccordingtothenotesyouplayonthe
keyboard(seepage 212oftheParameterGuide).
Thedrumsamplecorrespondingtoeachnotenumber
willdifferdependingonthedrumkit.Itsbesttoplay
thekeyboardtofindthedrumsoundyouwant;then
holddownFixedNoteNo.andplaythatnotetoenter
thedesirednotenumber.
6. Enterthekick(Tone00).
3. SelecttheEditpage.
Inthetouchgrid,settone00(C2)ofStep01and05.
7. Enterthesnare(Tone01).
Inthetouchgrid,settone01(F2)ofStep03and07.
8. Entertheclosedhihat(Tone02).
Inthetouchgrid,settone02(F#3)ofStep01,02,03,05,
06,and07.
9. Entertheopenhihat(Tone03).
Inthetouchgrid,settone03(A#3)forStep04.
10. IfFixedNoteModeissettoTriggerAsPlayed,
playingasinglenoteonthekeyboardwillcause
onlythekick(Tone00)toplay.
Playingtwonotesonthekeyboardwillcauseonlythe
kick(Tone00)andsnare(Tone01)toplay.Inthisway,
thenumberofkeysthatyouplaywillbeplayedbythe
samenumberoftones.
94
Using the arpeggiator while you play Creating a user arpeggio pattern
11. Settheparametersforeachstep.
UseVelocityetc.toaddaccentstotherhythmpattern.
TheGateandVelocitysettingsyouselectherewill
bevalidiftheGateandVelocityparameters
(ProgramP7:ARP/DTARPSetuppage)ofthe
programselectedinProgrammodearesettoStep.
IftheseparametershaveasettingotherthanStep,
theGateandVelocitythatwerespecifiedforeach
individualstepwillbeignored,andthenotesof
thearpeggiowillbesoundedaccordingtothe
settingsoftheProgramP7:ARP/DTARPSetup
page.Checkthesettingsoftheprogram.
WhenspecifyingGateandVelocity,pressthe
controlsurfaceARPbutton,andsetknob1(GATE)
andknob2(VELOCITY)tothecenterposition(12
oclock).
7. Ifyouwishtosavetheediteduserarpeggio
patternininternalmemory,youmustwritethe
userarpeggiopattern.
Inthiscase,bothuserarpeggiopatternswillbewritten
simultaneously.Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithout
writing,theeditedcontentswillbelost(seepage 221of
theParameterGuide).
8. Ifyouwishtosavethestateofthecombinationat
thesametime,returntoCombinationmodeand
writethecombination.(Seepage 115)
Note: Wheneditingauserarpeggiopattern,pay
attentiontotheglobalMIDIchannel,thechannelof
eachtrack,andthearpeggiatorassignments,andmake
surethatthearpeggiatoryouarehearingisthepattern
thatyouwishtoedit.
Dual arpeggiator editing

Herewewilluseacombinationasanexampleinour
explanation.
Thesameprocedureapplieswheneditinganarpeggio
patterninSequencermode.
IfyouhaveenteredthismodefromtheCombination
mode,thearpeggiopatternselectedbythe
combinationwillbeaffectedbyyourediting.
1. InCombinationmode,selectacombinationthat
usesthearpeggiopatternyouwishtoedit.
Forthisexample,selectacombinationwhereboth
arpeggiatorsAandBareassigned.
2. PresstheARPbuttontoturnonthearpeggiator
(thebuttonwilllightup).
Evenifthearpeggiatorhadbeenturnedoffwhenyou
movedhere,youcanusetheARPbuttontoturniton.
However,ifArpeggiatorRunAorBarenotchecked,
andifArpeggiatorAssign,issettooff,thenthe
arpeggiatorwillnotfunction.
3. SelecttheGlobalP6:ArpeggioPatternSetup
page.
4. IfyouaccessedthispagefromCombinationmode,
usetheArpeggioSelectAandBtoselectthe
arpeggiatorthatyouwishtoedit.
IfthisisA,youreditingwillapplytotheparameters
anduserarpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorA.
IfthisisB,youreditingwillapplytotheparameters
anduserarpeggiopatternofarpeggiatorB.
5. SwitchbetweenarpeggiatorsAandB,andedit
theirrespectiveuserarpeggiopatterns.
Ifyouwishtostoponeofthearpeggiators,returnto
Combinationmode,andinCombinationP0:Play
ArpeggioAortheArpeggioBpageanduncheckthe
ArpeggiatorRuncheckbox.
6. Tomodifythenameofauserarpeggiopattern,use
theUtilityRenameArpeggioPattern.(See
page 221oftheParameterGuide)
95
Regarding arpeggiator
synchronization
Key Sync. parameter
Thetimingofthearpeggiatornotesdependsonthe
stateofthearpeggiatorKeySync.checkbox.
Ifthisboxischecked,thearpeggiatorwillstart
runningatthefirstnoteonthatoccursafteryouve
takenyourhandscompletelyoffthekeyboard.
Ifthearpeggiatoristurnedon(ARPbuttonison)
andisrunning,itwillresettothebeginningofits
arpeggiopatternwhenaSongStartisreceived.
(ThisisunaffectedbytheKeySync.setting.)
InSequencermodewhenKeySync.isunchecked
andtheARPbuttonison,ifyoustartthe
arpeggiatorbypressingakeyduringtheprecount
beforerecordingbegins,thearpeggiatorwillstart
itspatternassoonasrecordingbegins,andwillbe
recorded.
Ifthisboxisunchecked,thearpeggiatorwillrunin
synchronizationwiththeinternal/externalMIDIclock.
Synchronization with external sequencer

playback
Below,wewillexplainhowsynchronizationoccurs
whentheKeySync.checkboxisnotchecked
(SynchronizationwithSongStartandwithMIDI
realtimeStartmessagesareexcluded).
If(Tempo)isEXT(i.e.,ifGlobalP1:MIDIMIDI
ClockisExternalMIDIorExternalUSB)inProgram,
Combination,orSequencermodes,thearpeggiator
willsynchronizetotheMIDItimingClockandStart
messagesreceivedfromaconnectedMIDIdevice.
Synchronization between arpeggiators

A and B
Note: Synchronizationwilloccurinthesamewayif
MIDItimingClockisAutoandMIDIrealtimeclock
messagesarebeingreceivedfromaconnectedMIDI
device.
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thetwo
arpeggiatorscanrunsimultaneously.Inthiscase,ifone
arpeggiatorisalreadyrunning,andyouthenrunthe
otherarpeggiator(withKeySync.unchecked),the
secondarpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe(Tempo)
basedonthefirstarpeggiator.
IfKeySync.ischecked,arpeggiatorsAandBwillrun
independently,eachattheirowntempo.
Synchronization with the drum track

Ifyouwantthearpeggiatortosynchronizetothedrum
trackpatternthatscurrentlyplaying,unchecktheKey
Sync.setting.Inthiscase,thearpeggiatorwill
synchronizetothebeatofthedrumtrackpatternthats
currentlyplaying.
Ifyouwantthedrumtrackpatterntosynchronizeto
thearpeggiatorthatscurrentlyrunning,turnonthe
Syncsetting(theTriggerparameteroftheDrum
Trackpageofeachmode).
Synchronization between the arpeggiator

and sequencer in Sequencer mode
If song playback is stopped
Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe(Tempo)
basedontheinternalMIDIclocktiming.
IfanRPPRpatternisplayinginSequencermode,
thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothebeatbased
onthatpattern.
IfyouwanttheRPPRpatternplaybacktosynchronize
tothearpeggiatorthatscurrentlyrunning,setSync
toSEQ(SEQP10:Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetuppage).
Patternplaybackwillsynchronizetothe(Tempo)
timingofthearpeggiator.
While playing back or recording a song

Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothebeatbased
onthetimingofthesong.
96
Synchronization with Song Start
Synchronization with external MIDI timing clock

Thearpeggiatorwillsynchronizetothe(Tempo)
timingoftheexternalMIDItimingclock.
Synchronization with MIDI realtime Start messages

Ifthearpeggiatoristurnedonandrunning,an
incomingMIDIrealtimeStartmessagewillresetthe
arpeggiatortothebeginningofitspattern(Thisis
unaffectedbytheKeySync.setting).
Drum Track function

Performing with the Drum Track function
TheDrumTrackfunctionmakesiteasytoplaythe
KROMEshighqualitydrumprogramsusingawide
varietyofDrumTrackpatterns.
ItprovidesaconvenientwayforyoutohearDrum
Trackpatternswhileyoutryoutvariousphrasesona
programorcombination,orworkouttheoutlineof
yoursong.Then,whenyouvecomeupwithsome
ideas,youcanusetheAutoSongSetupfunctionto
immediatelystartrecordinginSequencermode.
Youcanusepresetdrumpatternsthatcoverawide
rangeofmusicalstyles,aswellasuserpatternsthat
youyourselfcreated.
Preset
P001...P605
Preset Drum Track patterns
User
U000...U999
User Drum Track patterns
Using the Drum Track function

in Program mode
Turning the Drum Track function on/
off
1. InProgrammode,selectaprogram(seeSelecting
Programsonpage 21).
YoucanwriteyourownpatternsintoU000U999.User
patternsyouvecreatedinSequencermodecanbe
convertedintouserDrumTrackpatterns.
TheDrumTrackpatternwillstartimmediatelywhen
youpresstheDRUMTRACKbutton,orwhenyou
playthekeyboardafterpressingtheON/OFFbutton.If
yourestartingthepatternbyplayingthekeyboard,
youhavetheoptionofstartingitbyusingaspecific
rangeofnotesorvelocities.
InProgrammode,thedrumtrackhasadedicated
mixerchannel(includingEQ)andeffectrouting,
allowingyoutocontrolthedrumtrackindependently
fromthesoundoftheprogramitself.InCombination
andSequencermodes,thedrumtrackishandledasa
conventionaltimbreortrack,allowingyoutoselect
programs,editEQsettings,andspecifytheeffect
routinginthesamewayasforconventionaltimbresor
tracks.
2. PresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.
TheON/OFFbuttonwilllightuporblink,depending
onthesetting(TriggerMode)oftheprogram.
Iflit:TheDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccordingto
theSyncsetting.Whenyouturnitoff,thepatternwill
stop.(ThiswilloccuriftheTriggerModeparameteris
settoStartImmediately.)
Ifblinking:TheDrumTrackpatternwillbereadyto
start.Itwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardorwhen
aMIDInoteonisreceived.(Thiswilloccurifthe
TriggerModeparameterissettoWaitKBDTrigger.)
Adjusting the performance tempo

YoucanusetheTEMPOknoborthe
TAPbuttontoadjusttheperformance
tempo.
Thiswillchangethe =valuelocated
ontheupperrightsideofthedisplay.
Youcanadjustthetempowitharange
of40.00300.00bpm.TheLEDlocated
abovetheTAPbuttonwillblinkatinter
valsofaquarternote( ).
Youcanalsoadjustthetempobychoos
ing =inthedisplay.Usenumerickeys09to
enterthetempo,andthenpresstheENTERbutton.
YoucanalsousetheVALUEcontrollertosetthe
tempo.TheLEDwillblinkatthetempoyouspecify.
Note: Thetemposettingisalsosavedwhenyouwritea
program.
97
Drum Track function
IftheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpageMIDI
ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,External
USB,orsettoAutoandMIDIClockmessagesare
beingreceived,thedisplaywillindicate =EXT,
andtheKROMEwillbesynchronizedtoan
externalMIDIdevice.Inthiscase,youwontbe
abletochangethetempobyusingtheKROME.
Selecting a Drum Track pattern and

Drum Track program
Using the Drum Track function

in Combination mode
Selecting a combination and turning the
Drum Track function on/off
1. PresstheCOMBIbuttontoenterCombination
mode,andselectthedesiredcombination.For
details,pleaseseeSelectingCombinationson
page 43.
Drum Track Play/Mute, Solo On/Off, Volume
Pattern
Bank/No.
Drum Track
Program
Drum Track
EQ
2. PresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.
2. SelectaDrumTrackpattern.UsePatternBank
toselectthepresetortheuserbank,anduse
PatternNo.toselectthepatternnumber.
3. UseDrumTrackProgramtoselecttheprogram
thatwillplaytheDrumTrackpattern.
Note: Youcanonlyselectprogramsofcategory
number15(Drums).Ifyouwanttouseanoriginal
programyoucreatedastheDrumTrackprogram,save
itwithCategorysetto15(seepage 30).
Note: Ifyouveselectedanemptypattern,theDRUM
TRACKbuttonwillnotfunction.
TheseparameterscanalsobesetfromP7:ARP/DT
page.
Setting the EQ, volume, mute, and

solo for the drum track pattern
IntheProgP0:PlayMixer&DrumTrackpageyou
canusea3bandEQtoadjustthesoundofthedrum
trackprogram.Youcanalsoeditthevolume,mute,
andsolosettings.
TheON/OFFbuttonwilllightuporblink,depending
onthesetting(TriggerMode)ofthecombination.
Iflit:TheDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccordingto
theSyncsetting.Whenyouturnitoff,thepatternwill
stop.(ThiswilloccuriftheTriggerModeparameteris
settoStartImmediately.)
Ifblinking:TheDrumTrackpatternwillbereadyto
start.Itwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardorwhen
aMIDInoteonisreceived.(Thiswilloccurifthe
TriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrigger.)
Adjusting the performance tempo

YoucanusetheTEMPOknobortheTAPbuttonto
adjusttheperformancetempo.
Selecting a Drum Track pattern and Drum

Track program
UnlikeitsfunctionalityinProgrammode,theDrum
TrackfunctioninCombinationmodedoesnothaveits
owndedicatedtrack(timbre).Theprogramthatplays
theDrumTrackpatternwillusethetimbrethatyou
specify.
1. IntheCombiP0:PlayProgramT0108pageor
T0916page,selectthetimbrethatyouwanttouse
forthedrumtrack,andthenselecttheDrumTrack
program.
98
Performing with the Drum Track function Using the Drum Track function in Combination mode
Inthefollowingillustration,weveselectedtimbre5
forusebythedrumtrack.
2. SpecifytheMIDIchannelofthedrumtrack
timbre.
BeawarethatifanothertimbreusesthesameMIDI
channel,thattimbrewillalsobeplayed.
3. AccesstheCombiP7:ARP/DTDrumTrackpage.
SpecifythedrumtracksMIDIchannelOutput.Setthis
tomatchtheMIDIChannelofthetimbreyou
specifiedinstep2.
4. SelectaDrumTrackpattern.UsePattern(Pattern
Bank)toselectthepresetoruserbank,anduse
PatternNo.toselectthepatternnumber.
Note: Ifyouselectanemptypattern,theDRUM
TRACKbuttonwillnotfunction.
5. PresstheDRUMTRACKbuttontoverifythatthe
patternplayscorrectly.
ThemethodoftriggeringwilldependontheTrigger
settings.IftheTriggerModeparameterissettoStart
Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillstartwhen
youpresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.Fordetailsonthe
Triggersettings,pleasesee74b:Triggeronpage 56
oftheParameterGuide.
99
Drum Track function
Drum Track function settings

in Program mode
Starting/stopping the drum track
1. AccesstheProgP7:ARP/DTDrumTrackPattern
page.
4. IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrigger,
specifytheLatchsetting.Latchspecifies
whethertheDrumTrackpatternwillcontinue
playingevenafteryoutakeyourhandoffthe
keyboard.
Off:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(theLEDwill
blink),thepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe
keyboard(noteon).Thepatternwillstopwhenyou
releasethekeyboard(noteoff).
On:IftheDRUMTRACKbuttonison(theLEDwill
blink),thepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe
keyboard(noteon).Thepatternwillcontinuewhen
youreleasethekeyboard(noteoff).Thepatternwill
stopwhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKbuttonoff(the
LEDwillgodark).
5. IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrigger,
specifytheKeyboardZoneandVelocityZone.
Thesesettingsspecifytherangeofkeysandvelocities
thatwilltriggertheDrumTrackpatternwhenyouplay
thekeyboard(orreceiveanoteon).
2. TriggerModespecifieshowtheDrumTrack
patternwillbetriggered.
StartImmediately:WhenyoupresstheDRUM
TRACKbuttontoturniton,theLEDwilllightupand
theDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSync
setting.ItwillstopwhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK
buttontoturnitoff.
WaitKBDTrigger:WhenyoupresstheDRUM
TRACKbuttontoturniton,theLEDwillblinkandthe
DrumTrackpatternwillwaittostart.Whenyouplay
thekeyboardorreceiveaMIDInoteon,theDrum
TrackpatternwillstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting.
3. SpecifytheSyncsetting.
Off:TheDrumTrackpatternwillnotsynchronizeto
thearpeggiatorthatscurrentlyrunning,butwillstart
immediately.
On:TheDrumTrackpatternwillsynchronizetothe
arpeggiatorthatscurrentlyrunning.
100
Saving the on/off status

IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrigger,thedrum
trackson/offstatuscanbesavedintheprogram.
IfTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately,thedrum
trackson/offstatuswillalwaysbesavedasoff,
regardlessofthestateoftheDRUMTRACKbutton.
EQ adjustments for the Drum Track

program
YoucanadjustathreebandEQfortheDrumTrack
program.
IfyouturnAutoLoadProgramEQon(selected),the
threebandEQsettingsspecifiedfortheprogramwill
beautomaticallyloadedwhenyouswitchDrumTrack
programs.Normallyyouwillleavethisselected.
YouarefreetoadjustthethreebandEQsettingsthat
areloadedautomatically.Theseadjustmentsare
appliedrelativetotheoriginalsettingsoftheprogram.
Drum Track function settings Drum Track function settings in Combination mode
MIDI transmission and reception for

the drum track
InProgrammode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmits
andreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:Ifyourecontrollingthetriggeringbyplaying
thekeyboard,thedrumtrackwillreceiveontheglobal
MIDIchannel.
Transmit:ThedrumtrackwilltransmitontheMIDI
channelspecifiedbyDrumTrackProgMIDICh
(default:channel10).(Notedataetc.oftheDrumTrack
programwillbetransmitted.)
Note: MIDItransmissionofthepatterndataisenabled
ifDrumTrackProgMIDIOutisselected.Thedefault
settingisoff(unselected).
TheDrumTrackprogramdoesnottransmitorreceive
programchanges.

in Sequencer mode
TheparametersfortheDrumTrackfunctionare
structuredinthesamewayasinCombinationmode.
AssigntheDrumTrackprogramtothedesiredtrack1
16.
However,whileacombinationtriggerstheDrum
TrackpatternontheglobalMIDIchannel,asong
triggerstheDrumTrackpatternontheMIDIchannel
specifiedbytheDrumPatternInput.Normallyyoull
setthistoTch.WiththeTchsetting,theMIDIchannel
ofthetrackselectedbyTrackSelectwillautomatically
beusedasthetriggerchannel.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSelectingaDrumTrackpattern
andDrumTrackprogramonpage 98.

in Combination mode
UnlikeProgrammode,Combinationmodedoesnot
haveadedicatedtrackfortheDrumTrackfunction.
Youllneedtospecifyatimbre116astheoneforuse
bytheDrumTrackprogram.
ThensetthedrumtracksoutputMIDIchannelOutput
tomatchthetimbresMIDIchannelMIDIChannelso
thattheDrumTrackprogramcanbeplayed.
Fordetails,pleaseseeSelectingaDrumTrackpattern
andDrumTrackprogramonpage 98.

the drum track
InCombinationmode,theDrumTrackfunction
transmitsandreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
Receive:Ifyourecontrollingthetriggeringbyplaying
thekeyboard,thedrumtrackwillreceiveontheglobal
MIDIchannel.
InSequencermodeyoucanusetheDrumTrack
functionwhilerealtimerecordingasongtrackor
pattern.
Thenoteon/offdatatransmittedbytheDrumTrack
patterncanberecordedaseventsinatrackorpattern.
Youcantusenotedatafromtheinternal
sequencerasatriggertostartpatternsforthe
DrumTrackfunction.
WhenyouveusedtheDrumTrackfunctionwitha
programorcombinationtocomeupwithanideafora
song,youcanthenusetheAutoSongSetupfunctionto
immediatelystartrealtimerecording(seepage 59).
channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsetting
ofeachcombination.

the drum track
SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthetimbreyouve
specifiedforthedrumprogram.
InSequencermode,theDrumTrackfunctiontransmits
andreceivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels.
IfthetimbresStatusisEXTorEX2,thenotedataetc.
oftheDrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
Receive:ThedrumtrackwillreceiveontheMIDI
channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternInputsettingof
eachsong.NormallyyoullsetthistoTchandusethe
KROMEskeyboardtocontrolthetriggering.
channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsetting
ofeachsong.SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthe
MIDItrackwhereyouveassignedthedrumprogram.
IfthetracksStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2,notedataetc.
oftheDrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.
101
Drum Track function
Synchronizing the Drum Track

function
The Trigger Sync parameter
Thetriggertimingofadrumtrackwilldependonthe
settingofitsTriggerSyncparameter.
On(checked):Thetriggertimingwillbequantizedto
thenearestbeatrelativetothebasetempo.
Off(unchecked):IfTriggerModeissettoStart
Immediately,triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyou
presstheDRUMTRACKbutton.IfthisissettoWait
KBDTrigger,triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyou
playthekeyboard.
Synchronizing the drum track with the KARMA function, Sequencer mode songs, patterns, and RPPR performance
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayorbe
recordedinsynchronizationwiththearpeggiatorthats
currentlyrunning,acurrentlyplayingsong,pattern,
orRPPRperformance,turnTriggerSyncon.
TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart
Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggered
themomentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKbutton.If
thisissettoWaitKBDTrigger,theDrumTrackpattern
willbetriggeredthemomentyouplaythekeyboard.It
willnotsynchronizetothearpeggiatorthatscurrently
runningortothesong,pattern,orRPPRthats
currentlyactive.
TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe
songthatscurrentlyplaying,patternorRPPR
performanceinunitsofameasure.Triggeringwill
synchronizetothearpeggiatorthatscurrentlyrunning
(inSequencermodeifthesongorpatternisstopped)
inunitsofabeat.
Note: Ifyouwanttosynchronizearpeggiatortothe
DrumTrackfunctionthatscurrentlyrunning,setthe
Syncparameter(Prog/Combi/SeqP7:ARP/DT
DrumTrkPattern).
Note: IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern
performancetotheDrumTrackfunctionthats
currentlyrunning,settheSyncparameter(SeqP10:
Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetuppage)toBeatorMeasure.
Sync settings
Key 1 on
Key 2 on
Key 1 off
Song
Patterns 1 and 2 are set to
Mode=Manual, and have
identical Sync settings
Sync: Off
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: Beat
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Sync: Measure
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Synchronization with song stop

Synchronization with a song in Sequencer
mode
WhenyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP
(
)button,theDrumTrackfunctionwillstop
aswellasthesequencer.
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackfunctiontostart
simultaneouslywiththestartofrecording,press
theDRUMTRACKbuttonduringtheprecount
beforerecording(ifTriggerModeissettoStart
Immediately)orplaythekeyboard(ifTrigger
ModeisWaitKBDTrigger).TheDrumTrackswill
notbetriggeredimmediately,butwillbetriggered
insynchronizationwiththesequencerthemoment
recordingstarts.
Slave operation
ConnecttheKROMEsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI
devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKROMEsUSBB
connectortoyourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClock(seepage 111)toExternalMIDIor
ExternalUSB.
Note: IftheKROMEissettoMIDIClock=Auto,itwill
alsosynchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthe
samewayifMIDItimingclockmessagesarebeing
receivedfromtheexternaldevice.
Synchronization to MIDI clock

Thearpeggiatorfunctionwillsynchronizetoatempo
basedontheexternalMIDIclocktiming.
Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands

InSequencermode,SongStart,Continue,andStop
messagesthattheKROMEreceiveswillcontrolsong
playbackandrecordingjustaswhenyouusethefront
panelSTART/STOP(
)button.TheKARMA
functionalsowillbecontrolledinthesamewayas
whenyouusethefrontpanelSTART/STOP(
)
button.(SeeSynchronizationwithsongstop)
102
Drum Track function settings Creating a Drum Track pattern
Master operation
IfyouwantanexternalMIDIdeviceorcomputerto
synchronizetotheKROMEsMIDItimingclockand
realtimecommands,connecttheKROMEsMIDIOUT
toyourexternalMIDIdevicesMIDIIN,orconnectthe
KROMEsUSBporttoyourcomputersUSBport.
SetMIDIClocktoInternal.
Note: ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI
realtimeclockmessagesarebeingtransmitted(see
page 111).
Synchronization via MIDI clock

TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronize
totheMIDIclockoftheKROME.
Creating a Drum Track pattern

Onceyouveconvertedthepatterninthisway,youll
beabletouseitwiththedrumtrackineachmode.
TheseconvertedDrumTrackpatternsareheldin
internalmemoryevenafteryouturnoffthepower.
Thismeansyoucanmanagethemtogetherwiththe
programsandcombinations.
5. UsetheToDrumTrackPatternSelectfieldto
specifytheuserDrumTrackpatternnumberthat
willholdtheconverteddata.Whenyouexecute
thecommand,thedatawillbeoverwrittenonto
thisnumber.
6. IfyouselecttheAllPatternsavailableinSong
***option,allpatternsinthesongthatcontain
notedatawillbeconverted,startingwiththe
numberyouspecifiedinstep3.
7. IfyouexecutethiscommandwithNoteOnly
selected,onlythenoteeventswillbeconverted.
8. PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERbuttonto
execute.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe
CancelbuttonortheEXITbutton.
9. AsdescribedinUsingtheDrumTrackfunction
inProgrammodeonpage 97,settheDrumTrack
PatternBanktoUser,andsetPatternNo.to
theuserDrumTrackpatternyouconverted.Then
playtheDrumTrackpattern.
Drum Track
Tocreateauserpattern,youcanrealtimerecordit(see
page 65)intheSeqP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEdit
page,orsteprecordit(seepage 167oftheParameter
Guide).
Alternatively,performancedatafromatrackcanbe
importedintoapattern,meaningthatperformance
datayouvecreatedinatrackorSMFdatayouve
loadedinMediamodecanbeusedasauserpattern.To
dothis,executetheGetFromTrackmenucommandin
theSeqP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage(see
page 187oftheParameterGuide).
Preset
Pattern
Track/RPPR
Drum Track
100
User
Pattern
Preparing a user pattern

Youllfirstneedtopreparetheuserpatternthatyou
wanttoconverttoaDrumTrackpattern.
Program
/Combination
Song
User
Drum Track
Pattern
Convert to
Drum Track Pattern
Sequencer memory
(Not saved internally;
save on external USB
media.)
Internal memory (saved inside the KROME)
Ifthedrumpatternmemoryisinsufficient,orif
therearenotenoughpatternslots,theerror
messageNotenoughDrumTrackpattern
memoryorNotenoughDrumTrackpattern
locationsavailablewillappear,andthecommand
cannotbeexecuted.
Tip: Itsagoodideatoconvertdrumpatternsthatyou
usefrequently.UseLoadDrumTrackPatterntoload
them.
Converting to a Drum Track pattern

1. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode.
2. AccesstheSeqP10:Patern/RPPRPatternEdit
page.
3. Selecttheuserpatternthatyouwanttoconvertto
aDrumTrackpattern.
SetPatterntoUser,andusePatternSelecttoselectthe
desiredpattern.
4. ChoosethemenucommandConverttoDrumTrk
Patterntoaccessthedialogbox.
103
Drum Track function
104
Using Drum Kits

Drum Kit Overview
Before you start editing
Whats a Drum Kit?
Selecting a drum program
Adrumkitisacollectionofdrumsamples(drumset
soundssuchasbassdrum,snare,orcymbals,aswellas
awidevarietyofotherpercussionsounds),witheach
sampleassignedtoanoteofthekeyboard.
DrumKitsareeditedinGlobalMode.Whileyourein
GlobalMode,youllplaythekitthatyoureeditingasif
youwereplayingitfromwithintheProgram,Combi,
orSongwhichwasselectedbeforeyouenteredGlobal
mode.
Eachkeycanplayadifferentsound
Oneachkey,youcanuseuptoeightDrumsamples,
withvelocitycrossfades
Eachkeyhasseparatesettingsforthemost
importantsoundparameters,includingvolume,
filtercutoffandresonance,envelopeattackand
decay,pitch,driveandlowboost,andgainforeach
bandoftheProgramEQ.
Forinstance,youcouldcombinehighdriveand
lowcutofffrequencytocreatealofieffectononlya
fewsounds,whiletherestofthesoundsremained
clearandpristine.
EachnotecanberoutedtodifferentInsertEffects,
orhaveseparateFXSendamounts.Forinstance,
youcansendasnaresoundthroughadedicated
compressor.
YoucanuseDrumKitsonlyinProgramswhose
OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDoubleDrums.
Drum Kit memory structure

TheKROMEhasover161DrumKits,dividedinto
Internal,User,andGM(GeneralMIDI)groupsas
shownbelow.Youcaneditorwriteintoanyofthe
locationsexceptfortheGMbank,whichcannotbe
erased.
DrumKitcontents
Bank
No.
So,beforeyouenterGlobalmode,itsbesttoselecta
Programwhichisalreadysetupfordrums,withthe
appropriateEGsettings,effects,andsoon.Justusethe
ProgramCategoryselectpopup,andchooseadrum
ProgramsuchasStudioStandardKit.
EveniftheprogramsoscillatorissettoDouble
Drums,thispagewillshowonlythesingledrum
kitthatisselectedbyDrumKitSelect.
Matching the key of the keyboard

with the drum kit
Inorderforthenotemappingstomatchthekeyboard,
theOscillatorsOctavesettingneedstobe+0[8].All
DrumKitProgramsshouldhavethissettingalready.If
youreunsure,youcancheckthisyourself:
1. GototheOSC1SetuptaboftheOSC/Pitchpage.
Withasettingotherthan+0[8],therelationship
betweenthekeysandtheDrumKitsoundmapwillbe
incorrect.
2. SettheGlobalP0:BasicSetupBasicparameter
KeyTransposeto+00.
Make sure that Memory Protect is

disabled
Contents
INT
00...31
Preload Drum Kits
User
32...47
User Drum Kits
GM 0
48...56
GM2 Drum Kits
Beforeyoustartediting,gototheGlobalP0:Basic
SetupSystemPreferencespage,andlookinthe
MemoryProtectsection.MakesurethatDrumKitis
notcheckedifso,youwontbeabletomakeanyedits.
The9DrumKitsintheGMbankarecompatiblewith
theGM2soundmap.TheotherDrumKitsmayuse
differentmappings,whereappropriate.
Drum Kits may be used by more than

one Program
Using a drum kit in a program

(Oscillator Mode)
WhenyoueditaDrumKit,allProgramsthatusethat
DrumKitwillbeaffected.Toavoidchangingthe
factoryvoicing,youmaywishtocopyDrumKitsto
emptylocationsintheUSERbanksbeforeediting.
IntheProgramP1:BasicCtrlsProgramBasicpage,set
theOscillatorModeparametertoDrumsorDouble
Drums.Thenfortheoscillator,selectthedrumkitthat
youwanttouse.
105
Using Drum Kits
IfAssignischecked,thekeywillhaveitsownsettings.
Thisisthedefault.
Editing a Drum Kit

Basic Editing
1. SelecttheProgramthatyouwishtousewhile
editingtheDrumKit.
IfAssignisnotchecked,thekeywonthaveitsown
settings.Instead,itwillusethesamesettingsasthe
nexthighernoteexceptthatthedrumsampleswillbe
playedatalowerpitch.Theamountofpitchchange
dependsonthePitchSlopeparameter,ontheProgP2:
OSC/PitchOSC1PitchorOSC2Pitchpage.
2. AccesstheP2:OSC/PitchOSC1Setuppageorthe
OSC2Setuppage(DoubleDrumsonly),andpress
theJumptoDrumKitEditbutton.
Usethissettingwhenyouwantonlytochangethe
pitch,suchaswithtomorcymbalsounds.
IfyouwanttoedittheOSC2drumkitofadouble
drumsprogram,presstheJumptoDrumKitEdit
buttonfromtheP2:OSC/PitchOSC2Setuppage.
Velocity crossfade settings

Forthiskey,letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfade
betweentwostereodrumsamples.
1. Ontheleftsideofthepage,makesurethat
Drumsample1and2areturnedOn.
JustpresstheOn/Offbuttonstotogglethem,if
necessary.
YoulljumptotheGlobalmodeP5:DrumKitSample
Setuppage.
Note: IfyouenterGlobalmodebypressingthe
GLOBALbuttonorthemodebutton,andthenaccess
theP5:DrumKitSampleSetuppage,theOSC1sound
settingswillbeused.
KEY Assign
Drum Kit
Select
2. Inthesameway,makesurethatDrumsamples38
areOff.
Whentheyareturnedoff,mostoftheirparameterswill
begrayedout.
3. SelectStereoastheBankforDrumsample1and
Drumsample2.
Drumsamplescomeinseveraltypes:Mono,Stereo,
VM.M,orVM.S.Monoaremonodrumsamples,and
Stereoarestereodrumsamples.Stereodrumsamples
usetwiceasmanyvoicesasmonodrumsamples.
VM.MandVM.Sarerespectivelymonoandstereo
versionsoflargecapacitydrumsamples.
3. Inthetoplineofthedisplay,useDrumKit
Selecttoselectthedrumkitthatyouwanttoedit.
GMdrumkits48(GM)56(GM)cannotbeselected
here.(ItisnotpossibletoeditorwriteaGMdrum
kit.)Ifyouwishtomodifythesettingsofoneofthe
drumkits48(GM)56(GM),youcanuseCopy
DrumKittocopyitto00(INT)47(USER),and
theneditthecopy.
4. UsetheKeyparametertoselectthenotethatyou
wishtoedit.
Toselectakey,youcanuseanyofthestandardVALUE
controllers(thedial,numerickeypadetc.).Asa
shortcut,youcanalsoholddowntheKeyandplaya
noteonthekeyboard.
ThisKeyselectionappliestoallfiveDrumKitediting
pages.
5. UsetheAssigncheckboxtospecifywhetherthe
keywillhaveitsownsettings,orusethesame
settingsasthenexthighernote.
106
Drumsamplesareorganizedintocategoriessuchas
bassdrumorsnare.
4. PresstheDrumsamplepopupforDrumsample1.
ThisbringsupalistofDrumsamples,organizedby
category.Usethetabsattheleftofthedisplayto
browsethroughthedifferentcategories.
ForalistoftheDrumsamplenames,pleaseseethe
VoiceNameList.
Editing a Drum Kit
Fine-tuning the sound of each sample

1. Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwo
Drumsamples.
Thiscanbeveryusefulincreatingasmoothvelocity
splitorcrossfade.
2. Asnecessary,specifythetuning,EGparameters,
andfilter.
AccesstheP5:DrumKitSampleParameterpage.
AdjustTune,Attack(AmpEGAttack),Decay(Amp
EGDecay),CutoffandResonanceforeach
drumsample.
5. SelectaDrumsamplebytouchingitsnameinthe
list.
3. Youcanalsoeditthedrive,boost,andEQforeach
drumsample.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection.
AccesstheP5:DrumKitDrive/EQpage.
7. Switchtheslotto2,andmakesettingsfor
Drumsample2inthesameway.
AdjustDrive,LowBoost,and3BandEQGain[dB]
foreachdrumsample.
NowthatyouveassignedDrumsamplesto
Drumsample1andDrumsample2,letssetupthe
velocityrangesandcrossfades.
4. RepeatBasicEditing,onpage 106tosetupeach
keyoftheDrumKit.
8. AccesstheP5:DrumKitVelocitySplitpage.
9. SetDrumsample2sThresholdVelocityto1,and
itsCrossfadetoOff.
5. Youcanalsocopysettingsfromonekeyto
another,usingtheCopyKeySetupmenu
command.
10. SetDrumsample1sThresholdVelocityto80.
Using Exclusive Groups
YoucanedittheThresholdVelocitysettingby
touchinganddraggingthegraphicontheright
(see*EG,VelocitySplitonpage 6).
1. AccesstheP5:DrumKitVoice/Mixerpage.
Now,Drumsample2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,
atvelocitiesof79orlessandDrumsample1willsound
whenyouplayharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore.
ThemeterattheleftsideoftheVelocitySplitgraphic
indicatesthenoteonvelocityvalue.Thisletsyou
verifythedrumsamplethatwillbesoundedbyagiven
velocity.
11. Next,setDrumsample1sCrossfadeto20,andits
CurvetoLinear.
2. UsetheExclusiveGroupstomakeonedrum
soundcutoffanotherdrumsoundsuchasclosed
andopenhihats.
Forexample,letssaythatyouveassignedanopenhi
hatandaclosedhihattothesameexclusivegroup:
Playtheopenhihatsound.
Whileitsstillringing,playtheclosedhihat.
Theopenhihatsoundwillbecutoffsimulating
theactionofaphysicalhihat.
Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges
taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,
Drumsample2willfadeout,andDrumsample1will
fadein,creatingagradualvelocitytransitioninsteadof
ahardsplit.
107
Using Drum Kits
Sustaining the sound even after the key is released (Hold)

UsetheHoldfunctionforinstrumentsthatshould
continuesustainingevenafterthekeyisreleased,such
asacrashcymbal.Thewaythisworkswilldependon
thesettingsoftheprogramanddrumkit.
Controlling pan for each key

Touseseparatepansettingsforeachkey:
SettheHoldfunctionasfollows.
1. AccesstheProgP4:Amp/EQAmp1/Driver1or
Amp2/Drive2page.
1. AccesstheProgP1:Basic/ControllersNoteOn/
Scalepage.
2. UnderPan,makesurethattheUseDKitSetting
checkboxischecked.
IfyoujumpedtotheGlobalP5:DrumKitpageby
pressingtheJumptoDrumkitEditbuttonfrom
Programmode,youcanreturntoProgrammodeby
pressingtheReturntoOSCbutton.
WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe
pansettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKit.
2. UnderKeyZone,makesurethattheHoldcheck
boxischecked.
OnceyouveturnedonHoldfortheProgram,the
functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasis
accordingtosettingswithintheDrumKit.
3. AccesstheGlobalP5:DrumKitVoice/Mixer
page.
4. Foreachkey,settheEnableNoteOffReceive
parameterasdesired.
Ifthischeckboxisnotselected,noteswillbeheld,and
thesoundwillcontinueevenafterthekeyisreleased.
Ifitischecked,thekeywillnotbeheld.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbe
heldregardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceive
setting.
Controlling effects for each key

DrumKitshavetheirown,builtinmixers.Foreach
key,youcancontroltheInsertEffectsbussing,Master
Effectssends,andpan.
Touseseparatebussettingsforeachkey:
1. AccesstheProgP8:Routing/IFXRoutingpage.
2. MakesurethattheUseDKitSettingcheckboxis
checked.
WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe
BusSelectandEffectsSendsettingsforeachkeyofthe
DrumKit.
WhenUseDKitSettingisoff,theProgramwillignore
theDrumKitsBusSelectandEffectsSendsettings.
page.
4. UsetheBus(IFX/Output)Selectparametertosend
drumsoundsthroughtheirownInserteffects,or
totheL/Routputs.
Ifyoulike,youcansendeachnotetoitsownInsert
effect,ortotheindividualaudiooutputs,inadditionto
theL/Routputs.
Forexample,youmightsendallsnaresoundstoIFX1,
allkicksoundstoIFX2,andtheremainingsoundstoL/
R.
Tip: Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedrum
instrumentshavethesameBus(IFX/Output)Select
settingsaccordingtotheirtype,asfollows.
SnaresIFX1
KicksIFX2
OtherIFX3
108
5. UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)toset
thesendlevelstothemastereffects.
page.
4. UsePantospecifythepanningforeachkey.
Saving Drum Kits

Onceyouvespentsometimeediting,youllwantto
saveyourwork.
ThecontentsofyoureditinginGlobalmodeare
preservedaslongasthepowerison,butwillbe
lostwhenyouturnoffthepower.Ifyouwantto
keepyouredits,youmustexecutetheWriteDrum
Kitsfunction.
Thiswillsavealldrumkits.
Adjusting Global KROME setings

How Global mode is structured
InGlobalmodeyoucanadjustoverallsettingsforthe
entireKROME.Theseconsistmainlyofthefollowing
settings.
Mastertune
Keytranspose
Effectglobalbutton
GlobalMIDIchannel
Creatingscales
Damperpedal,assignablefootswitch/pedal
Categorynamesforprogramsandcombinations
Creatinguserdrumkits
ThreetypesofdataarehandledinGlobalmode:
userdrumkitsettings(GlobalP5),userarpeggio
patterns(GlobalP6),andotherglobalsettings
(GlobalP04).Eachofthesehasarespective
memoryareatostoreitsdata.Thisdatacanalsobe
savedtovarioustypesofSDcardinMediamode.
Fordetails,pleaseseeWritingGlobalsettings,
UserDrumKitsandUserArpeggioPatternson
page 116,andSavingtoSDcard(MediaSave)
onpage 118.
TheComparefunctionthatletsyoureturntothe
statepriortoyourediting(orundoedits)isnot
availableinGlobalmode.
Creatinguserarpeggiopatterns
Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachpage,pleasesee
Basicoperationsonpage 9.
Global settings
Basic setup
Tuning and
transpose
settings
Velocity/
curve settings
Effect bypass
settings
Link the
arpeggiator
Stop the
arpeggiator
and drum
track
Youcanadjustthetranspositionoverarangeof1
octave.
3. UsetheGlobalmodeP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpage
ConvertPositionparametertospecifytheposition
atwhichthetransposeandvelocitycurvesettings
willbeapplied.
PreMIDIisthenormalsetting.Withthissetting,the
TransposesettingdescribedaboveandtheVelocity
CurvedescribedbelowwillbeappliedtotheKROMEs
keyboardperformancedata,andwillaffectboththe
MIDIOUTandtheinternalsoundgenerator.Thisis
alsorequiredinordertorecordtheoutputofthe
curvesintotheinternalsequencer.
Tuning and Transposing
PostMIDIappliesthetranspositionandcurvesto
incomingMIDI,foradjustingtheKROMEresponseto
anexternalMIDIcontroller.
Tuning to another instrument
Whensimplyplayingtheinternalsoundsfromthe
KROMEkeyboard,bothsettingsworkthesame.
Toadjustthetuninginfineincrements,inorderto
matchotherinstrumentsorrecordedmusic:
Adjusting the keyboard response
1. InGlobalmode,gotoP0:BasicSetupBasicpage.
2. AdjusttheMasterTunetothedesiredpitch.
TheMasterTuneisadjustableoverarangeof50cents
(onesemitone=100cents).WhenMasterTuneisat0,
middleAistunedto440Hz.
VelocitycurveletyouadjustthewaytheKROME
respondstohowyouplayonthekeyboard.The
defaultsettingshouldworkformostplayers,butthere
aremanyotherchoicestoletyoucustomizethe
responsetomatchyourownstyle.
Tosetthevelocityandaftertouchcurves:
Transposing the keyboard
Youcanalsotransposethekeyboardinsemitones,for
quickkeychanges(forinstance,ifthebanddecidesto
playasonginFratherthanE).Todoso:
2. SettheVelocityCurvetosuityourplayingstyle.
VelocityCurve4isthedefault,andshouldworkfor
mostplayers.
2. AdjusttheKeyTransposeasdesired.
109
Curve9isdesignedspecificallyforplayingpiano
soundsfromtheweightedNHkeyboardsinthe73
noteand88notemodels.
Fordetailsontheothercurves,seethegraphicbelow,
aswellastheVelocityCurvesectiononpage 194of
theParameterGuide.
2. IntheLoadARPwhenchangingarea,ifthe
ProgramorCombinationboxisselected,
switchingprogramsorcombinationsrespectively
willrecallthearpeggiatorsettingswritteninthat
programorcombination.
3. Specifythepositionwherethevelocitycurvewill
beapplied.FormoreaboutConvertPosition,
pleaseseeTransposingthekeyboard,above.
Disabling the arpeggiator and drum

track
Velocitycurves
1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetupBasic
page.
Convert Position = PreMIDI
Convert Position = PostMIDI
Velocity (Keyboard to MIDI Out)
Velocity (MIDI In to sound engines)
127
MAX
7
8
4
3
2
Velocity
effect
Soft
EveniftheARPorDRUMTRACKbuttonsareon,the
arpeggiatoranddrumtrackwillnotfunction.
8
6
5
4
Strong
2. IftheAllARP/DTOffboxisselected,all
arpeggiatoranddrumtrackfunctionalitywillbe
turnedoff.
127
Recalling the last-selected mode and

page at power-on
Bypassing the effects

YoucanbypasstheKROMEsinserteffects,master
effects,andtotaleffects.Thesesettingswillbypassthe
effectsinallmodes.Ifyoureusingeffectssuchas
reverborchorusprovidedbyanexternaleffect
processor,mixer,orDAW,youcanbypassthe
KROMEsowneffectssothattheywillnotbeused.
page.
2. UsethevariousEffectGlobalSWbuttonstoselect
theeffectsthatyouwanttobypass.Theeffectwill
bebypassedifthecheckboxiscleared.
ClearingtheIFX15box:Bypassestheinserteffects
ClearingtheMFX1&2box:Bypassesthemaster
effects
ClearingtheTFX1&2box:Bypassesthetotaleffects
MFX1&2andTFXcanalsobecontrolledbythe
frontpanelMASTERFXbuttonandTOTALFXbutton.
Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttotemporarilyturn
offtheseeffectsduringaperformance.
Note: Theseparameterswillalwaysbeturnedonwhen
theKROMEstartsup.
Arpeggiator recall settings (Linking

the arpeggiator with programs or
combinations)
Beep setting
Memory
protect
settings
1. AccesstheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetupSystem
Preferencespage.
2. IfthePowerOnModeissettoReset(factory
setting),KROMEwillautomaticallyselectthe
ProgrammodeP0:Play.
IfthePowerOnModeissettoMemorize,thelocation
(modeandpage)andtheprogramorcombination
numberthathadbeenselectedwhenyouturnedoff
thepowerwillberecalled.
Enabling a beep tone when the

display is pressed
Preferencespage.
2. IftheBeepEnablecheckboxisselected,abeep
tonewillsoundwhenyoupressanobjectinthe
display.Clearthecheckboxifyoudontwanta
beeptosound.
Youcanspecifywhetherthearpeggiatorsettings
writtenintoeachprogramorcombinationwillalsobe
selectedwhenyouselectthatprogramorcombination,
orwhetherthearpeggiatorwillstayinitscurrentstate
withoutchangingsettings.
Protecting the memory
Withthefactorysettings,theformerwilloccur.You
canchoosethelatterbehaviorifyouwanttoplay
phrasesandpatternswithcertainarpeggiatorsettings
whileyouswitchonlythesoundbetweendifferent
programsorcombinations.
2. IfaMemoryProtectcheckboxisselected,the
correspondingwrite,dataload,orsongrecording
operationwillbedisabled,thusprotectingthe
contentsofmemory.
page.
110
Select the
mode that is
selected at
power-on
Preferencespage.
Global settings MIDI Settings
Other screen display settings (Edit

pad function and animation)
Youcankeeptheeditpad(seepage 4)orrealtime
controlpopup(seepage 6)fromappearing,and
disabletheanimationthatappearswhenapopupis
displayed.
Preferencespage.
2. IftheValueEditPopup,RealtimeControls
Popup,andAnimationcheckboxarecleared,
therespectivefunctionwillbedisabled.
Note: IftheKROMEisprocessinglargeamountsof
musicaldatasuchasfromthedrumtrackorsequencer,
therealtimecontrolpopupsoranimationeffectsmight
bedisabledautomaticallyinsomecases.
MIDI Clock synchronization

TheKROMEcanuseitsowninternaltempo,or
synchronizetoexternalclocksfromeitherMIDIor
USB.
ThebestgeneralpurposesettingisAuto.Thiscombine
thefunctionalityofInternalandExternalMIDI/USB,
sothatyoudonthavetomanuallyswitchbetweenthe
two:
Ifexternalclocksarebeingreceived,theycontrol
theKROMEtempo.
Ifexternalclocksarenotbeingreceived,the
KROMEusesitsinternaltempoinstead.
Synchronizing to a USB-connected computer

IfyouwanttosynchronizetheKROMEstempotoa
computerconnectedviaUSB:
1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpage.
MIDI Settings
Global MIDI
channel
Local
Control
on/off
MIDI clock
settings
2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIClockto
Auto.
Pedal and other controller

settings
IntheGlobalmodeP2:ControllersFootControllers
pageyoucanassignthefunctionsoftheassignable
buttonsandassignablepedals.(SeeConnectinga
damperpedal,footswitch,orfootpedalonpage 18.)
Assignable
button and
Assignable
Pedal settings
Global MIDI
filter settings
Global MIDI Channel

TheGlobalMIDIChannelisthemostimportantMIDI
relatedsettingintheKROME.Itdeterminesthemain
MIDIchannelusedforbothProgramandCombination
modes,forinstance.TosettheGlobalMIDIChannel:
1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIBasicpage.
2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIChannel
asdesired.
111
Creating user scales
Setting Category Names
TheGlobalP3:Scalespageletsyoucreateyourown
originalscales.YoucancreatesixteenUserOctave
Scaleswhichallowyoutospecifythepitchofeachnote
inanoctave(whichwillthenbeappliedacrossall
octaves),andyoucancreateoneUserAllNoteScale
whichallowsyoutoindividuallyspecifythepitchfor
everyoneofthe128notes.
IntheGlobalP4:Categorypagesyoucanassignnames
tothecategoriesandsubcategoriesofprogramsand
combinations.
Category
name
settings
Byadjustingthepitchofeachkeyintherangeof99
cents,youcanraiseorloweritbyapproximatelyone
semitonerelativetothenormalpitch.
Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeusedby
specifyingthescaleforaprogram,foreachtimbreofa
combination,orforeachtrackofasong.
User Octave
Scales select
Key lock
button
EditingtheCategory/subcategorynamesisvery
simple:
1. PresstheT(Text)buttonnexttothenameyoud
liketoedit.
Thetexteditingdialogwillappear.
2. Enterthenewname,andpressOK.
ToeditaSubCategoryname:
1. ChoosetheMainCategoryfromthepopupmenu.
2. EdittheSubCategorynamesasdescribedabove.
Youcanchoosethesescalesfromthefollowingpages.
Mode
Page
Program
P1: Basic/Controllers Note-On/Scale:

Scale
Combination
P3: Timbre Parameters Scale T0108/

T0916: Scale, Use Programs Scale
Sequencer
P3: Track Parameters Scale T0108/T09

16: Scale, Use Programs Scale
Hereishowtosetthescaletypeforeachtimbrein
Sequencermode.
1. Createauseroctavescaleorauserallnotesscale.
Selectakey,andusetheVALUEcontrollerstoadjust
thepitch.Therangeof99raisesorlowersthepitch
approximatelyonesemitoneaboveorbelowthe
standardpitch.
Note: Youcanalsoselectthekeybyholdingdownthe
ENTERbuttonandplayinganoteonthekeyboard.
Alternatively,youcanturnonthekeylockbuttonand
thenplayanoteonthekeyboard.
Note: Youcancopyoneofthepresetscalesandeditit
tocreateanoriginalscale.Todoso,usethepagemenu
commandCopyScale.
2. AccesstheSequencermodeP3:TrackParameters
OtherT0108orT0916page.
3. IfyouwanttheTracktousethescalesavedwith
itsindividualProgram,checkthetracksUse
ProgramsScalecheckbox.
Tracksthatarenotcheckedwillusethescalespecified
byScaleType(SongsScale).
4. SetType(SongsScale)toselectthescaleforthe
currentlyselectedsong.
112
Loading & saving data

Saving data
Saving data on the KROME
YoucansavetheKROMEsvarioustypesofdatainthe
followingways.
Writingtointernalmemory
SavingtoanSDcard(commerciallyavailable)
MIDIdatadump
Writing to internal memory
About preloaded data and preset data

Preloadeddatareferstothedatathatisloadedinthe
KROMEwhenitisshippedfromthefactory.Youare
freetorewritethisdata,andwiththeexceptionofthe
demosongs,thedatawillbewrittentothelocationas
describedinWritingtointernalmemory.Thisdatais
storedintheKROMEssystemarea.
Youcanreloadthefactorypreloaddataintointernal
memorybyusingtheGlobalmodemenucommand
LoadPreload/DemoData.
Thefollowingtypesofdatacanbewrittenintothe
internalmemory.
Presetdata,ontheotherhand,isdatathatcannotbe
overwrittenbytheWriteoperation.Thisincludesthe
followingdata.
Program
Programs000127inbanksAF
GMdrumkits48(GM)56(GM)
Combination
Combinations000127inbanksAD
Globalsettings
(GlobalP0:BasicSetupP4:Category)
Userdrumkits
00(INT)47(USER)
Userarpeggiopatterns
U0000(INT)U1027(USER)
UserDrumTrackpatterns
U000U999
(Seepage 97)
UsertemplatesongsU00U15
Songsettingssuchasthesongnameandtempo,
tracksettings(seepage 106oftheParameter
Guide),arpeggiator,andeffectsettingscanbe
saved(written)tointernalmemory.However,the
musicaldataforsongtracksandpatternsarenot
savedtointernalmemory.Furthermore,settings
thatgovernhowthemusicaldataisplayedback
suchasMeter,Metronome,PLAY/MUTE,Track
PlayLoop(includingStart/Endmeasure),and
RPPRsettingswillnotbesavedeither.Usethe
SequencermodemenucommandSaveTemplate
Songtowritethisdata;fordetails,pleasesee
Effectpresets
Foreacheffect,youcanwriteparametersettings
intointernalmemorybyusingthemenucommand
WriteFXPreset.
Themusicaldataandsetupdataofasongyou
createinSequencermodecannotbesavedinthe
KROMEsinternalmemory.Youllneedtosave
thisdatatoacommerciallyavailableSDcardorby
usingMIDIdatadump.
GMprogrambanksGM,g(1)g(9),g(d)
PresettemplatesongsP00P15
PresetpatternsP000P605
Saving to SD card
ThefollowingdatacanbesavedtoanSDcard
(commerciallyavailable)insertedintheKROMEsSD
cardslot.
.PCGfile:
Programs,Combinations,Drumkits,Global
settings,userDrumTrackpatterns,anduser
arpeggiopatterns(Thedatathatwascheckedinthe
checkboxesoftheSavedialogboxwillbesaved.)
.SNGfile:
Songandcuelist.
.EXLfile:
Systemexclusivedatafromanexternaldevicethat
wassavedontheKROME(ThisallowstheKROME
tobeusedasadatafiler.)
.MIDfile:
SavesaSequencermodesonginStandardMIDI
File(SMF)format.
(Seetheillustrationonthefollowingpage.)
MIDI data dump

TheKROMEcantransmitthefollowingtypesofdata
asaMIDIdatadump;youcansavethisdataonan
externaldatafilerorotherdevice.
Programs,combinations,drumkits,andglobal
settings
Songandcuelist
Userdrumkitpatterns
Userarpeggiopattern
Fordetails,pleaseseeDump:onpage 218ofthe
ParameterGuide.
113
Supportedfiletypes
DOS files
.PCG file
All programs
1 program
bank A...F
1 program
All combinations
1 combination
bank A...D
1 combination
All drum kits

User
1 drum kit
bank INT, USER
1 drum kit
DOS directory
Undefined DOS file
All user
1 user
arpeggio patterns arpeggiopattern
bank INT, USER
All drum track

patterns
1 drum track
pattern
Global settings
DOS files
.SNG file
Cue list
.MID file
1 song
(S000-127)
All track
.EXL file
1 user pattern
(U0099)
114
Saving data Writing to internal memory
Writing to internal memory

Writing a Program or Combination
About the Program and Combination edit
buffer
WhenyouselectaprograminProgP0:Playora
combinationinCombiP0:Play,theprogramor
combinationdataiscalledintotheKROMEsedit
buffer.
WhenyouthenusethevariousProgramor
Combinationpagestoedittheparameters,your
changeswillaffectthedataintheeditbuffer.
Acombinationdoesnotcontaintheactual
programdataforeachtimbre,butsimply
referencesthenumberoftheprogramusedby
eachtimbre.Ifyoueditaprogramthatisusedbya
combination,orexchangeitwithadifferent
programnumber,thesoundofthecombination
willalsochange,reflectingthealteredprogram.
1. Verifythattheprogramorcombinationyouwant
tosaveisselected.
Alternatively,pressthepagemenubuttonintheupper
rightofthedisplay,andselectthemenucommand
WriteProgramorWriteCombination.
TheWriteProgramorWriteCombinationdialogbox
willappear.
Ifyouwishtosavethismodifieddataintointernal
memory,youmustperformtheWriteoperation.
WhenyouperformtheWriteoperation,thedatainthe
editbufferiswrittentothespecifiedprogramor
combinationnumberofthespecifiedbank.
Ifyouselectanotherprogramorcombinationwithout
writingyouredits,thedataofthenewlyselected
programorcombinationwilloverwritetheediteddata
intheeditbuffer,andyourchangeswillbelost.
Note: WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREbuttonin
Programmode,orCombinationmode,thedatafrom
memory(i.e.,thecontentsthatwerewritteninto
memory)willbetemporarilycalledintotheeditbuffer.
Thisallowsyoutocomparethesettingsyouareediting
withtheoriginaluneditedsettings.
Editing applies to the data in the edit
buffer. Programs or combinations will
play according to the data in the edit
buffer.
When you write, the
program or combination
settings will be saved in
internal memory.
Edit
Edit Buffer
Write
Select
When you select a program

or combination, its data is
called from internal memory
into the edit buffer.
Internal Memory
Program
A 0...127
Combination
A 0...127
ThisscreenshotisforProgrammode
3. Checktheprogram/combinationnamedisplayed
intheupperline(thewritingsource).
4. Ifyouwishtochangethenameoftheprogram/
combination,pressthetexteditbutton.
Thetextdialogboxwillappear.Enterthenameofthe
program/combination.Fordetails,pleaseseeEditing
namesonpage 117.
Afteryouhaveenteredthename,presstheOKbutton
toreturntotheWriteProgram/WriteCombination
dialogbox.
5. InCategory,specifythecategoryoftheProgram/
Combination.
6. SelectaSubCategoryaswell.
Forcombinations,thecategoryandsubcategoryyou
specifyherecanbeselectedinthefollowingpages.
Writing (saving) procedure
ProgP0:Play
Category
CombiP0:PlayProgramT0108,0916
Category
TheProgramandCombinationsettingsyouvemade
inthevariouseditingpagescanbesavedtointernal
memory.Thisactionisreferredtoaswritinga
programorwritingaCombination.Ifyouwant
yourediteddatatobepreservedafterthepoweris
turnedoff,youmustperformaWriteoperation.
SeqP0:Play/RECProgramT0108,0916
Category
TherearetwowaystowriteaProgramor
Combination.
CombiP0:PlayProgramT0108,0916
Category
UsetheWRITEbutton.
7. UseTotospecifythebankandnumberofthe
writingdestinationprogram/combination.
UsetheWriteProgramorWriteCombination
menucommandsintheupperrightofthedisplay.
Beforeyoucanwritedataintomemory,youmust
turnoffthememoryprotectsettinginGlobal
mode.
Fordetails,pleaseseeMemoryprotecton
page 117.
ForPrograms,thecategory/subcategoryyouspecify
herecanbeselectedinthefollowingpages.
UsetheVALUEcontrollersortheBANKbuttonsto
makeyourselection.
8. ToexecutetheWriteoperation,presstheWRITE
button.
Alternatively,presstheOKbuttonintheWritedialog
box.
115
TocancelwithoutexecutingpresstheCancelbuttonor
EXITbutton.
About the Tone Adjust settings that are

saved
TherearethreetypesofToneAdjustparameters,as
listedbelow.Thewayinwhichsettingsarewrittenwill
dependonthetype.
Absolute:ThistypeofToneAdjustparameter
controlsasingleprogramparameter.TheProgram
parameterandtheToneAdjustparameterreflect
eachotherexactly.Ifyoueditone,theother
parameterwillreflecttheidenticalchange.This
typeofToneAdjustparameterabsolutely
controlstheprogramparameteritself.
Relative:ThistypeofToneAdjustparameter
controlstwoormoreprogramparameters
simultaneously.Forexample,Filter/AmpEG
AttackTimecontrolsatotalofsixprogram
parameters.Thevalueofarelativeparameter
indicatestheamountofchangethatisappliedto
thevalueofeachprogramparameteritsaffecting.
Whenarelativeparameterisatzero(i.e.,whenits
sliderisinthecenterposition),theprogram
parametersitcontrolswillfunctionaccordingto
theiroriginalsettings.Raisingorloweringthevalue
ofarelativeparameterwillindirectlyraiseorlower
thevalueoftheseprogramparameters.
Meta:ThistypeofToneAdjustparameteraffects
otherToneAdjustparameters.Itdoesnotaffect
programparametersdirectly.
IfyouveadjustedanabsoluteorarelativeToneAdjust
parameter,theresultofyouradjustmentwillbe
writtenasfollows.
Program mode:
ThesettingsofrelativetypeToneAdjust
parametersareautomaticallyapplieddirectlytothe
programparameterswhenyouwritetheprogram.
TheToneAdjustvalueswillberesettozero.
ThesettingsofabsolutetypeToneAdjust
parametersarewrittenasthemselves(i.e.,asthe
newsettingsofthoseToneAdjustparameters).
Combination mode:
Thesettingsofbothrelativetypeandabsolutetype
ToneAdjustparametersarewrittenandpreserved
astheToneAdjustsettingsforeachtimbre.
Fordetails,pleaseseepages7,75oftheParameter
Guide.
Writing Global settings, User Drum

Kits and User Arpeggio Patterns
Memory in Global mode
Whenthepoweristurnedon,theGlobalmodedatais
calledfrominternalmemoryintotheGlobalmode
memoryarea.Thenwhenyoumodifytheparameters
inGlobalmode,thedatainthememoryareawillbe
modified.Ifyouwishtosavethismodifieddatain
internalmemory,youmustWriteit.
Whenyouwritethisdata,thedatainthememoryarea
iswrittenintointernalmemory.
Ifyouturnoffthepowerwithoutwriting,themodified
datainthememoryareawillbelost.
Editing will affect the data that has
been called into the memory area.
When you Write, the

various Global mode
settings will be saved in
internal memory.
Edit
Memory Area
Write
When the power is

turned on, the settings
Power On are called into the
memory area.
Internal Memory
Global Setting
P0...P4
Drum Kits
P5
Arpeggio Patterns
P6
Writing (saving) procedure

ThefollowingthreetypesofGlobalmodedatacanbe
savedbywritingitintotheKROMEsmemory.
Globalsettings(thesettingsinGlobalP0P4)
Drumkits(thesettingsinGlobalP5)
Arpeggiopatterns(thesettingsinGlobalP6)
Changesyoumaketothisdatawillberememberedas
longasthepowerremainson,butwillbelostwhen
youturnoffthepower.Ifyouwanttokeepyour
changesevenafterturningthepoweroff,youmust
writethemintomemory.
Thefollowingareexceptions.
ParametersthatarenotsavedevenifyouWrite
EffectGlobalSW
ParametersthataresavedevenifyoudontWrite
AutoPowerOff
1. Accessthepagethatcontainstheparametersor
settingsthatyouwanttosave.
ChooseoneoftheP0P4pagesifyouwanttowrite
globalsettings,chooseP5ifyouwanttowritedrum
kits,orchooseP6ifyouwanttowritearpeggio
patterns.
Alternatively,pressthepagemenubuttonintheupper
rightofthedisplay,andchooseWriteGlobalSetting,
WriteDrumKits,orWriteArpeggioPatterns.The
correspondingoneofthefollowingdialogboxeswill
appear.
WriteGlobalSettingdialogbox(P0P4)
116
Saving data Editing names
WriteDrumKitsdialogbox(P5)
Editing names
Youcanmodifythenameofaneditedprogram,
combination,song,drumkit,oruserarpeggiopatterns
etc.
WriteArpeggioPatternsdialogbox(P6)
Youcanalsomodifythecategorynamesforprograms
andcombinations.
Theserenamingprocedurescanbeperformedinthe
followingpages.
Item
Page
Program
Prog P09 menu command:

Write Program
3. ToexecutetheWritecommand,presstheWRITE
button.
Combination
Combi P09 menu command:

Write Combination
Alternatively,presstheOKbuttonintheWritedialog
box.
Song
Seq P05 menu command:

Rename Song
Track
Seq P6: Track Name
Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheEXITbuttonor
theCancelbutton.
Memory protect
TopreventPrograms,Combinations,Songs,Drum
Kits,andUserArpeggioPatternsfrombeing
overwrittenaccidentally,theKROMEprovidesa
MemoryProtectsettingthatprohibitswritingto
memory.
Pattern
Seq P10: Pattern Name
Cue list
Seq P11: menu command: Rename

Cue List
Program category/
sub category
Global P4: Program Category
Combination category/
Global P4: Combination Category
sub category
Drum Kit
Global P5 menu command:

Rename Drum Kit
Beforeyousaveediteddataorloaddatafrommedia,
usethefollowingproceduretoturnthememory
protectoff(unchecktheappropriatecheckbox).
Arpeggio Pattern
Global P6 menu command:

Rename Arpeggio Pattern
Youmustalsoturnmemoryprotectoffbeforeloading
theabovedatafrommediaorviaaMIDIdatadump,
orbeforerecordinginSequencermode.
File
Media Save: Save AllSave Exclusive,

Media Utility menu command:
Rename, Create Directory, Format
Seq P0P11:
Save Songs and Cue Lists Data
1. PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode.
Effect preset
Prog, Combi, Seq P8, 9 menu

command: Write FX Preset
2. AccesstheGlobalP0:BasicSetupSystem
Preferencespage.
1. Inthepageslistedabove,orafterselectingamenu
commandinthesepages,pressthetexteditbutton
toaccessthetexteditdialogbox.
Text
Cursor
Character Set Selects

the type of character.
Character
buttons
3. PresstheMemoryProtectcheckboxforthetype
ofdatayouwishtowritetointernalmemory,so
thattheboxisunchecked.
Cursor buttons
Move the cursor
to left or right.
Space button
Insert a space at
the cursor location.
Delete button
Deletes the
character to the
left of the cursor.
Clear button
Delete all characters
of the text.
Shift button
Switches
between
uppercase and
lowercase
characters.
Cancel button, OK button
If you are satisfied with the text
that you input, press the OK
button. If you wish to discard
your input and exit the text edit
box, press the Cancel button.
117
Saving to SD card (Media

Save)
Fordetailsonthedatathatcanbesavedonstorage
media.Fordetails,pleaseseeSavingdataon
page 113.
ThemusicaldataofasongyoucreateinSequencer
modecannotbesavedintheKROMEsinternal
memory.Youmustsavethisdataona
commerciallyavailableSDcard,orsaveitusing
MIDIdatadump.Whenyouvecomeupwith
settingsyoulike,itsagoodideatosavethem,so
thatevenifyousubsequentlyeditthosesettings,
youllalwaysbeabletoreloadtheprevious
settingsifdesired.
Types of SD card you can use

SD card specifications
SDmemorycardsupto2GBandSDHCmemorycards
upto32GBaresupported.
SDXCmemorycardsarenotsupported.
MSDOSformatFAT16orFAT32aresupported.
Mediaisnotincluded.Youwillneedtopurchaseit
separately.
Inserting/removing a card in the SD

card slot
IfyouveplacedanSDcardintheSDcardslot,youcan
useittosaveorloadvarioustypesofProgram,
Combination,andSongdata.
About the write protect setting of an SD card

SDcardshaveawriteprotectswitchthatpreventsthe
datafrombeingoverwrittenaccidentallyandlost.If
yousetthecardsLock(writeprotect)switchtothe
protectedsetting,itwillbeimpossibletowriteor
erasedataonthecard,ortoformatit.Ifyouneedto
saveediteddataonthecard,movetheswitchbackto
itsoriginalunprotectedsetting.
Inserting a card
InsertanSDcardintheSDcardslot.
Withthecardlabelfacingupward,inserttheconnector
endofthecardintotheSDcardslotandpressitin
untilyouhearaclick.
SD card slot
SD card
Makesurethatthecardisorientedcorrectlywhen
youinsertit.Forcingitinthewrongdirectionmay
damagetheslotorthecard,andthedatamaybe
lost.
118
Removing a card
NeverremoveanSDcardfromtheslotwhile
loading,saving,orformattingisinprogress.
RemovethecardfromtheSDcardslot.
Pressthecardinward;youwillhearaclick,andthe
cardwillpopoutpartway,allowingyoutopullit
completelyout.
Refertotheownersmanualincludedwithyour
card,andobservetheguidelinesforhandlingand
use.
Formatting media
SomeconsumerelectronicsproductsthatuseSDcards
utilizetheirownproprietaryformat.Beforeusingan
SDcardwiththeKROME,youmustformatitonthe
KROME(seepage 123).
How to save data

Asanexamplehere,wellexecuteSaveAlltosavethe
.PCGand.SNGfiles.
SaveAllsavesallinternalmemoryPrograms,
Combinations,Globalsettings,DrumKits,User
ArpeggioPatterns,andDrumTrackUserPatternsto
mediaasa.PCGfile.Italsosavessongsandcuelistsas
a.SNGfile.
Thismethodisavailableonlyifthecurrentdirectoryis
aDOSdirectory.
Ifyousavethisdatatolowcapacitymedia,you
mayneedmorethanonemedia.
1. Preparethemediaonwhichyouwanttosavethe
data.
2. PresstheMEDIAbuttontoenterMediamode.
3. AccesstheMediaSavepage.PresstheSavetab.
4. Ifthemediacontainsdirectories,selectthe
directoryinwhichyouwanttosavethedata.
PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevel,or
presstheUpbuttontomovetoanupperlevel.
Note: Ifyouaresavingdataonhighcapacitymedia,
werecommendthatyoucreatedirectoriestoorganize
themediaintosections.
Tocreateanewdirectory,movetothelevelatwhich
youwanttocreatethedirectory,andexecutetheUtility
menucommandCreateDirectory.
5. Pressthemenubuttontoaccessthemenu,and
pressSaveAll.
Adialogboxwillappear.Thecontents,settings,and
operationsforthedialogboxwilldependonthetype
ofdatathatyouaresaving.
Saving data Using the KROME as a data filer
6. Pressthetexteditbuttonandinputafilenamefor
thefileyouwanttosave.(Seepage 117.)
Cautions when saving
7. PresseachSelectionbuttontoaccessthedialog
box,andusethecheckboxestouncheckanyitems
thatyoudonotneedtosave.
If an identically named file exists on the media
Inordertoaccuratelyreproducethedatayoucreated,
werecommendthatyoucheckalloftheboxes.
Whenyouvefinishedmakingsettings,presstheOK
buttontoclosethedialogbox.
8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSaveoperation.
Ifthedatafitsononevolumeofmedia
Thedatawillbesavedonthespecifiedmedia,and
youwillreturntotheSavepage.
Ifthedatadoesnotfitononevolumeofmedia
TheNospaceavailableonmediadialogboxwill
appear.
PresstheOKbuttonandthefilewillbedividedand
savedtomultiplevolumesofmedia.Ifyoudontwant
todividethefile,presstheCancelbutton,andresave
ittolargercapacitymedia.
Fordetails,pleaseseeIfthedatabeingsaveddoesnot
fitononevolumeofmediaonpage 231ofthe
ParameterGuide.
9. WhensavingendsandyoureturntotheSave
page,thedisplaywillshowthefilethatwassaved.
Ifafilewiththesamenamealreadyexistsonthe
media,youwillbeaskedwhetheryouwantto
overwrite.Ifyouwishtooverwrite,presstheOK
button.Ifyouwanttosavewithoutoverwriting,press
theCancelbuttonandrenamethefilebeforeyousave
it.Fordetails,pleaseseeEditingnamesonpage 117.
Please note when saving

WhenusingSaveAll(PCG&SNG),andSave
PCGtosavecombinations,youshouldalso
remembertosavetheprogramsusedbyeach
timbre(orthedrumkits,anduserarpeggio
patternsusedbytheprograms)atthesametime.
Similarlywhensavingprograms,youshouldalso
remembertosavethedrumkits,userdrumtrack
patternsanduserarpeggiopatternsusedbythe
programs.
Time required when saving data

Thelengthoftimerequiredwilldependonthe
amountofdatabeingsaved.
Using the KROME as a data

filer
TheKROMEcanreceiveMIDISystemExclusivedata
sentbyanexternaldevice,andsavethisdatatomedia.
(ThisissometimesreferredtoastheDataFiler
function.)Fordetails,pleaseseeSaveExclusiveon
Thevarioustypesofdataaresavedasthefollowing
files.
.PCGfile
.SNGfile
119
Loading data
Data that can be loaded
Loading data from SD card

(MediaLoad)
Loading from media

Youcanloadthefollowingdatafrommedia.
.PCGfile:
Programs,Combinations,DrumKits,Global
settings,UserArpeggioPatterns,andUserDrum
Trackpatterns
.SNGfile:
Songandcuelist.
.MIDfile:
StandardMIDIfile(SMF)format
.EXLfile:
MIDIexclusivedata
Loading the preloaded data and

demo songs to restore the factory
settings
Loading all Programs, Combinations,

Drum Kits and Arpeggio patterns
Herewellexplainhowtoloadalldatafroma.PCGfile
containingPrograms,Combinations,Drumkits,
Globalsettings,UserArpeggiopatterns,andDrum
Trackpatternsinasingleoperation.
WhenloadingPrograms,Combinations,Songs,or
DrumKits,youmustmakesurethattheGlobal
modememoryprotectsettingisunchecked.For
details,pleaseseeMemoryprotectonpage 117.
Note: Pleaseseepage 117fordetailsontheSDcard
fromwhichyoucanloaddata.
1. Makesurethatthemediaisreadyforyoutoload
data.Fordetails,pleaseseeInserting/removinga
cardintheSDcardslotonpage 118.
2. AccesstheMediaLoadpage.PresstheLoadtab.
Youcanloadthefactorysettingsanddemosongsback
intotheKROMEsinternalmemory.Fortheprocedure,
pleaseseeLoadingthepreloadeddataonpage 125.
3. Pressthe.PCGfilecontainingtheprogramand
combinationdatayouwanttoload,sothatthefile
ishighlighted.
Preloaddata:
Programs,Combinations,DrumKits,Global
settings,UserArpeggioPatterns
Iftherearedirectories,presstheOpenbuttonto
movetoalowerlevel,orpresstheUpbuttonto
movebacktothehigherlevel.
Demosongdata
4. PresstheLoadbutton.Alternatively,choosethe
menucommandLoadSelected.
5. Ifyouwanttoloadsongdataatthesametime,
selecttheLoad********.SNGtoobox.Whenyou
executetheloadoperation,the.SNGfilewillbe
loadedtogetherwiththe.PCGfile.
UseSelect.SNGAllocationtospecifythedestination
towhichthesongdatawillbeloaded.
120
Loading data Loading data from SD card (MediaLoad)
Appendwillloadthesongintothesongnumberthat
followsthesong(s)currentlyexistingininternal
memory,withoutleavingavacantnumber.
Clearwilleraseallsongsfrominternalmemory,and
loadthesongsintothenumbersfromwhichtheywere
saved.
6. PresstheOKbutton.Alldatafromthe.PCGfile
willbeloadedintotheKROME.
Neverremovethemediawhiledataisbeing
loaded.
Note: Youcanloadindividualbanksofprogramsor
combinations.Fordetails,pleaseseepage 228and
followingoftheParameterGuide.
Loading individual data from a .PCG

file
TheKROMEletsyouloadPrograms,Combinations,
Drumkits,userDrumKitpatterns,UserArpeggio
patternsindividuallyorbyindividualbanks.Thisisa
convenientwaytorearrangeCombinationsinthe
orderinwhichyouwillusethemduringalive
performance.
BeawarethatifyouchangetheorderofPrograms,
thesoundsplayedbyCombinationsmayalsobe
affected.
Asanexamplehere,wewillexplainhowa
combinationsavedinbankAcanbeloadedintoD000.
1. MovetotheBankAdirectory,andselectthe
Combinationthatyouwanttoload.(.PCGfile/
Combinations/BankA/)
Theprocedureisasfollows:
Performsteps13underLoadingallPrograms,
Combinations,DrumKitsandArpeggiopatterns
onpage 120.Selectthe.PCGfilecontainingthedata
youwanttoload(itwillbehighlighted),andpress
theOpenbutton.
3. UsetheCombination(upperline)toselectthe
loadsourcecombination,anduse(To)
Combination(lowerline)tospecifythe
destinationcombination.Forthisexample,select
D000.
Youcanpressthepopupbuttonandselectfroma
menu,orusetheBANKbuttonsandnumerickeysto
makeaselection.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteloading;theloaded
combinationwillbeassignedtoD000.
Loading songs for use in Sequencer

mode (.SNG)
Asanexamplehere,wewillexplainhowtoloada
song.Wellassumethatthissongusesedited
programs,multisamplesyousampledandprograms
thatusedrumkitanduserarpeggiopatternsetc.In
suchcases,itisbesttoloadalldata.
1. Performsteps13underLoadingallPrograms,
Combinations,DrumKitsandArpeggiopatterns
onpage 120.Selectthe.SNGfilecontainingthe
datayouwanttoload(itwillbehighlighted).
PressCombinationstohighlightit,andpressthe
Openbutton.
PressBankAtohighlightit,andpresstheOpen
button.
PressthescrollbartofindtheCombinationyou
wanttoload,andhighlightit.
Alternatively,youcouldselectanyfile,sincethe
desiredfilecanbeselectedlaterfromthedialogbox.
Note: Thecontentsandsettingsofthedialogboxwill
differdependingonthetypeoffilethatyouare
loading.
3. ChecktheLoad********.PCGtoocheckbox.
Whenyouexecuteloading,the.PCGfilewillbeloaded
alongwiththe.SNGfile.
UseSelect.SNGAllocationtospecifythedestination
towhichthesongdatawillbeloaded.
Appendwillloadthesongintothesongnumberthat
followsthesong(s)currentlyexistingininternal
memory,withoutleavingavacantnumber.
Note: WhenyoupressthekeyboardoftheKROME,
youwillhearthecombinationyouhaveselected.
However,theinternalprogramswillbeusedasthe
programofeachtimbre.
Clearwilleraseallsongsfrominternalmemory,and
loadthesongsintothenumbersfromwhichtheywere
saved.
121
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteloading.
Neverremovethemediawhiledataisbeing
loaded.
Loading KROME system update data

YoucanupdatetheKROMEssystembydownloading
themostrecentversionofthesystemfilefromthe
Korgwebsite(http://www.korg.com)toyour
computer,andloadingitintotheKROME.Fordetails
ontheprocedure,pleaseseetheKorgwebsiteandto
UpdateSystemSoftwareonpage 218ofthe
ParameterGuide.
UsetheGlobalmodemenucommandUpdateSystem
Softwaretoloadthesystemupdatedata.
122
Media utility Formatting media
Media utility
Formatting media
Setting the current time
Newlypurchasedmediaormediathathasbeenused
byanotherdevicecannotbeusedasis;youmust
formatthemediabeforeyoucanuseitwiththe
KROME.
Specifythedateandtime;thisisusedtorecordthe
correctdateandtimewhenyousavedata.Youcanset
thedateandtimebyusingtheMediaUtilitypagesSet
Date/Timemenucommand.
Whenyouformatmedia,alldatathathadbeen
savedonthatmediawillbeerased.Besureto
doublecheckmediafordatabeforeyouformat.
Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe
COMPAREbuttontoreturntothepreviousstate.
1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis
inserted.Fordetails,pleaseseeInserting/
removingacardintheSDcardslotonpage 118.
2. AccesstheMediaUtilitypage.PresstheUtility
tab.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendar
orclock,youmustusetheUtilitymenucommand
SetDate/Timetosetthedateandtimebefore
savingthefile.
1. PresstheMEDIAbuttontoenterMediamode.
2. AccesstheMediaUtilitypage.PresstheUtility
tab.
3. Openthemenu,andselecttheSetDate/Time
command.
Thefollowingdialogboxwillappear.
3. Pressthemenubuttontoaccessthemenu,and
pressFormattoopenthedialogbox.
4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstosetthecorrectyear,
month,day,hour,minute,andsecond.
4. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttonto
accessthetexteditdialogbox,andspecifythe
volumelabel.
5. PresstheOKbutton.
Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbe
displayed.Ifnovolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedforthe
media,orifanonDOSmediawasinserted,thiswill
indicateNEWVOLUME.
5. Specifytheinitializationformat.
QuickFormat:Thiserasesthefileinformationonthe
SDcard,allowingthecardtobeformattedquickly.
Normallyyoullusethismethodofformatting.
FullFormat:Allblocksonthemediawillbeerased.
Normally,thereisnoneedtoapplyaFullFormat;you
shouldsimplyexecuteQuickFormat.
6. PresstheOKbuttontoformat,orpresstheCancel
buttonifyoudecidetocancel.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,amessagewillaskyou
forconfirmation.PresstheOKbuttononceagainto
executetheFormatoperation.
YoumustusetheKROMEtoformatthemedia.
TheKROMEwillnotcorrectlyrecognizemedia
thathasbeenformattedbyanotherdevice.
123
124
Appendices
Restoring the factory settings
Loading the preloaded data
TheoriginalpreloaddataisbackedupintheKROME,
soyoucanrestoreanyorallofthePrograms,
Combinations,DrumKits,UserArpeggioPatterns,
andGlobalsettingstotheiroriginalfactorysettings.
Note: Theoriginaldemosongscanbereloadedatany
time.Fordetails,pleaseseeAboutthedataloadedby
All(PreloadPCGandDemoSongs).
Userbanksanduserpatternsintowhichpreloaddata
hasnotbeenloadedwillremainunchanged.Ifyou
wanttoeraseuserbanksoruserpatterns,initializethe
KROMEandthenloadthepreloaddata.Formore
details,pleaseseeInitializationonpage 125.
Neverturnoffthepowerwhilethedataisbeing
loaded.
Beforeyouloadthepreloaddata,gototheGlobal
modeP0:BasicSetupSystemPreferencespage,
andunchecktheMemoryProtectsettingsforthe
datathatyouwanttoload.Ifyouexecutethis
procedurewiththesesettingschecked,thedata
willnotbeloaded.
Loadingthepreloadeddatawilloverwritethe
contentsoftheinternalmemory.Ifyouwantto
keeptheexistingdatathatisstoredininternal
memory,useSaveAll(PCG&SNG)orSave
PCGtosaveyourdatatoexternalmediabefore
youcontinue.
page.
EnterGlobalmodebypressingtheGLOBALbutton
orbyusingthemodebutton.
IftheGlobalP0:BasicSetupBasicpageisnot
shown,presstheEXITbutton.
2. Pressthemenubutton,andchooseLoadPreload/
DemoData.
3. IntheKindfield,selectAll(PreloadPCGand
DemoSongs).
4. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthepreloaddata.If
youdecidenottoloadthepreloaddata,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,adialogboxwillask
youforconfirmation.PresstheOKbuttontoexecute
loading.
Note: Whenthedialogboxisdisplayed,theENTER
buttonperformsthesamefunctionastheOKbutton.
About the data loaded by All (Preload PCG

and Demo Songs)
WhenyouexecuteAllPreloadPCG,thefollowingdata
willbeloaded:
Program:BankA,B,C,D,E
Combination:BankA,B,C
DrumKit:00(INT)31(INT)
UserArpeggioPattern:U0000(INT)U899(INT)
GlobalSetting
IfyouexecuteAll(PreloadPCGandDemoSongs),the
demosongswillbeloadedaswellastheabovedata.
DemoSong:S000003
OnlywhenexecutingAll(PreloadPCGandDemo
Song)
Note: Aswiththeotherusersongs,theDemoSong
datawillnotremaininSequencermodewhenyouturn
offthepower.Youllneedtoloaditagainifnecessary.
Initialization
IfyourKROMEshouldbecomeunstable,youcan
initializeit.
Turnoffthepower,andthen,whileholdingdown
theEXITbuttonandPAGEbutton,turnthepower
on.
TheKROMEwillbeinitialized.Whilethedatais
beingloaded,thedisplaywillindicateNowwrit
ingintointernalmemory.
TheresultingstatewillbethesameaswhenLoad
Preload/DemoDataAllisexecuted(seepage 125).
125
Appendices
Troubleshooting
Ifyouexperienceproblems,pleaseseetherelevant
itemandtaketheappropriatemeasures.
1. PresstheGLOBALbutton(lit).
2. PresstheEXITbuttonseveraltimes.
3. HolddowntheENTERbuttonandpress4onthe
numerickeypad.
Power supply
Power does not turn on
TheTouchPanelCalibrationpagewillappear.Follow
theonscreeninstructionstorecalibratethetouch
panel.
IstheACadapterconnectedtoanoutlet? p.15
Cant switch modes or pages
Power turns off
Ifyouredoinganyofthefollowing,youmaynotbe
abletochangemodesorswitchtoadifferentpage:
CouldtheAutoPowerOfffunctionbeenabled? p.16
Display
The power is turned on, but nothing is shown
on the display. The KROME functions normally when you play the keyboard or perform
other procedures.
AccesstheGlobalmodemenuDisplaySetup(Global
P0:BasicSetup),anduseBrightnesstoadjustthe
contrastofthedisplay. PG p.216
The power is turned on, but the display does

not work normally, or an error message is displayed. There is no sound when you play the
keyboard, and the KROME does not function
normally.
CouldsomethingbepressingtheTouchViewdisplay?
Couldarealtimecontrolpopuporsimilarmessagebe
displayed?
DisablingAnimation,ValueEditPopup,
REALTIMECONTROLSPopup(GlobalP0:
BasicSetupSystemPreferences)willimprovethe
responsetimeandperformance.
In Combination, or Sequencer modes, you

cant edit the value of Timbre/Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or Status
Someparameterscantbeeditedwhilenotesare
playing,eitherlocallyorfromMIDI.Ifthedamper
pedalishelddown,orifitscalibrationisincorrect,
notesmaybesustainingeveniftheyarentaudible.
Thistypeofproblemmayoccurifadatawriting
operationtointernalmemorywasnotcompleted
correctly,forexample,ifthepoweroftheKROMEwas
turnedoffwhileaprogramorotherdatawasbeing
written.Ifthisoccurs,usethefollowingprocedureto
initializetheKROMEsinternalmemory.
Areyouusingadamperpedalwithapolaritythat
doesnotmatchtheDamperPolaritysetting(Global
P2:ControllersFootControllers)? p.18
1. Turnoffthepower.
No beep sounds when you touch the display
2. InitializetheKROME.Whileholdingdownthe
EXITbuttonandthePAGEbuttonlocatedbeside
it,turnonthepoweroftheKROME.
TheKROMEwillbeinitialized,anddatawillbe
writtenintointernalmemory.Whilethedatais
beingwritten,thedisplaywillindicateNowwrit
ingintointernalmemory.
Afterinitialization,alluserdatawillbeempty,and
youwillneedtoreloadthepreloaddata.Execute
theGlobalmodemenucommandLoadPreload/
DemoDatatoloadthedata. p.125
Operations in the display dont work, the position has drifted, the response is poor
OntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,usetheTouch
PanelCalibrationmenucommandtoadjustthetouch
panelresponse. PG p.217
126
Recordingorplayingbackasongorpattern.
Alternatively,couldtheKROMEbeinthepaused
PAUSE( )orrecordreadycondition?
Insomecases,thisproblemcanbesolvedbe
executingthemenucommandHalfDamper
Calibration(GlobalP0:BasicSetup). PG p.217
ChecktheBeepEnablecheckbox(GlobalP0:Basic
SetupSystemPreferences). p.110
Audio output
No sound
Areconnectionsmadecorrectlytoyouramp,mixer,or
headphones? p.17
Istheconnectedampormixerpoweredon,andisits
volumeraised?
IsLocalControlturnedon?
InGlobalP1:MIDI,checktheLocalControlOn
checkbox. PG p.198
CouldtheVOLUMEknobbeturnedallthewaytothe
left? p.1
Inordertoperformthecalibrationoptimally,usea
styluspentoaccuratelypressthecenterofthesymbol
(calibrationtarget)thatappearsinthecornerofthe
display.
Couldtheprogrambemuted? p.27
Note: Ifyouareunabletoselectcommandsfromthe
menu,dothefollowing:
IfaspecifictimbredoesntsoundinCombination
mode,isitsPlay/MutebuttonsettoPlay?
IstheMasterVolumeassignedtoFootPedalAssign,
andisthatpedalvolumelowered? p.19
Troubleshooting Programs and Combinations
Alternatively,areallSolobuttonsettingsturnedoff?
p.46
IfaspecifictrackdoesntsoundinSequencermode,is
itsPlay/Rec/MutebuttonsettoPlay?Alternatively,are
allSolobuttonsettingsturnedoff? p.55
MakesurethattheStatusisINTorBTH. p.50,p.57
AretheKeyZoneandVelocityZonesetsothatsound
willbeproducedwhenyouplay? PG p.14,p.84,
p.129
IstheOscillator,DrumTrack,Timbre,orTracklevel
loweredinthecontrolsurfacemixer? p.27,p.46,p.55
CouldtheleveloftheMasterVolumefollowingthe
totaleffecthavebeenlowered? PG p.62,p.99,p.152
Couldthetotalpolyphonybeexceedingthemaximum
polyphonyof120voices? p.32
Notes do not stop

InProgP1:Basic/ControllersNoteOn/Scale,select
theProgramBasicpage,makesurethattheHoldcheck
boxisunchecked. PG p.14
DidyouuseToneAdjusttoturnHoldon? PG p.10
Pitch is incorrect
IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,aretheMaster
TuneandTransposesettingscorrect? p.109
IntheProgP2:OSC/Pitchpage,isthePitchSlope
setto+1.0? PG p.20
Inthecombinationorsong,aretheTransposeand
Detunesettingsofeachtimbre/trackset
appropriately? PG p.82,p.127
Inthetimbre/tracksettingsofeachprogram,
combination,orsong,couldyouhaveselecteda
nonstandardscaletypeotherthanEqual
Temperament? PG p.15,p.83,p.128
Programs and Combinations

Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed
MakesurethattheOscillatorMode(ProgP1:Basic/
Controllers)parameterissettoDoubleorDouble
Drums. p.32
InGlobalP2:Controller,makesurethatDamper
PolarityorFootSwitchPolarityissetcorrectly.
PG p.202
Program does not sound
IftheDRUMTRACKorARPbuttonsareturnedon,
tryturningthemoff.
Couldtheprogrambemuted?
Notes are sounded in duplicate

IsLocalControlturnedOff?
CleartheLocalControlOncheckbox(GlobalP1:
MIDI). PG p.198
Noise or oscillation is heard

WhenusingtheMIDI/TempoSyncfunctiontocontrol
thedelaytimeofaneffect,noisemayoccurinthedelay
sound.Thisnoiseisduetodiscontinuitiesinthedelay
sound,andisnotamalfunction.
Someeffects,suchas019:StereoAnalogRecord,
generatenoiseintentionally.Itisalsopossibletocreate
oscillationusingafilterwithresonance.Thesearenot
malfunctions.
Notethatifyouusethefollowingeffectswiththe
routingdescribedbelow,afeedbackloopwillbe
created,possiblyproducingaloudnoise.Pleaseuse
caution.
Ifthesignalfromanoscillatorortimbre/trackoutput,
orthesignalafteraninserteffect,issenttotheFX
Controlbusandthatsignalisoutputdirectly,withthis
outputsenttotheFXControlbus,aloudnoisemaybe
output.(ItisalsopossiblethataDCcomponentwillbe
outputatthemaximumlevel,producingsilence.)
Couldtheoscillatororamplevelbelowered?
PG p.5,p.6,p.35
UsethePlay/MutebuttonintheProgP0:Play
Mixer&DrumTrackpagetomute/unmutea
program,orintheCombiP0:PlayProgramT01
08andT0916pagestomute/unmutea
combination.
A combination does not play correctly after

you load data
Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou
checktheitemsthatyouwantedtosave? PG p.231
Arethebank/numbersoftheprogramsusedbythe
combinationthesameaswhenthecombinationwas
created?
Ifyouhaveswitchedprogrambanks,youcanuse
theGlobalmodeChangeallbankreferencesmenu
commandtochangetheprogrambankforeach
timbreofacombination. PG p.216
Cant write a Program

IstheMemoryProtectProgramorCombination
checkbox(GlobalP0)cleared? p.110,andPG p.197
Whenusingthe003:StereoLimiteror006:Stereo
Gate,andtheEnvelopeSourceoftheseeffectsisset
aseitherFXControl1orFXControl2,andTrigger
MonitorisOn.
Whenusing174:Vocoder,withtheModulator
SourcesettoFXControl1orFXControl2,andthe
ModulatorHighMixsettootherthan0.
Cant play chords

CouldtheprogramsVoiceAssignModebesetto
Mono? p.33
127
Appendices
Songs
Arpeggiator
Song does not play correctly after being loaded
The Arpeggiator does not start
Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou
checkalloftheitemsthatyouwantedtosave?
PG p.231
IstheARPbuttonturnedon(lit)? p.85
Aretheprogramsusedbythesongthesameaswhen
thesongwascreated?
Ifthearpeggiatordoesnotstartforacombinationor
song,makesurethatArpeggiatorRunischecked,and
thatanarpeggiatorisselectedforAssign. p.88,and
PG p.74,p.92,p.114
Ifyouhaveswitchedprogrambanks,youcanuse
theGlobalmodeChangeallbankreferencesmenu
commandtochangetheprogrambankforeach
trackofasong. PG p.216
IfthearpeggiatordoesnotrunintheGlobalP6:
ArpeggioPatternpage,couldyouhavenavigated
therefromCombinationorSequencermodewith
settingsthatdonotstartthearpeggiator?
Whensavingthesong,itisbesttouseSaveAll
(PCG&SNG)sothattheprogramsaresaved
togetherwiththesong.Thenwhenloading,load
boththe.PCGandthe.SEQdata. PG p.231
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)parametersetto
Internal? PG p.199
IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,isAllARP/DTOff
checked? PG p.195
Playback does not start when you press the

SEQUENCER START/STOP (
) button in
Sequencer mode
Drum Track function
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor
Auto? PG p.199
The Drum Track does not start
Cant record in Sequencer mode

DidyouuseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrackthat
youwanttorecord? p.60
IstheMemoryProtectSongcheckbox(GlobalP0)
unchecked? p.110,andPG p.197
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor
Auto? PG p.199
A combination copied using Copy From Combi doesnt record via arpeggiator as it did
when you were playing it in Combination mode
IsMultiREC(SeqP0:Play/REC)checked? p.60,and
PG p.118
ArethesettingsintheCopyfromCombinationdialog
boxcorrect? PG p.166
IntheCopyfromCombinationdialogbox,check
theAutoadjustArpsettingforMultiRECoption
beforeyouexecutethecopy.Thiswillcausethe
settingstobeadjustedautomatically.
IstheDRUMTRACKbuttonturnedon(lit)? p.97
YoupressedtheDRUMTRACKbuttonbutthedrum
trackpatterndidnotstart.
IstheDRUMTRACKbuttonblinking?Trigger
ModeissettoWaitKBDTrigger.Thedrumtrack
patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardor
receiveanoteon. PG p.56
Didyouselectapatternthatdoesnotcontaindata?
CouldP000:Offbeselectedasthepattern?
PG p.55
IfthedrumtrackpatternfailstostartinCombination
mode,istheOutputsettingappropriate?
IfthedrumtrackpatternfailstostartinSequencer
mode,aretheInputandOutputsettingsappropriate?
p.99,andPG p.146
IsMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor
Auto? PG p.199
IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,isAllARP/DTOff
checked? PG p.195
Cant record Tone Adjust data

ChangesyoumakeusingToneAdjustarerecordedas
systemexclusivedata.DidyouchecktheGlobalmode
MIDIFilterEnableExclusivecheckbox? PG p.201
Drum Kits
RPPR does not start
YouhavelefttheAssigncheckboxunchecked,and
wanttoplaythedrumsampleattheadjacentrighta
semitonelower,butthepitchdoesnotchange.
IstheSeqP0:Play/RECRPPRsettingchecked? p.72
AreAssign,PatternSelect,andTracksetcorrectly?
p.71
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)parametersetto
InternalorAuto? PG p.199
SMF you loaded in Media mode wont play

correctly
ExecutethemenucommandGMInitializetorestore
thesettings. PG p.165
SetBankMaptoGM(2)andloadthedataagain.
PG p.196
128
The drumsamples pitch does not change
IfyouhaveselectedadrumprograminProgram
mode,andthenwanttoeditthedrumkitinGlobal
mode,gototheProgP2:OSC/PitchOSC1Pitch
pageandsetPitchSlopeto+1.0beforeyouenter
Globalmode. PG p.20
Cant edit the drum kit for Double Drums

OSC2
AccesstheP2:OSC/PitchOSC2Setuppage,and
movetoGlobalmodebypressingtheJumpto
DrumKitEditbutton.
Troubleshooting Effects
Effects
Media
Effects are not audible
Cant format the SD card
Haveyouselectedeffectprogram000(NoEffect)?
Doesthemediameettherequirementsforuseonthe
KROME? p.118
Selectaneffectotherthan000:NoEffectforIFX1
5,MFX1,2orTFX.
AretheEffectGlobalSWIFX15,MFX1&2,orTFX
(GlobalP0:BasicSetuppage)settingschecked?
PG p.195
IfyouareinCombinationandSequencermode,and
mastereffectsarenotaudiblewhenyouraisethe
Send1orSend2ofthetimbre/track,doesReturn1or
Return2fromthemastereffectneedtoberaised?
PG p.61,p.99,p.152
Alternatively,hasSend1orSend2foreachoscillator
oftheprogramusedbythetimbre/trackbeenlowered?
PG p.96,p.148
Note: Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby
multiplyingthesendsettingofeachoscillatorinthe
programwiththesendsettingofthetimbre/track.
Haveyouroutedtheoutputtoaninserteffect?
PG p.57,p.58,p.96,p.98,p.148,p.149
MIDI
The KROME does not respond to incoming MIDI
data
AreallMIDIcablesorUSBcablesconnectedcorrectly?
p.20
Isthemediainsertedcorrectly? p.118
CouldthemediasLock(writeprotect)switchbeon?
Cant save/load data on the SD card

Isthemediainsertedcorrectly? p.118
Hasthemediabeenformatted? p.123
CouldthemediasLock(writeprotect)switchbeon?
The date of the data is wrong

Thefilesyousavedhavetheincorrectdate.
TheKROMEdoesnotcontainaninternalcalendar.
UsethemenucommandSetDate/Time(Media
Utilitypage)tospecifythecurrenttimeanddate
beforeyousavethedata. p.123
Connections with a computer

The KROME does not respond to MIDI data
sent from outside
IstheUSBcableconnectedcorrectly? p.20
The computer does not detect the KROME

AretheUSBcablesconnectedcorrectly?
An error occurs when you disconnect from

the computer
AretheKROMEsreceivesettings(suchastheglobal
MIDIchannelandthetimbre/tracksreceivechannel)
settomatchthechannelsofthetransmittingdevice?
PG p.360
NeverdisconnecttheKROMEfromthecomputer
whileyourhostapplicationisinuse.
The KROME does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI data
While connected, you are asked to install

software or a device driver
AretheGlobalP1:MIDIsettingsMIDIFilterEnable
ProgramChange,EnableBankChange,Enable
ControlChange,EnableAfterTouch,andEnable
Exclusiveeachchecked? PG p.200
Doestheoperatingsystemorversionofyourcomputer
supporttheKROME?
DoestheKROMEsupportthetypesofmessagesthat
arebeingsenttoit? PG p.360
Cant recall programs of the desired bank

IstheBankMapsettingcorrect? PG p.196
Damper pedal
Damper response is wrong
ExecutethemenucommandHalfDamperCalibration
(GlobalP0:BasicSetup)tocorrectlycalibratethehalf
damperpedalsensitivity. PG p.217
When using USB, sound processing is slow, or

the tempo is unstable
IstheKORGUSBMIDIdriverinstalledcorrectly?
YoumustinstallthededicatedKorgdriverinorder
tousetheKROMEviaUSBMIDI.
IfyourcomputersoperatingsystemisWindows,
youllneedtoinstallthedriverforeachUSBport
whereyouconnecttheKROME.
IfyouconnecttheKROMEtoadifferentUSBport
thantheoneyouusedwheninstallingtheKORG
USBMIDIDriverforWindows,youllneedtorein
stalltheKORGUSBMIDIdriver.
129
Appendices
Error messages
Destination is empty
Error and confirmation

messages
Meaning:Whenediting,thetrackorpatternthatwas
specifiedasthedestinationcontainsnomusicaldata.
Tosolvethisproblem:
Selectatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusicaldata.
Destination measure is empty
Are you sure ?

Meaning:Thismessageasksyoutoconfirmexecution.
ToexecutepresstheOKbutton.Tocancel,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Meaning:Themeasurethatwasspecifiedasthe
destinationcontainsnodata.
Specifyadestinationmeasurethatcontainsdata.
Destination song is empty

Meaning:Thesongthatwasspecifiedasthecopy
destinationorbouncedestinationdoesnotexist.
Cant calibrate
Meaning:Calibrationcouldnotbeperformed
correctly.
Tryagain.
ExecutetheCreateNewSongcommandinthe
dialogboxthatappearswhenanewsongis
selectedbeforecopyingorbouncing.(Seepage 57)
Directory is not empty
Cant copy/swap double size effect

Meaning:Whencopyingorswappinganinsertion
effectormastereffect,youattemptedtoplacea
doublesizeeffectinIFX5andMFX2.
Modifyyoursettingssothatadoublesizeeffectis
notmovedtoIFX5orMFX2,andexecuteagain.
Cant open pattern
Continue?
Meaning:Whendeletingadirectory,filesor
directoriesexistwithinthatdirectory.
PresstheOKbuttontodeleteallfilesand/or
directorieswithinthatdirectory.
Meaning:Whenyoufinishedrecording,therewasnot
enoughmemorytoopenthepatternthatwasputinto
thetrack(Whenitmustbeopenedautomatically).If
youpresstheOKbutton,thepatterndatawillbe
deleted,andtherecordedoreditedcontentwillbe
saved.IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,therecorded
contentwillbediscarded.
Error in formatting media
Completed
Meaning:Anerroroccurredwhilereadingdatafrom
media.Thiserrormayalsoappearwhendataisbeing
writtentomediabyaSaveorCopyoperation.Tosolve
thisproblem:
Meaning:Theprocessingexecutedbythecommand
hasbeencompleted.
Completed. Please turn the power off, and then

on again
Meaning:ExecutionofUpdateSystemSoftwarehas
beencompletedsuccessfully.Turnthepowerswitch
off,andthenonagaintocompletetheupdate.
D
Destination and source are identical
Meaning:Whencopyingorbouncing,thesamesong,
trackorpatternwasselectedforboththesourceand
destination.Tosolvethisproblem:
130
Cleanup directory
Are you sure?
Meaning:Anerroroccurredwhileperforminga
physicalformat(fullformat)orhighlevelformat
(quickformat)ofthemedia.Tosolvethisproblem:
Useothermedia.
Error in reading from media
Executethereadingprocedureonceagain.Ifthe
sameerroroccurs,itispossiblethatthedataonthe
mediahasbeendamaged.
Error in writing to media

Meaning:Averificationerroroccurredwhilewriting
datatoamedia.Tosolvethisproblem:
Itispossiblethatthemediahasbeenphysically
damaged.Tryanothermedia.Avoidusingthe
mediathatproducedtheerror.
Selectadifferentsong,track,orpatternforthe
sourceanddestination.
File already exists
Destination from-measure within the limits of

source
Meaning:WhenexecutingaCreateDirectoryorFile
Renameprocedure,adirectoryorfileofthesame
namealreadyexistsonthemedia.
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMoveMeasure
commandforalltracksorwithinthesametrack,the
specifieddestinationmeasureiswithinthesource
range.Tosolvethisproblem:
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMediamodeUtility
Copycommandwithoutusingwildcards,thecopy
destinationcontainedafileofthesamenameasthe
copysource.
Setadestinationmeasurethatisoutsideofthe
sourcerange.
Eitherdeletetheexistingdirectoryorfile,orspecify
adifferentname.
Error messages Error and confirmation messages
File unavailable
Measure number over limit
Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadoropenafilewhose
formatwasincorrect.
Meaning:Theattemptededitprocedurewouldcause
thetracklengthtoexceed999measures.
File/path not found
Deleteunnecessarymeasures.
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDeletecommandinthe
MediamodeUtilitypage,thespecifiedfiledidnot
exist.
Measure size over limit
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe
MediamodeUtilitypage,andyouusedawildcardto
specifythecopyfilename,thespecifiedfilewasnot
found.Alternatively,thelengthofthecopysourcepath
nameexceeded76characters.
Meaning:InMediamodewhenyouusedtheOpen
buttontoopenadirectory,thepathlengthincluding
theselecteddirectorynameexceeded76characters.
Checkthefileordirectory.
Meaning:WhenyoupressedtheWRITEbuttontosave
yourdatainSequencermode,themediawasnotina
statethatallowedsaving,orthepreviouslyopened
directorywasnotalocationwhereSNGfilescouldbe
saved.
Ifthesavedestinationdirectoryissomethingother
thantheDOSdirectoryfromwhichyouopeneda
.PCGor.SNGfile,amessagesuchasFile/pathnot
foundwillappear,andthedatacannotbesaved.
Inthiscase,movetoMediamode,selectan
appropriatesavedestination,andthenexecute
SaveAllorSaveSEQ.
I
Illegal file description
Meaning:Thefilenamethatyouspecifiedwhensaving
afileorcreatingadirectorycontainedinvalid
characters.Tosolvethisproblem:
Changethefilenameyouarespecifying.Filenames
notpermittedbyMSDOScannotbeusedasa
filename.
Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,the
numberofeventsinameasureexceededthemaximum
(approximately65,535events).
Meaning:Theattemptededitprocedurewouldcause
themaximumnumberofeventsinameasure
(approximately65,535)tobeexceeded.
Tosolveeitheroftheseproblems:
Useeventeditingetc.todeleteunwanteddata.
Media changed
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe
MediamodeUtilitypage,themediawasexchangedor
ejected,anditwasnotpossibletocopybetween
separatemediaonthesamedrive.
Media unavailable
Meaning:Youselectedamediasourcethatdoesnot
allowwriting.
Media write protected

Meaning:Theotherwritingdestinationmediais
writeprotected.
Turnoffwriteprotectontheothermedia,and
executethecommandonceagain.
Memory full
Meaning:Wheneditingasong,trackorpatternin
Sequencermode,thetotaldataofallsongshasusedup
allofthesequencedatamemory,andfurthereditingis
notpossible.Tosolvethisproblem:
Deleteothersongdataetc.toregainfreememory.
Illegal SMF data
Meaning:WhilerealtimerecordinginSequencer
mode,thereisnomorefreememorytoaccommodate
therecordeddata,sorecordinghasbeenforcibly
halted.Tosolvethisproblem:
Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadafilethatwasnota
StandardMIDIFile.
Deleteothersongdataetc.toregaintheamountof
freememory.
Illegal SMF division
Memory overflow
Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile
thatwastimecodebased.
Meaning:WhilereceivingexclusivedatainMedia
modeSaveExclusive,allremaininginternalmemory
wasusedup.Tosolvethisproblem:
Illegal SMF format

Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile
ofaformatotherthan0or1.
M
Master Track cant be recorded alone
Meaning:Whenrealtimerecordingasingletrack,you
attemptedtobeginrecordingwiththemastertrackas
thecurrenttrack.
SelectaMIDItrackforrecording,insteadofthe
MasterTrack.
Ifyouarereceivingtwoormoresetsofexclusive
data,transmitthemseparatelytotheKROME.
Memory Protected
Meaning:Theinternalprogram,combination,song,
drumkit,userarpeggiopatternisprotected.
InGlobalmode,turnoffwriteprotect,andexecute
thewriteorloadprocedureonceagain.
MIDI data receiving error

Meaning:WhilereceivingMIDISystemExclusive
data,theformatofthereceiveddatawasinvalid,for
example,becausethesizeofthedatawasincorrect.
131
Appendices
Not enough memory to open pattern
No data
Meaning:Therewasinsufficientsequencermemoryto
openthepattern,soeditingisnotpossible.
Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,thefile
containednoevents.
No media
Meaning:WhenexecutingacommandinMediamode,
nomediawasinsertedinthedrive.Tosolvethis
problem:
Insertmedia,andnavigatetoanappropriate
directorythattheKROMEwillrecognize. p.118
Not enough pattern locations available

Meaning:WhenexecutingLoadDrumTrackPattern,
theattemptedloadprocedurewouldexceedthe
remainingnumberofuserpatternsintheselected
song.
Meaning:Whenperformingrealtimemultitrack
recording,youattemptedtobeginrecordingwithno
trackssettoREC.Tosolvethisproblem:
Createanewsong,andreloadthedataintotheuser
patternsofthatsong.Youcanloadupto100user
patternsintoeachsong.Ifyouhavemoredrum
trackpatternsthanthistoload,youcandivide
thembetweentwoormoresongs.
SetthedesiredtracksforrecordingtoREC.
Not enough song locations available
No space available on media
Meaning:Whenloadinga.SNGfilewithAppend
specified,youattemptedtoloadmoresongsthancan
beloaded.
No recording track specified
Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtosaveorcopyafile,
ortocreateadirectory,therewasnotenoughfree
spaceontheothermedia.Tosolvethisproblem:
Eitherdeleteanexistingfile,orreplacethemedia
withanotherthatcontainssufficientfreespace.
Not enough Drum Track pattern locations

available
Meaning:Whenconvertingasongsuserpatterntoa
userdrumtrackpattern,youhaveexceededthe
numberofuserdrumtrackpatternsavailableforuse.
Asnecessary,executetheMediamodeSavePCG
commandtosaveyouruserdrumtrackpatterns.In
Sequencermode,executethemenucommandErase
DrumTrackPatterntoincreasethenumberof
availabledrumtrackuserpatterns.Thentrythe
conversionprocedureagain.
Not enough Drum Track pattern memory

Meaning:Whenconvertingasongsuserpatterntoa
userdrumtrackpattern,therewasnotenoughfree
memory.
Asnecessary,executetheMediamodeSavePCG
commandtosaveyouruserdrumtrackpatterns.In
Sequencermode,executethemenucommandErase
DrumTrackPatterntoeraseotheruserdrumtrack
patternsandincreasetheamountoffreememory.
Thentrytheconversionprocedureagain.
Not enough memory

Meaning:Whenstartingrealtimerecordingin
Sequencermode,theminimumamountoffree
memory(suchasmemoryfortheBAReventsuptothe
recordingstartlocation)couldnotbeallocated.To
solvethisproblem:
Not enough memory to load

Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtoloada.SNGfileora
standardMIDIfileinMediamode,therewas
insufficientfreememoryinthesequencememory.To
solvethisproblem:
132
Eitherdeleteunwanteddatasuchasasong,track,
orpattern,ordonotopenthepattern.
InSequencermode,executeDeleteSongto
increasethenumberofsongsthatcanbeused,and
thenloadthesongagain.
P
Pattern conflicts with events
Meaning:ItwasnotpossibletoexecutetheBounce
procedurebecauseoneofthetrackscontaineda
pattern,andthesamemeasureoftheothertrack
containedeventsorapattern.
Openthepattern.
Pattern exists across destination to-end-ofmeasure or source from-measure

Meaning:Whenmovingameasure,theeditprocedure
couldnotbeexecutedbecauseapatternhadbeenput
inthedestinationendmeasure,orthesourcestart
measure,andhadnotbeenopened.
Openthepattern.
Pattern exists in destination or source track

Open pattern?
Meaning:Apatternhasbeenplacedinthetrackthat
youspecifiedasadestinationorsourceforediting.If
youwishtoopenthepatternandexecute(theeventsof
thepatternwillbecopied),presstheOKbutton.Ifyou
wishtoexecutewithoutopeningthepattern,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Pattern used in song
Continue ?
Meaning:Whenediting,thespecifiedpatternhasbeen
placedinatrack.Ifyouwishtoexecute,presstheOK
button.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel
button.
Error messages Error and confirmation messages
Root directory is full
Unable to create directory
Meaning:Whenattemptingtocreateafileordirectory
attherootlevelofthemedia,youexceededthe
maximumnumberoffilesorfolderthatcouldbe
createdintherootdirectoryofthatmedia.
Meaning:Youattemptedtocreateadirectorythat
wouldexceedthemaximumpathnamelength(76
charactersforthefullpathname).
Eitherdeleteanexistingfileordirectory,orOpena
directorytomovedownonelevelbeforecreatinga
fileordirectory.
Unable to save file

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMediamodeUtility
menucommandCopy,thecopydestinationpath
lengthexceeded76characters.
Meaning:WhensavingafileinMediamode,thesave
destinationpathexceeded76characters.
Selected file/path is not correct
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheMediamodeUtility
menucommandCopy,thefilemanagementdata
exceededthesizeofthemanagementarea.
Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you
attemptedtoloada.PCGfileofthesamenamethat
wasnotdividedorhaddifferingcontents.
Loadthecorrect.PCGfile.
Source is empty
You cant undo this operation
Meaning:Nodataexistsinthetrackorpatternthat
youspecifiedasthesource.
Meaning:Onceyouentereventediting(evenifyou
leaveeventeditingwithoutactuallyeditinganevent),
itwillnolongerbepossibletoexecuteCompareto
listentothepreviousedit.Ifyouwishtoenterevent
editing,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Specifyatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusical
data.
Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute
SwapInsertEffectifoneoftheeffectstobeswapped
(Source1orSource2)isadoublesizeeffect,andis
thereforeanunusableIFXnumber.
IfyouwanttoexecutetheSwapprocedureona
doublesizeeffect,specifyanIFXnumbertowhich
adoublesizeeffectisassigned.
T
The internal memory has been corrupted, likely
due to an interruption of power while the system
was writing/saving data. This has been repaired
and the affected Bank has been initialized. [OK]
Meaning:Amemorywriteproceduredidnotend
normally,perhapsbecausethepowerwasturnedoff
whileprocessingwasstillunderwayafteryouwrotea
programorotherdataintointernalmemory.
TheKROMEwillautomaticallyinitializeitselfin
ordertorepairtheinternalmemory.Thismessage
willappearatthistime;pressOKtoclosethe
dialogbox.Insomecases,thepreloadbankdata
maybetemporarilyinitialized.Asnecessary,use
theGlobalmodeLoadPreload/DemoData
commandtoloadthepreloaddataintointernal
memory,orifyouhaveyourownbackupPCG,
loaditusingMediamode.
You cant undo last operation
Are you sure?
Are you sure?
Meaning:Whenyouexitrecordingoreventeditingin
Sequencermode,thememoryareaforUndo(Compare
function)isnotallocated.Ifyouwishtokeepthedata
thatwasjustrecordedoredited,presstheOKbutton.
Ifyouwishtoreturntothepreviousdata(i.e.,todelete
thedatathatwasjustrecordedoredited),pressthe
Cancelbutton.
Meaning:WheneditinginSequencermode,memory
areaforUndo(Comparefunction)cannotbeallocated.
Ifyouwishtoexecutetheedit,presstheOKbutton(It
willnotbepossibletoundoyouredit).Ifyoudecide
nottoexecutetheedit,presstheCancelbutton.
InordertoallocatememoryareaforUndo
(Comparefunction),deleteunneededdatasuchas
songs,tracks,orpatterns.Werecommendthatyou
datatomediabeforeyouexecutetheedit
procedure.
There is not readable data

Meaning:Eitherthefilesizeis0orthefiledoesnot
containdatathatcanbeaccessedbytheloadoropen
procedure.Alternatively,thedataisdamagedetc.,and
cannotbeloadedoraccessed.
This file is already loaded

Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you
attemptedtoloadafilethathadalreadybeenloaded.
Loadthe.PCGfilesthathavenotyetbeenloaded.
133
Appendices
Specifications
Operating temperature
Keyboard
System
0 +40 C
61-note
Semi-Weighted Keyboard (velocity sensitive, no aftertouch)

Normally C2C7 (adjustable in the range [C1...C6][C3...C8])
73-note
Semi-Weighted Keyboard (velocity sensitive, no aftertouch)

Normally C1C7 (adjustable in the range [C0...C6][C2...C8])
88-note
NH (Natural weighted hammer action) Keyboard (no aftertouch)

* The NH Keyboard delivers a playing feel similar to that of an acoustic piano, with low
notes being heavier and high notes being lighter.
EDS-X (Enhanced Definition Synthesis-eXpanded)
Programs
Maximum Polyphony
120 voices max, single mode

60 voices max, double mode
* The actual maximum polyphony will vary depending on oscillator settings such as
stereo multisamples and velocity crossfading.
Preset PCM
3.8 Gbytes (when calculated as 48kHz 16-bit linear data)

583 multisamples (including twelve stereo),
2,080 drumsamples (including 474 stereo)
Oscillator
OSC1 (Single), OSC1+2 (Double): Stereo multisamples are supported

8 velocity zones per oscillator, with switching, crossfades and layers.
Filters
Four types of filter routing (single, serial, parallel, 24 dB)

Two multi-mode filters per voice (low pass, high pass, band pass, band reject)
Driver
Per-voice nonlinear driver and low boost.
EQ
Three bands, with sweepable mid.
Modulation
For each voice, two envelope generators (Filter & Amp), two LFOs, two key tracking
generators (Filter & Amp), and two AMS mixers
In addition, pitch EG, common LFO, and two common key tracking generators
16 Timbres
Up to sixteen timbres, keyboard and velocity split/layer/crossfade, and modifications

to the program setting via the Tone Adjust function
Master Keyboard
functionality
These allow you to control external MIDI devices
Sound Engine
Combinations
Drum Kits
The number of
-Combinations
-Programs
-Drum Kits
Effects
Stereo and mono drumsamples.

8-way velocity switches with crossfades and adjustable crossfade shapes (Linear, Power, Layer).
User Combinations
512 Combinations/384 Preload
User Programs
768 Programs/640 Preload
User Drum Kits
48 Drum Kits/32 Preload
Preset Programs
256 GM2 Programs + 9 GM2 Drum Programs
5 Insert Effects
In-line processing; stereo in - stereo out.
2 Master Effects
Two effects sends; stereo in - stereo out.
1 Total Effect
For overall processing on the main outputs, such as compression, limiting, and EQ;
stereo in - stereo out.
3-band Track EQ
High, low, and sweepable mid band. Per Program in Program Mode, per Timbre in
Combination mode (16 total), and per Track in Sequencer mode (16 total).
Effects types
193 types (Usable for insert, master, or total effects. However, double-size effects
cannot be used as the total effect.)
Modulation
Dynamic Modulation, two common LFOs
Effects Control Bus
Stereo side-chaining for limiter, gates, vocoders, etc.
Effects Presets
Up to 32 per Effect
Program mode: one arpeggiator available. Combination and Sequencer modes: two arpeggiators available.
Dual polyphonic arpeggiators
5 preset arpeggio patterns

1028 user arpeggio patterns (900 preload)
Drum Track
Preset patterns
605 patterns (Held in common with sequencer preset patterns.)
User patterns
1,000 patterns. Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to drum track
user patterns.
Trigger Mode / Sync / Zone settings can be specified

16 MIDI Tracks & 1 Master Track
128 Songs
Resolution: 480 ppq (parts per quarter-note)
Tempo: 40.00300.00 bpm (1/100 bpm resolution)
Up to 210,000 MIDI events
Sequencer
Media
134
16 preset/16 user template songs

Cue List function
20 cue lists. Songs can be arranged consecutively or repeatedly in up to 99 steps. A cue

list can be converted back into a song.
Patterns/RPPR
605 Presets /100 User Patterns (per Song)

RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Recording): 1 set per Song.
Format
Korg (KROME) format, SMF (formats 0 and 1) supported
Load, Save, Utility

Data Filer functionality (Save and Load MIDI System Exclusive Data)
Specifications Operating requirements
Joystick, SW1, 2
SELECT buttons
Realtime controls
Controllers
REALTIME CONTROLS (TONE, USER), ARP

REALTIME CONTROL: Realtime modulation
4 knobs
Arpeggio control
Drum Track
Buttons = DRUMTRACK
Arpeggiator
Buttons = ARP
Effect On/Off
Buttons = MASTER FX, TOTAL FX
Display
TouchView graphical user interface, 7 inch TFT, WVGA (800x480 dots), adjustable
brightness.
MODE
Buttons = COMBI, PROG SEQ, GLOBAL, MEDIA
Value Controllers
VALUE Dial, INC/DEC buttons, 10-key numeric keypad, () button, (.) button, ENTER
button, COMPARE button
User Interface
BANK
Buttons = AF (used for Combination A, B, C, D)
SEQUENCER
Buttons = PAUSE (
TEMPO
TEMPO Knob, TAP button
Other
WRITE button, PAGE button, EXIT button, VOLUME knob
), REW (
), FF (
), LOCATE (
), REC (
), START/STOP (
1/4" TS (Mono), unbalanced, Volume knob controls

AUDIO OUTPUT
L/MONO, R
Audio Outputs
Analog
Output Impedance
1.1k stereo; 550 mono (L/Mono only)
Maximum Level
+16.0 dBu
Load Impedance
10 k or greater
1/8" TRS (Stereo), Volume knob

Headphone output
Control Inputs
Output Impedance
33
Maximum Level
60+ 60 mW @33
DAMPER (Supports piano-style half-damper pedals as well as standard foot switches)

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL
MIDI
IN, OUT
USB
1 USB (TYPE B), MIDI interface
SD-Card slot
Capacity recognized: SD memory cards up to 2 Gigabytes (GB). SDHC memory cards up to 32 Gigabytes (GB).
SDXC memory cards are not supported.
Power
AC adapter power supply connector (DC 12V,

KROME-61
Dimensions
(W D H)
Weight
), Power On/Off switch
1,027 x 313 x 93 (mm)/40.43" x 12.32" x 3.66"
KROME-73
1,191 x 313 x 93 (mm)/46.89" x 12.32" x 3.66"
KROME-88
1,448 x 383 x 131 (mm)/57.01" x 15.08" x 5.16"
KROME-61
61-note 7.2 kg/15.87 lbs
KROME-73
73-note 8.2 kg/18.08 lbs
KROME-88
88-note 14.7 kg/32.41 lbs
KROME-61
Power Consumption
KROME-73
13W
KROME-88
Accessories
Options
AC adapter, Quick Start guide

Accessory Disc (KROME Parameter Guide (PDF), Operation guide (PDF), Video manual etc.)
XVP-10
Expression/Volume Pedal
EXP-2
Foot Controller
DS-1H
Damper Pedal
PS-1, PS-3
Pedal Switch
Operating requirements
KORG USB-MIDI Driver
Windows
Operating system: Microsoft Windows XP Home/Professional SP3,
Windows Vista SP2 (including 64-bit),
Windows 7 SP1 (including 64-bit)
Computer: USB port required (a USB host controller made by Intel is recommended)
Macintosh
Operating system: Mac OS X 10.5 or later.
Computer: Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor that has a USB port and satisfies the requirements for
running Mac OS X.
*Appearanceandspecificationsaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
135
[Music Workstation]
Date : 2011. 10. 04
MIDI Implementation Chart
KROME
MIDI Implementation Chart

Function
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
Mode
Memorized
Messages
Altered
Note
Number:
Transmitted
Recognized
1 16
1 16
1 16
1 16
0 127
Note On
Note Off
Aftertouch
Polyphonic (Key)
Monophonic (Channel)
Remarks
Memorized
True Voice
Velocity
Ver.: 1.00
9n, V=1 127
0 127
0 127
All note numbers 0127 can be transmitted

by the Arpeggiator or as sequence data
9n, V=1 127
Polyphonic aftertouch and Channel aftertouch *A (receive)

transmitted only as sequence data
*A (receive)
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
*C
0, 32
1, 2, 17, 19, 20, 21
4, 5, 7, 8, 10
11, 12, 13
64, 65, 66, 67
7079
8083
9195
14, 2225
6, 38
96, 97
100, 101
0119
120, 121
*P
Bank Select (MSB, LSB)
Joystick (+Y, Y), Knob1-4
*C
Pedal, Portamento Time, Volume, IFX pan, Pan *C
Expression, Effect Control 1, 2
*C
Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft *C
Sound (Realtime Control TONE 14: 74, 71, 79, 72) *C
Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller
*C
Send 1, 2, Effect ON/OFF (IFXs, MFXs, TFX) *C
Arpeggiator Controllers
*C, *2
Data Entry (MSB, LSB)
*C
Data Increment, Decrement
*C
RPN (LSB, MSB)
*C, *3
Realtime Control USER 14, Seq. Data *C (Seq when received)
All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers
*C
0 127
Variable Range
*P
0 127
0 127
*E, *4
System Exclusive
System
Common
Song Position
Song Select
Tune
System
Real Time
Clock
Command
Aux
Messages
Local On/Off
All Notes Off
Active Sense
Reset
0 127
0 127
When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue list. *1

When cue list is selected, corresponds to cue list 0-19. *1
*1
*1
123 127
Notes *P, *A, *C, *E: Transmitted/received when Global P1: MIDI Filter (Program Change, Aftertouch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively.
*1: When Global P1: MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for External MIDI.
*2: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2: Controllers. The number shown here is the CC default assignment.
*3: RPN (LSB,MSB)=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune
*4: In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune, and Master Coarse
Tune are supported.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
: Yes
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
: No
ConsultyourlocalKorgdistributorformoreinformationonMIDIIMPLEMENTATION.
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS

Thisproducthasbeenmanufacturedaccordingtostrictspecificationsandvoltagerequirements
thatareapplicableinthecountryinwhichitisintendedthatthisproductshouldbeused.Ifyou
havepurchasedthisproductviatheinternet,throughmailorder,and/orviaatelephonesale,
youmustverifythatthisproductisintendedtobeusedinthecountryinwhichyoureside.
WARNING:Useofthisproductinanycountryotherthanthatforwhichitisintendedcouldbe
dangerousandcouldinvalidatethemanufacturersordistributorswarranty.
Pleasealsoretainyourreceiptasproofofpurchaseotherwiseyourproductmaybedisqualified
fromthemanufacturersordistributorswarranty.
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan

2012 KORG INC.

Krome PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Krome PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Operation Guide

About this manual

References to the KROME

Abbreviations for the manuals: QS, OG, PG,

Quick Start Guide

Example screen displays

Voice Name List

Conventions in this manual

Introduction to the KROME . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Playing and editing Programs . . . . . . . .21

Playing and editing Combinations . . . .43

Creating songs (Sequencer mode) . . . .53

Creating an RPPR pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Adjusting Global KROME setings . . . . 109

Saving your song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Global settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Loading & saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

An overview of the KROMEs effects . . . . . . . . . . 77

Saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Dynamic modulation, Common FX LFO . . . . . . . 82

Loading data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Media utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Creating and playing a Cue List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Using the arpeggiator while you play . . . . . . . . 85

Drum Track function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Using Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Introduction to the KROME

* The diagram shown is for KROME-61

2. SW1, 2 and Joystick

SW1 and SW2

DRUM TRACK button

SELECT button, knobs 14

Introduction to the KROME

12. Save (Write)

COMBI, PROG, SEQ, GLOBAL, MEDIA buttons

10. VALUE controllers

INC and DEC buttons

14. TEMPO controls

11. PAGE SELECT, EXIT

Front and rear panels Rear panel

ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack

Introduction to the KROME

Objects in the display

f: Sliders and knobs

f: Sliders and knobs

When selected in Global or

Page number and name

Front and rear panels Objects in the display

i: Popup button (1)

Text edit button

j: Popup button (2)

* Text edit button

Character Set Selects

Press here to scroll to left or right.

Press here and slide to left or

Press here to scroll to the

k: Menu command button

Cancel button, OK button

* OK and Cancel buttons

Menu command button

* Done, Copy, and Insert buttons

Introduction to the KROME

* EG, Velocity Split